IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | I am Brian Myers. Welcome to Revit
Structure 2013 Essential Training.
| | 00:09 | In this course, I'll provide you with a solid
overview of the tools available in Revit Structure.
| | 00:14 | We'll start off to explore in the basic
modification commands, which allow us to make quick design
| | 00:18 | changes to structural elements.
| | 00:20 | We'll take a comprehensive look at the creation
of structural elements, including the placement
| | 00:25 | of columns and the coping of our beams.
| | 00:27 | I will then walk through the creation of
plants, including the automated process of section
| | 00:32 | creation and detailing
and enlarged callout views.
| | 00:35 | Finally, I'll finish up by putting drawings
together as well as linking in outside CAD
| | 00:40 | and Revit files into a project.
| | 00:43 | Whether you're experienced in using 3D
design software or just starting out, as long as
| | 00:47 | you have a basic knowledge of structural
design, you'll find the skills you need to design
| | 00:51 | your structures here.
| | 00:52 | Now let's get started with Revit
Structure 2013 Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a Premium Member of the lynda.com
Online Training Library or if you're watching
| | 00:05 | this tutorial on a DVD, you have access to
the Exercise Files used throughout this title.
| | 00:10 | If you're not a Premium Member, you'll still have
access to two essential Exercise Files for this course.
| | 00:15 | I've downloaded the standard Exercise Files
Premium Members have access to in this folder.
| | 00:20 | As you can see, they are arranged by Chapter and have
names related to the content we will be discussing.
| | 00:27 | If you're not a premium subscriber to lynda.com,
you'll still have access to two Exercise Files
| | 00:32 | and you'll be able see a link to download
those Exercise Files on the course page. But
| | 00:38 | you can also follow along from
scratch with your own assets.
| | 00:41 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Introduction to Revit StructureIntroducing the user interface| 00:00 | Let's start by reviewing the
different areas of the Revit user interface.
| | 00:03 | The first area that we need
to know about is the Ribbon.
| | 00:07 | The Ribbon goes across the top of the screen
and it has all those different commands that
| | 00:11 | we would typically use inside of the project, such
as being able to draw beams or walls or columns.
| | 00:18 | Also, it has tools that allow us to do
dimensioning in text and make other kinds of modifications.
| | 00:24 | Some of those can be found
underneath these tabs going across the top,
| | 00:27 | and in this case, I'm going
to select on the Annotate tab.
| | 00:30 | And the Annotate tab is there for any of the
typical two-dimensional drawing kinds of things
| | 00:35 | such as dimensions, line work, text.
| | 00:39 | If you are used to AutoCAD environment
where you've been doing your drafting, there is
| | 00:43 | this also option here for regions.
| | 00:44 | This is very similar to hatch
patterns inside of the program like AutoCAD.
| | 00:48 | So, with this Ribbon going across the top,
this is where you can find all those different
| | 00:52 | tools and have them be available for you.
| | 00:54 | The next thing that we need to about
is going to be the Quick Access toolbar,
| | 00:58 | and it's going across the top.
| | 01:00 | The Quick Access toolbar has all those
most commonly-used commands that you typically
| | 01:03 | would use day-to-day.
| | 01:05 | Such things as Open and Save. It also has Text.
| | 01:10 | That being said, maybe the tool that you'd
like to have up there, the tool that you use
| | 01:14 | everyday isn't currently showing up.
Well, you can add them up there as well.
| | 01:17 | In order to be able to do that, all you
have to do is move over to the tab that has the
| | 01:21 | tool you want to add.
| | 01:23 | In this case, let's go ahead and
try to add a Beam tool up there.
| | 01:27 | So, underneath the Structure tab,
you can just select on Structure,
| | 01:30 | there is a option there for Beam.
| | 01:32 | Now, don't left-click on it just highlight on it.
Right-click and Add it to the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 01:39 | And now you can see that there's a nice little Beam
tool up here, which is same tool that we had over here.
| | 01:44 | If for some reason you didn't want that tool,
you want a different tool on the Quick Access
| | 01:47 | Toolbar, all you have to do is right-click
and say Remove from the Quick Access Toolbar,
| | 01:51 | and it will remove that tool from that bar.
| | 01:54 | The next area to look at is going to
be the big R up here in the corner.
| | 01:58 | In fact, that is where I usually call it.
| | 02:00 | It's going to be the big R, but
technically it's Application menu.
| | 02:03 | And if you select on the Application menu,
it allows you to do Saving, Exports Printing,
| | 02:11 | all different stuff in order to be
able to get out that final product.
| | 02:14 | Now, there's also have
option here called Options.
| | 02:17 | And if you select on Options, you'll see that
there is a General section that has information
| | 02:23 | such as saving, how often do you want it to
remind you to save. There is options related
| | 02:29 | to graphics, including what the background
color of the program should be. There is even
| | 02:35 | user interface settings, which allow
you to change such things as colors.
| | 02:40 | There is more user interface
settings related to keyboard shortcuts.
| | 02:44 | So, if you like to type in commands,
you can customize those through there.
| | 02:48 | I'll go ahead and click on Customize, and
you could see a list of the different commands,
| | 02:51 | as well as the shortcuts that
are associated with those commands.
| | 02:55 | I will click on Ok to get out of
this dialog box. And OK again.
| | 03:01 | But to make a long story short with Options,
| | 03:03 | it's there to be able to help you configure
the software, so it displays and looks the
| | 03:06 | way that you want to be able to use it.
| | 03:08 | The next area is the Info Center, and the Info
Center can be seen going across the top here.
| | 03:14 | There's really two ways to
know about an Info Center.
| | 03:17 | First is this bar right here and
I have a flashing cursor in it.
| | 03:20 | If you just click on the little flashing area
here and then type in a command, like in this
| | 03:24 | case I'm going to type in wall--but I could
type in beam or column or anything along those
| | 03:28 | lines--and then just hit Enter to that.
| | 03:31 | It's then going to reach out to the
Internet and it's going to find information related
| | 03:34 | to that thing that you just typed in.
| | 03:37 | In this case, it goes out to the Autodesk
wiki and it finds information related to walls.
| | 03:41 | It can also show you informational videos.
| | 03:43 | It will take out to discussion forms in
different areas that will give you more information
| | 03:48 | about that kind of object
that you have a question about.
| | 03:51 | And next I'm going to go ahead and close my
browser down, and there is a big X that also
| | 03:56 | shows up here on the Info Center.
| | 03:58 | And this is for Exchange Apps that you won't
get in here very often, but it's a very nice
| | 04:02 | tool to know about
| | 04:03 | because if you click on the big X here, it'll
take you out to the Internet, and you'll see
| | 04:06 | that it has a lot of free tools--or in some
case paid tools--that you can select on, download,
| | 04:13 | and install inside of your Revit Software,
in order to increase the functionality of it.
| | 04:19 | The next area to know about is going to be
this bar right here that's been blank for
| | 04:23 | most of this time and
it's called the Options Bar.
| | 04:25 | Now, the Options Bar gives us different options
based on the kind of command that we're currently
| | 04:30 | activating and using it.
| | 04:31 | For instance, if I select on Beam here
underneath the Structure tab, it'll give us different
| | 04:37 | options related to drawing a beam
and the properties of that beam.
| | 04:41 | If you want to be able to get out of this
command, all you have to so is select on this
| | 04:45 | button right here that says Modify, and it'll
automatically take us out of the command, but
| | 04:50 | it will also clear out the options,
because there's currently not anything that would
| | 04:54 | have an option related to it.
| | 04:57 | The next area is going to be the
Properties palette right over here on the side.
| | 05:00 | Now, the Properties palette
works for two different conditions.
| | 05:04 | One is that if you select a command,
you'll see properties related to that command.
| | 05:09 | And if we click on Modify, it'll take us
out of that command, and you could see it sort
| | 05:12 | of clears a lot of the information
that was just in that Properties palette.
| | 05:15 | Now, the Properties palette also will
allow us to select on an object over here.
| | 05:20 | And if we click on an object, we can then
see the properties of that object over here
| | 05:25 | underneath the Properties palette.
| | 05:26 | And we can find more information about that object
by just scrolling down here inside of the palette.
| | 05:35 | The next area underneath that is
going to be the Project Browser.
| | 05:39 | The Project Browser is right here,
and if you click on any of these views--
| | 05:43 | in this case, I'm going to double-click,
| | 05:45 | So, really quickly just double-click, left-click, here at the First Floor--it will bring
| | 05:50 | up the first floor plan.
| | 05:52 | And you could do that with any of the
other views that show up here on the list.
| | 05:55 | Such things in the Project Browser are
going to be elevations and sections and details,
| | 06:00 | and all that kind of stuff.
| | 06:01 | Basically, if it's inside of the project, and
you want to be able to view it, you probably
| | 06:05 | need to go to the project
browser in order to be able to see it.
| | 06:08 | The next area is going to be the drawing
area, which we're all pretty much familiar with
| | 06:11 | already because, well, that's where
all of our drawing is taking place.
| | 06:14 | Right now, it's where my First Floor is
showing up at, but that's just called the drawing
| | 06:17 | area, and that's where you
can enter in the information.
| | 06:20 | The next spot is down here at the bottom of
the screen or near the bottom of the screen,
| | 06:26 | and actually this is related to the view that you
are currently in, and it's called the View Control Bar.
| | 06:31 | What this does is it allows us to change
such things just as the scale of the view, the
| | 06:36 | properties of the view.
| | 06:37 | So, maybe we see things in color, maybe we
can see through objects if you want to, and
| | 06:41 | all that is controlled on per-view basis.
| | 06:43 | Now, when I say on a per-view basis, what
it means is if I come up here to this little
| | 06:48 | box right here, right between the dash and
the X, you can see that it's associated just
| | 06:53 | with this one view.
| | 06:55 | And if the view shrinks itself down, then the
properties still are associated with this one view.
| | 06:59 | If you want to expand this back up again,
we can just click on that little box again,
| | 07:02 | and it'll expand itself back up.
| | 07:04 | Finally, the last area I want to point out
is going to be the Status Bar, and that's
| | 07:08 | down here at the bottom of the screen.
| | 07:10 | And the Status Bar will ask you questions
related to, "what is the next thing you want Revit to do?"
| | 07:15 | In this case, it is asking, "okay, do
you want us to select on an object next?"
| | 07:19 | And you can do that by either hitting Ctrl or Shift
or doing other things that it's telling you to do.
| | 07:26 | So, probably the most difficult thing about
learning Revit is finding the appropriate commands.
| | 07:30 | Actually, it is not as that difficult.
| | 07:31 | It's just that there are many options available,
and it takes a while to learn where everything is at.
| | 07:36 | By remembering the basics that we've just
covered, you'll be quicker in finding the
| | 07:39 | appropriate commands when you need them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Zooming, panning, and using the ViewCube to navigate the workspace| 00:00 | The ability to move around in a view is critical
when we are modeling and documenting our designs.
| | 00:05 | The first time we can leverage to be able
to move around inside of the view is actually
| | 00:09 | the wheel on our mouse.
| | 00:10 | To do this, all you have to do is click inside
of a View, then move your wheel either forwards
| | 00:17 | or back, and you will see that the whole
screen will serve as zoom in or zoom out.
| | 00:21 | Now, what zooms in or zooms out from
is wherever your arrow is pointed at.
| | 00:26 | So if I would point my arrow over in this
direction, and then spin the little wheel
| | 00:30 | on the mouse, it will
automatically zoom in there.
| | 00:33 | If I then decide to, alright I want to zoom out,
| | 00:35 | you can just pullback on the wheel,
rotate it, and you can see how it zooms you out.
| | 00:41 | Now, another thing that wheel can do is if
you just hold down the wheel, you'll get these
| | 00:46 | four little arrows, which look awful lot
like the Move command inside of Revit.
| | 00:50 | Well, it doesn't actually move anything, but
what it does do is allows you to move around
| | 00:54 | on the screen, this view.
| | 00:56 | So, if you want to be able to zoom in and
then see something over here in this corner,
| | 01:02 | all you have to do is just hold the wheel
down and just move your mouse while you are
| | 01:06 | holding the wheel down, and you can pan over in
the direction that you need to be able to see.
| | 01:12 | Another thing to know is that you can also
type in the letter Z and then either E or W.
| | 01:18 | In this case, I'm going to do E.
| | 01:20 | Z + E is going to allow you to zoom extents which
allows you to do just sort of zoom your extents out.
| | 01:25 | So, by typing in a command, it also
allows you to do your different kinds of zooms.
| | 01:30 | Now, we are talking about different kinds zooms.
| | 01:33 | We can find some of those over on
this little bar over here on the side.
| | 01:37 | In fact, it we click on the little down
arrow that shows up right here, we can see that
| | 01:41 | there is what's called a Zoom Region.
There is a Zoom Out, and if you decide to click
| | 01:47 | on Zoom Out, that will zoom you as far out as
what these things are something in the Revit model.
| | 01:53 | If you clicked Zoom Region, we could left-click once, hold the mouse button down, and
| | 02:00 | just kind of draw a box
around where we to zoom in at.
| | 02:02 | And then we let go, it
automatically zoom in there.
| | 02:06 | That's like Zoom Window in AutoCAD,
if you've used AutoCAD in the past.
| | 02:10 | Also, we can come in here and you could see
that there's other options as well, including
| | 02:14 | Zoom Fit, Zoom All the Fit, Zoom Sheet Size,
and you can try these in the different conditions
| | 02:20 | until you can get your view zoomed
in or zoomed out the way you want it to.
| | 02:24 | But, for the most part, I just use the wheel in
order to be able to zoom in or be able to zoom out.
| | 02:29 | One other thing that you should know
though is if you select on an object--
| | 02:33 | for instance, maybe you wanted to zoom in just
on this corner of the building--you can do that.
| | 02:37 | So, you could select on an object and if you
want to Zoom In on it, you can move up to
| | 02:42 | this thing called the View Cube. Then
by clicking on an edge of the view cube--
| | 02:45 | in this case, I'm going to pick on the upper
corner of it--it's going to take me to that
| | 02:51 | edge of the view cube, which is also going to
zoom in at that same angle on the building.
| | 02:55 | So, let me go ahead and do that again.
| | 02:57 | I'm just going to use my
wheel mouse, and just roll back.
| | 03:01 | I'm going to select on something, then I'm
going to select on corner of cube. It's going
| | 03:08 | to allow us to look at our model from the
same direction as the corner of the cube.
| | 03:12 | So, I'll go ahead and click on that, and you
can see how we did zoom right in on that object
| | 03:17 | that we have selected.
| | 03:19 | One last thing to know is if you don't
have anything selected, and then you decide to
| | 03:23 | select on either an edge or a corner of the
view cube, it automatically try to zoom you
| | 03:27 | out to full extent, so you
can see your entire model.
| | 03:31 | Now, this works inside of plain views, 3-D
views, whatever the case may be, whenever we're
| | 03:36 | dealing with these Zoom Tools over
here on the side, or by using the wheel.
| | 03:41 | But, if you're inside of a plain view, and
I'm just going to double-click on first floor
| | 03:45 | here, so we can see it.
| | 03:46 | You'll notice that the View Cube goes away, because
the view cube only works in three-dimensional views.
| | 03:52 | So, by doing these things--zooming in and
out--as well as investigating our model, it's
| | 03:56 | a fairly easy process to master.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding Revit families| 00:00 | A Revit family is an object that has
information built into it. Some will people define this
| | 00:05 | as being an intelligent component, because it
has information about itself stored within it.
| | 00:10 | Revit families range from beams
and columns to walls and floors.
| | 00:14 | If it's in your model, there's a
good chance it's a Revit family.
| | 00:17 | Let's take a look at this column for instance.
| | 00:20 | If I move my mouse over and just
highlight over this Column, and can click on it,
| | 00:24 | we can see it has Properties here
underneath the Properties Palette.
| | 00:28 | Now, if I move the mouse and then left-
click and hold the button down, we can then see all
| | 00:34 | the Properties associated
with this particular Column.
| | 00:37 | This Column for instance, has the bottom of
it being at the First Floor level. The top
| | 00:42 | of that Column is up at the Second Floor level.
| | 00:46 | Also, the location of this
Column is at with what's called D-5.
| | 00:50 | Now, if we want to know what D-5 is, we can move
here to the First Floor plan and by double-clicking
| | 00:55 | where it has the First Floor, we can then
see this Column grid that goes across here.
| | 01:02 | And by spinning the wheel on your mouse, it
allows you to zoom in and zoom out. And you
| | 01:09 | can see if you zoom in, then here it has a D.
You can zoom out, you can move your cursor over.
| | 01:19 | Then I am going to move my cursor over to this corner
and I am going to spin the wheel on the mouse.
| | 01:26 | This is the column that we
have selected in the other view.
| | 01:28 | In fact, you can even tell that it is
because if I zoom out just a little bit more it's
| | 01:32 | blue, Just like it was blue in the 3-D View. And
| | 01:36 | you'll remember that that has a D, and
this has the number 5 associated with it.
| | 01:42 | So that particular family
knows that it is a D-5 Column.
| | 01:47 | So that's an instance property that's going
to be associated with this particular Column.
| | 01:51 | In fact, everything underneath here
is considered an instance property.
| | 01:54 | The reason why is because this column right
here--and if you click on Modify, just make sure
| | 02:00 | that you are out of the command, and
then select on this column right here--
| | 02:04 | you'll see that this A-5.
| | 02:07 | This column, which is the same as the other
column in every way, is it's really only different
| | 02:11 | because it add the A-5 location.
| | 02:14 | So this instance of column is a
little bit different from the other.
| | 02:18 | That being said, there's this option here called
Edit Type, and if you select on Edit Type, these
| | 02:24 | are all the Type Properties of this column.
| | 02:27 | And I intentionally go a little bit deeper
and I'm talking about the Type Properties,
| | 02:31 | because they are the Solid Structural
Properties that if you change it, here it'll effect every
| | 02:36 | column of this type throughout the entire
project. So that's really the difference between
| | 02:41 | a Type Property--which you can get to once again through
Edit Type--or the instance properties that we see here.
| | 02:47 | The instance properties affects just this one
of particular column, while our Type Property
| | 02:51 | will affect all the columns of this type.
And we are going to go ahead and click on
| | 02:56 | Cancel to get out the dialog box, and just
click out somewhere in open space in order
| | 03:01 | to deselect that column.
| | 03:02 | But the columns are just
one example of a Revit family.
| | 03:05 | If I'd select on this beam for instance--or I
guess in this case is actually a foundation wall--
| | 03:10 | I'll go and select on the Foundation Wall
and we can the Properties of the foundation
| | 03:13 | wall that are associated with it: foundation
walls, columns, beams. They are all considered
| | 03:19 | Revit families. We should
just remember that a Revit family
| | 03:22 | is just an object that has
information contained within it.
| | 03:25 | Because of this, it's said to have
intelligence because it knows it's a column or beam or
| | 03:29 | a wall or something else. And this allows
us to be scheduled by Revit and also contain
| | 03:35 | the right properties for this
kind of object inside of your model.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Project Browser to view component data in a project| 00:00 | A Revit project is technically a database of all
the drawings and information that you put into it.
| | 00:05 | We view this data in the Project Browser in
the form of plans, and schedules, and details,
| | 00:11 | and everything else that we draw.
| | 00:13 | Over on the left-hand side, we have our
Project Browser. And if you select on this little
| | 00:18 | bar right here and just pull it down, we
can start to see different views inside of it.
| | 00:23 | If for some reason one of these is closed--
much like how Elevations or Framing Eelvations
| | 00:27 | is here is closed--you can just
click right here on the little +,
| | 00:30 | and it will expand out and you can see
more views underneath each of these headings.
| | 00:34 | Now, each one of these is technically a
view of the Revit database. What that means is
| | 00:40 | if you make a change in one spot in the Revit
database, such as change in a column, it will
| | 00:46 | automatically make that change in all the
other spots in the Revit database, such as
| | 00:50 | change in the way that column is displayed
in the First Floor view, or the way it might
| | 00:54 | be displayed inside of the South Elevation view.
| | 00:59 | Just to kind of illustrate that just a little
bit, if I double-click here where it has this
| | 01:03 | one First Floor, I am going to move over here, and you
can zoom in by spinning a little wheel on your mouse.
| | 01:10 | If you want to be able to zoom in right at
that column, all you have to do is move your
| | 01:14 | mouse over to it, and then
just move the wheel on your mouse.
| | 01:17 | So you zoom in, you can select on the column,
you can see the Properties associated with it.
| | 01:23 | Well, I am going to point out that if I now
come over here to the Project Browser, click
| | 01:29 | here, pull this down.
| | 01:31 | Let's take a look at this
now in the South Elevation.
| | 01:35 | So to get to that you can just double-click
on South underneath Elevations here. There
| | 01:41 | is a same column, it's highlighted in blue
as well. You can zoom in the same way by just
| | 01:46 | moving your mouse over and
then just spinning the wheel.
| | 01:49 | And if we decide to come up here
underneath Properties, and then click here, we could
| | 01:53 | change this to be a different size.
| | 01:55 | For instance, in this case will change in to
something that looks much different like this
| | 01:58 | W8-by-10. Click on that, see
how it just got smaller here.
| | 02:04 | If we come back here to our View
underneath the Project Browser and then double-click
| | 02:09 | here at this First Floor,
| | 02:10 | we can see pretty much on the fly how it
automatically updated in both views to reflect the change
| | 02:16 | that we made in one View.
| | 02:17 | If we want to be able to change that back--
and then in this case we do--you could come
| | 02:21 | back up here to Properties again, click on
it, come down and just select this column
| | 02:26 | size that starts with the WWF; it's the only one of
its type. You can see it automatically update here.
| | 02:31 | And if we come back down to another View on
the Project Browser--technically we could do
| | 02:36 | this in Section Views or any
other view than I happened to show it--
| | 02:39 | we can then see that beam is now
back to its original size and shape.
| | 02:44 | The Project Browser contains
varies views of the Revit Database.
| | 02:47 | This Database contains all the Views and
information in an RVT file, which can be opened, printed,
| | 02:53 | and viewed by looking at its
information in the Project Browser.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling how objects are viewed in a model| 00:00 | The View Control bar is one of the features
used to control the way items are viewed
| | 00:03 | in the Revit model.
| | 00:05 | Each of these settings control just the way
items are displayed in a specific view, while
| | 00:09 | other views can be set up to display the same
object differently using their own View Control settings.
| | 00:14 | Those View Control settings you can find
down here on this bar going across the bottom.
| | 00:18 | Now, the first setting that
we have here is the Scale.
| | 00:21 | In order to best illustrate how the Scale works,
let's go ahead and go into the First Floor plan view.
| | 00:26 | So underneath the Project Browser on the left
-hand side, double-click on 1 - First Floor.
| | 00:33 | Now zoom in by just using the mouse wheel
on the left-hand side here of your view.
| | 00:40 | Here we can see different text, and we can
see how big this text is in comparison to
| | 00:45 | these lines right here.
| | 00:47 | Well, if we change the scale to be something
different from one quarter of an inch equals
| | 00:50 | to foot, let's change this to be something,
we'll just go much, much bigger to this
| | 00:56 | one-half inch equals a foot.
| | 01:00 | You notice how much smaller this
text is than what it was before.
| | 01:03 | Now the reason is that it didn't actually
change the size of the text--an eighth inch
| | 01:07 | piece of text is always an eighth inch piece
of text. But whenever you adjust the scale,
| | 01:11 | it's a scale of everything else to adjust,
so the plot size always stays the appropriate
| | 01:16 | scale while everything else adjusts to match the
appropriate size of the plot on your sheet of paper.
| | 01:23 | I'll go ahead and change this back to be a
eighth-inch equals a foot, or a quarter-inch equals foot.
| | 01:28 | I will change it into a quarter-inch
equals a foot here, so it looks the way that it did.
| | 01:31 | Next, I am going to move over to
the detail level, which is right here.
| | 01:37 | If we select on Detail Level and change
this to be a Course level of detail--let's zoom
| | 01:43 | in a little bit--we can see that level of
detail is currently showing up here for our
| | 01:48 | beams and our columns.
| | 01:50 | If we change that Detail Level to be Fine,
you will notice how you have a greater level
| | 01:54 | of detail there at our columns--that's what
its purpose is. It's whether or not you
| | 01:58 | want to be able to see it with just single-line
work, or lots of line work, with the appropriate
| | 02:04 | material designation shown on the inside of it.
| | 02:07 | The next area is going to be the Visual
Styles, and to see this, we're probably best-served
| | 02:13 | is zoom out just a little bit. And if we
click on the Visual Styles button, there is some
| | 02:18 | options here for whether its Wireframe mode; whether or not it's Shaded, which you can
| | 02:25 | see starts to add color to it; whether or
not we want to add realistic looking color.
| | 02:30 | So we just start to add
actual materials to here.
| | 02:33 | Now, it's difficult to see what happened to
you over these materials, because in plan view
| | 02:37 | it tends to shut off a lot of those material
properties so that we can't see the materials nearly as well.
| | 02:42 | But if we look at this in the 3D view--and
we can do that by clicking on the little 3D
| | 02:46 | house up here at the top of our screen, and
then adjust those settings to perhaps Realistic--
| | 02:56 | you can start to see those material properties, in
this case for the concrete topping we have on each floor.
| | 03:01 | If we turn this to be Shaded or to Wireframe,
we can really see what's going on in the level
| | 03:08 | of detail at places in those views.
| | 03:12 | Now, let's go ahead and change this back to
Hidden Lines so we have a couple of other
| | 03:15 | options available to us.
| | 03:17 | The next two commands we'd like to do or talk
about are going to be Shadows Off and then Sun Path.
| | 03:23 | Shadows Off, if we click on that button, it
will then turn the Shadows on, so you will
| | 03:27 | then suddenly have a shadow available to you.
| | 03:29 | I do recommend usually leaving your Shadows Off.
| | 03:32 | I will go ahead and click on this little
button again in order to turn the shadows off.
| | 03:36 | Now the reasoning behind that is that
turning shadows on really slows your computer down,
| | 03:41 | so you want to keep the shadows off as
much as possible just for performance reasons.
| | 03:45 | Little Sun settings option
here, which is called Sun Path.
| | 03:48 | If you click on that and go to Sun Settings,
from here--particularly if you click on Still
| | 03:54 | or Single or Multi-Day--it will allow you to
change such things as the location of where
| | 03:58 | this building is on earth, as well as
the Date, as well as the Time of year.
| | 04:03 | What this is going to allow you to do is
that when you turn on your Shades and Shadows,
| | 04:06 | it will display your Shades and Shadows appropriately
for that location on earth at the appropriate time of year.
| | 04:13 | And the last thing I'll mention about this
dialog box, if you click on the little dots right
| | 04:16 | here, you can either type in the location
where this building is located at--or instead
| | 04:22 | of using an Internet Mapping Service, like in
this case Google Maps--you can choose Default
| | 04:26 | City, and pick-off of a list whatever the closest
city is to the building that you've placed and drawn.
| | 04:33 | I'll go ahead and hit Cancel to
this, just to get out of our menus.
| | 04:40 | This is the Rendering button, it
says, Show Rendering Dialog box.
| | 04:43 | It looks like a little teapot and if you
select on it, it will bring up the rendering dialog,
| | 04:47 | we won't get too much into its
properties right now, but that's what it does.
| | 04:51 | Also going across the
screen, we have Unlocked 3D View.
| | 04:54 | If you click on that button it
will allow you to lock your 3D View.
| | 04:58 | So all you can do is zoom in and zoom out, it
wouldn't allow you to see from different angles.
| | 05:03 | This button right here, it's a
Temporary Hide/Isolate button.
| | 05:05 | It's one of the most used tools you probably
come across down here at the bottom, and what
| | 05:11 | Temporary Hide/Isolate allows you to do:
select on an object, click on the little eye glasses
| | 05:16 | and then hide the element.
| | 05:18 | And if you hide the element, you will
no longer be able to see it in the view.
| | 05:22 | If you want to be able to bring it back,
you can always click back on it again and say
| | 05:26 | Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate to bring it back.
| | 05:29 | Also, if you select on an object and then
click on the little eye glasses down here
| | 05:32 | below, you also have the option either isolate the
object, which will only show that thing on the screen.
| | 05:38 | You could hide the category, which will hide
all the objects like it on the screen. Or you
| | 05:43 | can isolate the category, which will only
show those objects that are like the thing that
| | 05:47 | you have selected on the screen.
| | 05:49 | For instance, if I wanted to isolate this
category of objects, you can see the only things that
| | 05:53 | fall under this category of object are now
showing up on the screen. In this case it's
| | 05:58 | a bunch of different objects that have concrete
and structural properties associated with them.
| | 06:03 | And if I select back on the eyeglasses again,
we can always reset the Temporary Hide/Isolate
| | 06:07 | in order to be able to bring that back.
| | 06:09 | Final thing I really want to point out down
here on the Ribbon is going to be this little
| | 06:12 | light bulb looking tool down here, it's
called Reveal Hidden Elements. And how it works is
| | 06:16 | if you select on one of these objects and
you have hidden it--but instead of resetting
| | 06:23 | the Temporary Hide/Isolate by clicking on
little eye glasses, you click on Apply Hide/Isolate--
| | 06:29 | what the Apply Hide/Isolate did is that it
made so that you could no longer see that
| | 06:33 | object in the view. You can't see it at
all and if you print it, it just wouldn't
| | 06:37 | show up. And by hitting Reset Temporary
Hide/Isolate, it just won't show up at all.
| | 06:42 | So to get it back, you have to click on the little
light bulb tool down here at the bottom of the screen.
| | 06:47 | You will see the little purple lines
indicating the object that you had hidden.
| | 06:51 | If you select on that object and unhide
the element, and then click in the big X, that
| | 06:57 | object will then get brought back.
| | 06:59 | One other thing that I need to cover on
this bar is going to be this option right here,
| | 07:03 | which is Show Crop Region.
| | 07:05 | The Show Crop Region, what it allows you to
do is actually see the reason why this displays
| | 07:10 | the way that it does on the sheet.
| | 07:11 | What I mean by that is if you click on Show
Crop Region, I can click there, I can zoom
| | 07:17 | out, and we can see this box
that shows up around our view.
| | 07:20 | If I click on that box and then click on the
little dot that shows up here at the bottom
| | 07:25 | of the box, I can then hold my mouse button
down and drag this up and then cut the building
| | 07:30 | off right there where the crop is at.
| | 07:32 | I can also drag this back down again and now
we can see everything that's inside of the box.
| | 07:38 | So if I did this from the top, I
can crop off the top of the building.
| | 07:41 | If I want to be able to see the top of the
building, I can just click on the little circle
| | 07:45 | here, pull it up, and that
will be able to see it again.
| | 07:48 | The button next to it, which is Do Not Crop View,
what it allows you to do is if the building
| | 07:53 | is cropped like that, you
decide I don't want to crop the view.
| | 07:57 | So Do Not Crop View, it'll go
ahead and bring your building back up.
| | 08:02 | And if you don't want to see that box anymore--
that's really the purpose of the Hide Crop
| | 08:07 | Region button--is that you can click on that and
you'll no longer see that box going around the outside.
| | 08:12 | The use of these tools allows some of the
most basic manipulation of the way items can
| | 08:16 | be displayed within an
individual view in Revit Structure.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Leveraging visibility graphics settings to control how items are displayed| 00:00 | To better communicate our designs we need
to control the line weights, colors, and line
| | 00:05 | styles of our objects.
| | 00:06 | To do this we can leverage the Visibility/
Graphics setting to control the way items are just
| | 00:10 | displayed in a particular view.
| | 00:12 | To get to these settings you can either
type the letter V, like visibility, twice on your
| | 00:17 | keyboard while you are inside of your view. So you
can just type VV to bring up the Visibility/Graphics
| | 00:25 | Overrides dialog box. Or the other option that
you would have is underneath Properties over
| | 00:29 | here on the left-hand side, you could have
just clicked on the big gray Edit button right
| | 00:33 | here next to Visibility/Graphics
to also bring this dialog box up.
| | 00:38 | Now, this dialog box shows all the properties of
the way that this view is going to be displayed,
| | 00:43 | such as whether or not
certain items should be on or off.
| | 00:47 | For example, if we take a look here, in our current
view we have a lot of structural columns showing up.
| | 00:55 | If we decided to shut our structural columns
off by moving over here to Structural Columns
| | 01:00 | where the checkbox was, clearing it out, we
could then click on OK and you notice how
| | 01:05 | all the columns ended up
vanishing off of the screen.
| | 01:09 | If we would click VV again on the keyboard,
we could then turn them back on again by just
| | 01:15 | coming over here to the box, selecting
where Structural Columns is at, and I can click
| | 01:20 | on OK; but in this case I'm just going to
click on Apply and we can move this box over
| | 01:25 | by clicking on the top of this dialog box,
holding your left mouse button down and just
| | 01:31 | dragging the box over. And you can see that
we've just got all of our structural columns back.
| | 01:37 | Now, we didn't actually lose our structural
columns, we just shut them off so that you
| | 01:40 | can no longer see them in this particular
view, and you can do this with any of the
| | 01:45 | objects inside of our model.
| | 01:47 | So this dialog box here with Visibility/Graphics
Overrides, the keyword being here been override,
| | 01:54 | we'll override the properties to the
wave a view would typically be displayed.
| | 01:58 | Now, those typical view properties as far
as how it should be displayed are controlled
| | 02:03 | from a different location which is
this box down here called Object Styles.
| | 02:07 | So if you click on the little button here for Object
Styles it'll bring up the Object Styles dialog box.
| | 02:15 | The Object Styles dialog box has quite a bit
of information inside of it. It includes all
| | 02:20 | the different kinds of Revit families and
objects which are currently loaded into your
| | 02:24 | project. It also has information related to
how the line weights of these things should
| | 02:29 | display. So when it comes time to print,
whether or not the line should be thick or thin, as
| | 02:33 | well as the color of the lines;
| | 02:36 | the line pattern--this is a hidden line, this
is a dashed line, this is a center line--your
| | 02:41 | standard drafting symbology.
| | 02:43 | There is also some options here for Material.
For the most part you'll tend to leave that
| | 02:48 | information alone, but if that is set then
you can universally throughout the project
| | 02:53 | change the way the materials displayed on
that kind of object in each and every view.
| | 02:58 | And really that's what the
Object Styles dialog box is all about--
| | 03:02 | changing the properties of whether it would
be a modeled object, I am going to click on
| | 03:05 | Annotation Objects here; whether or not it's
going to be dimensions, the Analytical Model
| | 03:11 | that's a structural forces leading through
your structure that you've been creating; or
| | 03:15 | even such things as Imported Objects, so
you bring in a CAD file from another software
| | 03:20 | program like AutoCAD or MicroStation you just
try to bring it in. You can then adjust those
| | 03:26 | properties from inside of the dialog box.
| | 03:29 | So I'm going to go ahead and click
back on Model Objects right here.
| | 03:34 | One other thing to know is that you can
also adjust it so whether or not you're seeing
| | 03:37 | it in a Projection view or in a Cut view you
can get different kinds of line weights for
| | 03:42 | that type of object.
| | 03:43 | For instance, in a typical plan view which
is what a Projection view would kind of be,
| | 03:48 | because anything to be in the distance, like
in this case a staircase, would end up
| | 03:53 | having your staircase being in a fairly light
line weight, and one is pretty much the lightest
| | 03:58 | line weight that you can have.
| | 03:59 | On the other hand, if you are cutting
through that staircase, you want to see nice darker
| | 04:03 | lines or each of the stair treads were
located at; so you know this is a stair tread and
| | 04:09 | I'm cutting through it.
| | 04:10 | Because there's different line weights
associated with it and you wanted it to display as different
| | 04:14 | line weights, you have the option between
using different line weights here in Ribbon.
| | 04:18 | And here we have a choice between a Line
Weight number 1, which is the lightest all the way
| | 04:23 | down to a Line Weight 16 which be the heaviest.
I don't think I have ever seen anybody actually
| | 04:27 | use the Line Weight 16 before, but it is
available to you. And you can see you have the same options
| | 04:33 | here just click inside of the box, click
the little arrow if you need to, and then sort
| | 04:37 | of pull this down in order to be able to select
whatever line weight you need to off of the list.
| | 04:41 | If you wanted the stairs for instance to be
black or be a different color, you would just
| | 04:46 | select on the color you'd want it to be,
and it would automatically change that object
| | 04:50 | to reflect those properties. I'm going
to go ahead and just leave everything the
| | 04:54 | way that it was. I'm just going to hit
Cancel on that through that dialog box.
| | 04:57 | But the important thing to remember about
this visibility graphics is that visibility
| | 05:01 | graphics control the way different views and
different items are displayed within those views.
| | 05:06 | This is important because the way it
displays on screen affects design communication and
| | 05:11 | ultimately in Revit it'll also affect the
way that it prints from Revit Structure.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Selection and Modifying ToolsSelecting objects| 00:00 | To be able to make modifications in Revit,
we need the ability to select on objects.
| | 00:04 | Here are a few different methods to be
able to make those object selections.
| | 00:08 | The first one is kind of obvious.
| | 00:10 | All you have to do is move your mouse over
to the object that you want to be able to
| | 00:13 | select, highlight over it, and when you see it
turn blue, left-click in order to be able to select it.
| | 00:19 | Now, you can do the same thing if you have a
group of objects that are currently touching
| | 00:23 | each other. In this case, I'm just going
to click here in space in order to deselect
| | 00:27 | this object. But if I wanted to just pick
this object, just move the mouse over, highlight
| | 00:33 | it, click, and then it's selected.
| | 00:35 | If I wanted to be able to select multiple
objects at the same time, you can actually
| | 00:40 | use the same method.
| | 00:41 | The only thing you'll need to do first though, is
be able to hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard.
| | 00:47 | If you move your mouse over, hold down the
Ctrl key, click on an object--in fact I'll
| | 00:51 | even click on this object over here--you can
see that you can select multiple objects at
| | 00:56 | the same time just by click, click,
click, and holding down your Ctrl key.
| | 01:00 | If you want to be able to select this entire
strain of objects, any objects that are touching
| | 01:05 | each other that are kind of joining
together at the same spot, you can do that to.
| | 01:09 | In order to do that you just move your mouse
up until one of those pieces in that grouping
| | 01:15 | is highlighted. Now I haven't
actually clicked on this yet.
| | 01:18 | Now the next thing I'm going to do is I'm
going to hit the Tab key on the keyboard,
| | 01:23 | and by selecting Tab, it'll automatically
highlight everything that's in that strain of objects.
| | 01:28 | Once it's highlighted, go ahead and
click in order to be able to select it.
| | 01:31 | One of the most common mistakes is that
people will move their mouse over, they'll hit Tab,
| | 01:36 | they'll get what they want, and then
they'll go and retouch their mouse again and then
| | 01:39 | they'll accidentally unhighlight it all.
| | 01:42 | So you always need to be careful and always
keep your mouse on the objects that you want
| | 01:45 | to be able to highlight, hit Tab, and then do
your selection. So that's one way to be able
| | 01:50 | to grab onto a grouping of different objects.
| | 01:53 | Another way is to do what is called a Crossing Window.
| | 01:55 | There is actually two different types of
windows; there is a normal regular window, and then
| | 01:59 | there is a crossing window.
| | 02:01 | The regular window works like this, where if
you move your mouse over here somewhere on
| | 02:05 | your screen, click-and-hold down, and move
over in this direction--and this is the regular
| | 02:10 | window--you can see how these lines in this box
that's showing up on the screen are nice and solid.
| | 02:16 | Now, whenever you see the solid lines in the
box it means anything inside of that box is
| | 02:21 | what we'll get selected
when you let go of the button.
| | 02:24 | Now, I'm going to hit Escape (Esc) a couple of times
just to make sure that I'm no longer selecting on this.
| | 02:28 | Now, if I want to be able to select anything
that's touching the box, this is where I can
| | 02:33 | use that crossing window. So you can just click
somewhere in space, and hold the mouse button down.
| | 02:38 | In this case you'll see that
I have dash lines for my box.
| | 02:42 | Whenever you get the dash lines that means anything
that's touching the box will automatically get selected.
| | 02:47 | For this one beam I'm about ready to touch
up here, you'll see it automatically highlight
| | 02:51 | blue, the second that box touches it.
| | 02:55 | So using this method I can select
on multiple objects at the same time.
| | 02:59 | And that same process works as well if we
are dealing with things like down here where
| | 03:03 | we have multiple objects
on different elevations.
| | 03:07 | I can click, hold my mouse button down, and
then just sort of move in this direction,
| | 03:11 | and you can see that anything is touched
inside of this box is now highlighted. And if I let
| | 03:16 | go of the mouse button it'll
automatically get selected so it can be edited.
| | 03:21 | One other thing that you can do is if there
is a specific grouping of kind of things that
| | 03:25 | you want to be able to select--
| | 03:27 | for instance, if I wanted to be able to
select all these different beams, I can do that.
| | 03:32 | To do this, all you have to do is select on
one of your beams, right-click after it's
| | 03:36 | been selected, and there's an option here
that says Select All Instances. And usually you
| | 03:41 | want to choose Visible in View.
| | 03:43 | If you do Visible in View, it'll pick all
those that you can see inside of your view.
| | 03:49 | The other option that was there would be if
you right-clicked Select All Instances
| | 03:53 | again, and did In Entire Project. Just
realize that even if it's not visible in your view
| | 03:59 | it'll still select those entities, which is
sometimes a good thing sometimes a bad thing.
| | 04:03 | It's a good thing if you want to be able to
select everything inside of your entire project
| | 04:07 | that's just like the one that
you had selected right here.
| | 04:10 | It's a bad thing if you did this with a
piece of text or notes or dimensions, because if
| | 04:15 | you did this for an entire project and then hit
the Delete key, it would automatically delete
| | 04:20 | not just the ones in your view; it would
automatically delete them throughout your entire project.
| | 04:25 | I've seen that done with people who are
doing text and dimensions before they've selected
| | 04:29 | throughout the entire project, not realizing
they didn't do it for the entire view, hit
| | 04:33 | Delete, and then they've lost all the notes
and details and anything related to that kind
| | 04:38 | of piece of text throughout the entire project.
| | 04:40 | So the thing to remember is that whenever you're
going to be selecting on things, always make sure
| | 04:45 | you know what it is that you're
highlighting over, remember that you can click in order
| | 04:49 | to be able to select on an object; also
remember that you can do such things just hitting Tab,
| | 04:53 | select multiple objects; you can window
around things in order to be able to select them;
| | 04:58 | and of course you also have the ability to
right-click and select all instances and it
| | 05:03 | can either be visible in view
or throughout the entire project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filtering a selection| 00:00 | One of my favorite ways to select objects
inside of Revit is to use the Selection Filter.
| | 00:05 | Now, in order to be able to do that, really all you
have to do is have a group of objects that are selected.
| | 00:10 | So in this case, I'm just going to click once,
hold my mouse button down, and then move around
| | 00:15 | here until that I have this crossing window that
goes around a whole bunch of my different items.
| | 00:20 | Now that I've done that, we can
utilize the Selection Filter.
| | 00:23 | Now, the filter is actually this little thing that
looks kind of like a funnel down here in the lower corner.
| | 00:29 | Also you can see the filter up here as well.
| | 00:32 | Now, these have actually the exact same command.
| | 00:34 | The only difference is that this one tells
you how many items you have selected, while
| | 00:38 | this one doesn't. And if you select on
either this one or this one--I'm going to pick the
| | 00:42 | one down near at the bottom--
| | 00:44 | you can see that there is all these
different items that have been selected.
| | 00:48 | Now the one that I'm going to select on, is I
want to have just my structural columns selected.
| | 00:53 | So I'm going to come over here, I'm going
to click on Check None, I'm going to put a
| | 00:57 | little check next to Structural Columns, and
by doing this I'm going to filter out just
| | 01:01 | those objects which are my structural columns.
| | 01:04 | I'm just eyeballing it here; I'm going to
expect to see this one, this one, this one
| | 01:08 | and this one end up being highlighted.
| | 01:11 | I'll click on OK to that, and we can see
those are the four items; those are my structural
| | 01:15 | columns, and they were selected.
| | 01:17 | So the think to remember is that in order
to be able to use your selection filters,
| | 01:21 | all you have to do is window around to select
on a group of different things, and then filter
| | 01:26 | out all those other results that you don't
need by coming to the Filter, clicking on it
| | 01:31 | and then just putting a check mark next to
those things if you want to have selected.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving objects| 00:00 | We use the Move command to move an object, or a
group of objects, a distance that we specify.
| | 00:06 | Now, in order to be able to better demonstrate
this, I'm going to go to the Level 2 Structural
| | 00:10 | Plan and just double-click on it.
| | 00:13 | Now, we can zoom in here so we
can see it a little bit better.
| | 00:16 | Now, if we want to be able to move an
object you always have to select on it first.
| | 00:20 | So select on the object, and when you do
you'll get your series of Modify commands.
| | 00:26 | Up here you see that there is a command called
Move. It looks like a series of four little arrows.
| | 00:30 | Well, if you click on that, it's then going to have
you move this object by picking a base point first.
| | 00:38 | So in this case I'd like to pick a spot
usually somewhere along the object, in this case just
| | 00:42 | here it will work just fine. Now, I'm
going to move over in one direction.
| | 00:45 | In this case, I'm going to move over to the
right and I'm going to move this perhaps 7 feet.
| | 00:49 | Well, as soon as you see this temporary dimension
show up--and the temporary dimension is the dimension
| | 00:54 | you see on the screen right now which is
automatically changing as I move the mouse--
| | 00:57 | As soon as you see that dimension you can
type in a dimension. In this case I'm going
| | 01:01 | to do 7 feet, and you can see how
this moved over 7 feet to the right.
| | 01:05 | If I do the same command again, pick a base
point. This time I picked just a little bit
| | 01:10 | off of the object because it doesn't really
matter, and I'm going to move over to the left.
| | 01:14 | In this case I'm going to move over perhaps
6 feet, and you can see how the whole object
| | 01:17 | moves in that direction.
| | 01:19 | Now usually I like to keep my base point,
which is that first spot that you click after X
| | 01:23 | key in the Move command, fairly close to the
object just so it keeps it on the screen and
| | 01:28 | makes it easier for you to be able to see where
these temporary dimensions are going to be at.
| | 01:32 | So when it comes time to execute the Move
command, it moves really nice and smooth and
| | 01:36 | you don't get any error messages generated.
| | 01:39 | Also, another thing for you to know is that
if you just move your mouse over an object
| | 01:42 | that you have selected, you'll see that there's
four different little arrows that show up there.
| | 01:46 | That's the same icon that we are
seeing here with the Move command.
| | 01:49 | So if you click and hold down when you see
those four arrows, you can also move that object
| | 01:54 | from side-to-side, or up-and-down, or
wherever it is you like to move it to. And if you
| | 01:58 | let go, it will
automatically move it to that spot.
| | 02:01 | The only reason why I tend to not use that
form of the Move command, as opposed to just
| | 02:05 | a normal Move command, is usually if I've
drawn something in I usually know roughly where
| | 02:09 | it's supposed to be at; and as a result of
that I know if I want to use Move I probably
| | 02:14 | know this should be moved over 1 foot, 2 foot,
3 foot, and you can only do that using the
| | 02:19 | normal Move command as opposed to just holding
down on the object and dragging it to wherever
| | 02:24 | it is that you feel like dragging it to.
| | 02:26 | Also, if you ever want to get out of a
command all you have to do is hit the Escape (Esc)
| | 02:29 | key once in order to be able to get out of
the actual moving part of the command. and
| | 02:35 | a second time in order to be able to deselect the
object altogether and be able to use a different command.
| | 02:40 | One last thing to know is that if you want to be
able to move a group of objects you can do that too.
| | 02:45 | All you have to do is either select on one
object, and then hold down the Ctrl key to
| | 02:50 | select on multiple ones; or--in this case I've
just clicked out in the space to deselect--
| | 02:56 | your other option is to window around
the grouping of objects; if you want to move
| | 02:59 | this entire thing, you can use the Move
command at this point, pick a base point--and you
| | 03:05 | usually like to pick it somewhere around
the center of the selection area--and then move
| | 03:09 | those objects wherever you feel like it.
| | 03:12 | One last thing, I could type in the
dimension, but I don't really feel like that.
| | 03:15 | I just want to move it to some moreover here,
so I'm just going to click out in the space.
| | 03:20 | So now you can see how I moved all those objects
right to the location where I wanted them to be at.
| | 03:26 | So, the Move command can be
used to move existing objects.
| | 03:29 | In the next exercise we'll be using the Copy
command to create a duplicate of an existing object.
| | 03:34 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Copying items in a project| 00:00 | Using the Copy command is similar to using the Move
command, except it makes a duplicate of that object.
| | 00:05 | In order to better reference this let's go
ahead and take a look at this on Level 2.
| | 00:10 | So underneath the Level 2 Structural Plans,
we'll go ahead and open that up, and we'll
| | 00:14 | zoom in so we can see the different
objects that we might want to make a copy of.
| | 00:18 | In this case I'll go ahead and move my mouse
over this particular beam that's going across
| | 00:24 | from between A and B, and perhaps I
wanted to make two or three copies of it.
| | 00:29 | Well, to do that all you have to do is select
on the beam, and move up to the Copy command
| | 00:33 | which is up here. It looks like a circle,
and then there is going be you get a couple of
| | 00:37 | more circles there.
| | 00:38 | So go ahead and select on them.
| | 00:40 | Next--and this is probably the thing that
people most tend to overlook--is there's this little
| | 00:45 | checkbox here that says Multiple.
| | 00:47 | Put a check in Multiple. If you don't it'll
only allow you to make one copy, and we want
| | 00:51 | to make more than one.
| | 00:53 | So once a check's put in Multiple,
we'll need to pick a base point.
| | 00:57 | I always like to pick an edge whenever I'm
doing the Copy command, and the reason behind
| | 01:01 | that is that it's a little bit easier to
know where the next copy is going to go to. So
| | 01:06 | go ahead and select right here.
| | 01:08 | Next, move over toward the right-hand side.
| | 01:12 | Now you can start to see what I mean by
it's a little bit easier to tell where the next
| | 01:15 | copy is going to go to, because when I click
here, it's going to be the right-hand upper
| | 01:20 | corner of this entity that is about to get
created. So it's going to match up with that
| | 01:25 | corner that we just picked right there.
| | 01:27 | So now when you know the exact distance
between the two different objects that we just copied,
| | 01:30 | and we can continue to do that. And the
exact distance doesn't matter, but I've been
| | 01:34 | placing them about 5 foot, 6 inches apart.
| | 01:37 | Now if we zoom out and we can hit the Escape
key a couple of times and get out of the command,
| | 01:42 | we can now see that we have three of
them because we copied it two other types.
| | 01:46 | And if we want to take a better look at it,
we can move up here; and there's this little
| | 01:50 | house icon up at the top of the
screen, it says Default 3D View.
| | 01:53 | Go ahead and select on that, and you can
see all three copies that we just made.
| | 01:58 | So in this exercise we learned that
instead of drawing items from scratch, if we have
| | 02:02 | an object already exactly like it, we can
use the Copy command to create multiple unique
| | 02:07 | items within our project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rotating objects| 00:00 | Rotating an object in Revit
means spinning it around a point.
| | 00:03 | Now, to rotate an object in Revit, the first
thing we'll need to do is select on the different
| | 00:08 | objects that maybe we wanted to rotate.
| | 00:10 | Now, in order to do this, I could do it
inside of this 3D view, but it would be a little
| | 00:14 | bit difficult to tell where our
rotation point is going to be at.
| | 00:17 | So, I always like to do that
once again inside of a Plan View.
| | 00:20 | So, I'm going to come over here to our
Level 2 view, which shows our different beams.
| | 00:25 | And we're going to go ahead and
select on this, this, and this.
| | 00:29 | So, we're going to select on three
different objects at the same time.
| | 00:33 | To do that, just move your mouse
over into this quadrant right here.
| | 00:37 | When I say quadrant, I mean between these
two lines, and go ahead and click right about
| | 00:40 | here, and hold your mouse button down.
| | 00:43 | Move it over here and do a window
around these three different beams.
| | 00:47 | You can go ahead and let go
once they are all highlighted.
| | 00:50 | Now, once it's there, we're going to use
the Rotate Command, which looks like a circular
| | 00:55 | arrow going around, sort
of representing a rotation.
| | 00:59 | Now, go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:02 | You'll notice right off the bat
that this little dot shows up.
| | 01:05 | Now, if we don't do anything with that dot,
then the next thing that we can do is we can
| | 01:10 | either type in an angle right here; for
instance if I would type in 45, and then just hit the
| | 01:15 | Enter Key on the keyboard, we'll notice how it
automatically rotated these around to a 45-degree angle.
| | 01:21 | Right now they're still selected.
| | 01:23 | If instead of typing in the 45, when we
executed this command--and I'm just going to click
| | 01:28 | on that Rotate Command again--we had instead
just moved this line either straight up and
| | 01:33 | down or straight to the side,
clicked, and then moved up.
| | 01:37 | We then could have had a visual reference
of an angle, and we could have either rotated
| | 01:41 | this around a 45-degree angle, or we could
even type in whatever degree angle that we
| | 01:46 | wanted to be able to rotate this around.
| | 01:48 | For instance, if we want this to be 30-
degrees from where it sits right now, we could just
| | 01:52 | type in 30, and now we can see that's a 30-
degree rotation from where it's sat before.
| | 01:58 | Now, if that was not the point that we wanted
to rotate it around, we can go ahead and move
| | 02:03 | that base point for our rotation
| | 02:05 | So that it's in the spot that
makes more sense for the rotation.
| | 02:09 | To do that, make sure your
objects are highlighted, click Rotate--
| | 02:12 | and instead of leaving it here in the center-- click-and-hold your mouse button down, and
| | 02:16 | then move over until you get to
wherever you want your base point to be at.
| | 02:20 | In this case, I want my base point to be at
the intersection of these two different columns.
| | 02:24 | So, I'm just going to let go.
| | 02:26 | Now, if I wanted to type in
an angle, once again I could.
| | 02:30 | Another thing to know though is that I like
to do this--is if I want these to be straight
| | 02:34 | or if I want to be able to just visually
know that I'm going to go straight across, or at
| | 02:38 | a certain angle, often times after I pick
this first base point, I'll go perpendicular
| | 02:42 | with whatever the object is
I'm getting ready to rotate.
| | 02:46 | So, in this case, I'm just going to
pick a point somewhere along this line.
| | 02:48 | So, that will be perpendicular to this point.
| | 02:52 | Then rotate it up, and it will
snap to those degree increments.
| | 02:55 | So, this could be 90-degrees, 45-
degrees, or whatever the case may be.
| | 02:59 | In this case, it's a 15-degree increment,
and I'm just going to go ahead and click.
| | 03:03 | By doing that, it rotated it
around this base point, 15-degrees up.
| | 03:10 | And if we take a look at it, we can now see that
all these have rotated themselves around that
| | 03:14 | base point that I specified.
| | 03:15 | To recap, rotating an object in Revit consists
of picking a point to rotate the objects around,
| | 03:21 | and then specifying how much of
a rotation you'd like to give it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating duplicates with the Array tool| 00:00 | An array of objects is a grouping of objects
that will be repeated, or copied, multiple times.
| | 00:05 | So we can see this,
| | 00:06 | I'm going to go ahead and go to
our Structural Plan's Level 2 View.
| | 00:10 | We'll take a look once again at this beam
right here, and we're going to do an array of it.
| | 00:16 | Now, once again, an array is just
multiple copies of the same object.
| | 00:21 | So, to do it, select the object
and come up here to the Array tool.
| | 00:26 | It looks like four different
little squares right next to each other.
| | 00:30 | So, select on Array.
| | 00:31 | Next, for this example, go ahead and make sure
that Group and Associate has a checkmark in it.
| | 00:36 | What it's going to do is it's going to keep
the same relationship between one of our copies
| | 00:40 | and the rest of our copies.
| | 00:41 | Next, it's going to be asking for numbers.
| | 00:44 | So, how many of these do we want to create?
| | 00:46 | In this case, I'm just
going to create a small number.
| | 00:48 | We're going to create four of them.
| | 00:49 | So, change the number to be 4.
| | 00:51 | There is a Move To and
there's an option for 2nd or Last.
| | 00:56 | We'll start off by demonstrating what 2nd
does; 2nd is between keeping the same distance
| | 01:02 | between the first point that you
select and the second point that you select.
| | 01:06 | Then every other copy from there on out
will keep that same distance between them.
| | 01:10 | So, all I have to do is select a
spot, move over in a direction;
| | 01:15 | and if I want to be able to copy them every 2
feet, all I have to do is make sure that 2
| | 01:20 | feet is here on the temporary dimension
or type-in 2 feet, and then hit Enter.
| | 01:24 | Now, every 2 feet, we have a new copy,
or an array, of these different items.
| | 01:29 | Now, if I want to be able to increase
that number, it's easy enough to do.
| | 01:33 | All I have to do is change this 4 to be 7,
or if I wanted to reduce it, I can just click
| | 01:39 | on the 7 and change it to be a 3.
| | 01:41 | And you can see how the array will
expand out, and shrink back down again.
| | 01:45 | Now, all that became possible because of
one of the checkboxes that we had earlier.
| | 01:49 | And that checkbox is--let me go ahead and
select one of these objects so that we can
| | 01:53 | see it--if I execute the Array
Command, this is Group and Associate box.
| | 01:58 | Whenever they're decided to be grouped together,
they can keep that 4s, 3s, 7s--that kind of
| | 02:04 | interrelationship in
between those different objects.
| | 02:07 | The only bad thing about doing these
grouping commands is that they tend to put them all
| | 02:12 | together into what's called a model group
which means that they're all sort of tied
| | 02:16 | together as one unit, if you will.
| | 02:18 | So, in order to make it so you can modify
one without being forced to modify all of
| | 02:23 | them, all you have to do is selecting those
items that you just did an array of, and you
| | 02:28 | can come up here to this
option up here that says Ungroup.
| | 02:32 | And by ungrouping them, they're
now their own individual entities.
| | 02:36 | What that means is that I can select on one and
pull it to the side without the others trying
| | 02:41 | to adjust and trying to multiply by themselves.
| | 02:44 | Now, one other kind of
array that you can do is this:
| | 02:47 | if you select on that same object--or in this
case, it's one of our copied objects, arrayed
| | 02:53 | objects--then come back up to the Array Command.
| | 02:56 | The other kind that we can do is called Last.
| | 02:58 | And instead of repeating the same distance
between the first spot and the second spot
| | 03:03 | that you picked, it will evenly space each
of these between the first point that you
| | 03:07 | pick, and the last point that you pick.
| | 03:10 | So, in this instance, if I change this number
to be 5, choose the last, pick the first point,
| | 03:17 | pick the last point.
| | 03:19 | This distance doesn't really matter as long
as there is big enough spacing that they can
| | 03:22 | copy themselves or array themselves over.
| | 03:25 | It's now automatically put copies of these,
evenly between the first spot that I picked,
| | 03:30 | and the last spot that I picked.
| | 03:31 | And it will continue to do that if I would change
this number to a 3, or a 4, or some other number like that.
| | 03:39 | So, arrays can be used for a quick series of
copied elements or to place elements equally
| | 03:44 | between known points.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mirroring objects in a project| 00:00 | The Mirror Command will duplicate an object,
or grouping of objects, to a different location.
| | 00:05 | This is a bit different from the standard use
of the Copy Command, as it creates a mirrored--
| | 00:09 | or flipped--arrangement of
the items you have selected.
| | 00:11 | To use this command, let's go ahead and
take a look at this in the Plan View.
| | 00:14 | So, I'm in Level 2, Structural Plans right now.
| | 00:19 | We're going to zoom in here.
| | 00:21 | And we can see that we have this structural
bay with different beams going across it.
| | 00:26 | Now, what we're going to do is we're going
to mirror this piece and these pieces here,
| | 00:31 | so that we have exact copies of all
these over here on this side of the bay.
| | 00:36 | Also, we're going to move this
structural grid bubble so that it's over here.
| | 00:40 | So, in order to be able to do this, probably
the quickest way would be to move your arrow
| | 00:45 | upto this location, click-and-hold the mouse button
down, and just kind of window around this location.
| | 00:50 | Once you see everything is lined up with the
number 3 there highlighted in blue, go ahead and let go.
| | 00:55 | Now, we have a group of
objects here that have been selected.
| | 00:58 | Also, we need to pick up each of these objects.
| | 01:00 | And to do that, we need to hold down our Ctrl
key on our keyboard, and then make a selection
| | 01:05 | using just the left mouse click
for each of these different items.
| | 01:11 | Once we have everything that we want to,
we're going to go ahead and mirror it around this
| | 01:15 | number 4, right here.
| | 01:16 | So, to do that, we need
to use the Mirror Command.
| | 01:19 | And in particular, we're going to
use the Mirror - Pick Axis Command.
| | 01:23 | Now, there are actually two different
Mirror commands; one is the Pick Axis Command and
| | 01:27 | the other one is this one
right here which is Draw Axis.
| | 01:30 | If we do the Draw Axis Command, we could actually draw
the entity that we'd want to flip these objects around.
| | 01:35 | But, in this case, we're going
to use the Pick Axis Command.
| | 01:38 | So, instead of needing to draw this line in,
we're just going to pick this line and click.
| | 01:44 | It's going to automatically mirror, or make
a copy of, all these entities on the other
| | 01:49 | side of this line here with the number 4.
| | 01:51 | You'll also notice that it tries to keep in
sequence the structural grid, so that we now
| | 01:56 | have 3, 4, and now the number 5.
| | 01:58 | I will add a little disclaimer in here though.
| | 02:00 | If the last thing we had done as far as the
structural grid goes was perhaps the letter
| | 02:04 | C, because this goes A, B, C, it would
have tried to put the letter C right here.
| | 02:09 | But, since the last one that was actually
drawn was the number 4, it tries to keep that
| | 02:13 | sequence and it will do the number 5 next.
| | 02:15 | Let's take a look at this in a 3D View, so
we have a really good idea of what it is that
| | 02:19 | we just accomplished.
| | 02:20 | So, to do that, come up to the little house at the
top of the screen, which is the default 3D View button.
| | 02:26 | And you can see how we've mirrored all
these different objects to the other side.
| | 02:30 | So, the Mirror command simplifies the
creation of the same arrangement of objects flipped
| | 02:35 | along a specific axis point.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Splitting an object into pieces| 00:00 | The Split Command is used to split
an object into more than one piece.
| | 00:04 | In this example, we will be
using the Split Command on a beam.
| | 00:06 | But, it could be used on walls, lines,
or any number of other Revit objects.
| | 00:11 | So, to use a Split Command, you first
have to start by selecting on an object.
| | 00:14 | In this case, I will select on this beam.
| | 00:17 | Next, up here, there is this
little icon, that's for Split Element.
| | 00:20 | Technically, everyone just
calls it the Split Command.
| | 00:23 | So go ahead and click on Split Element.
| | 00:26 | Next, move the little tool down.
| | 00:28 | And you'll see here on a 3D View that I can
pick anywhere along one of these elements.
| | 00:33 | If I decide to click on it, it will
automatically split it into two pieces.
| | 00:37 | I will zoom in a little
bit closer so you can see it.
| | 00:40 | Go ahead, move it along, click, there's another
piece. Move it along, and still, yet another piece.
| | 00:47 | Another thing about the Split Command that
you can do is there is this little option
| | 00:50 | here called Delete Inner Segment.
| | 00:52 | If I put a checkmark there, I can
then move this down, click once.
| | 00:58 | You can see it starts to do a break.
| | 00:59 | But, if I click a second time, it deletes
the inner segment between the first spot that
| | 01:04 | I picked, and the second spot that I picked.
| | 01:07 | Now, so far, all we've been
doing is this in a 3D View.
| | 01:11 | In order to have more accuracy, it's
always better to do this inside of a Plan View.
| | 01:14 | So, I am going to go to the Level 2 View,
and we can take a look at this in Level 2.
| | 01:19 | Once again, it's just a matter of
selecting on one of these entities.
| | 01:22 | Next, we'll need to come up to the Split Tool.
| | 01:25 | I am going to clear out Delete Inner Segment
because I don't want this gap in between them right now.
| | 01:30 | You pick a first point, and now once you've done
that, it's automatically split this into two entities.
| | 01:35 | And if we look at this over here and do the
same thing, I will point out that a temporary
| | 01:39 | dimension will automatically
show up when you are in a Plan View.
| | 01:43 | So, as a result of that, you'll know that
whenever you're in this view, that you will
| | 01:47 | have this exact distance,
4-foot-6, or 5 foot away.
| | 01:51 | And that's where that split will take place.
| | 01:52 | Sometimes, it's just easier to draw a single
object and come back later to break it into pieces.
| | 01:58 | That's where we're able
to do using the Split Tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Duplicating or moving objects with the Offset command| 00:00 | The Offset Command is used to create either
a duplicate of an object, or simply move an
| | 00:04 | object to a specified distance.
| | 00:06 | Think it has been similar to the Copy or
Move commands, but with added functionality,
| | 00:11 | that makes drawing
easier for certain conditions.
| | 00:14 | In order to illustrate this, once again, I am
going to go to the Level 2, Structural Plan.
| | 00:18 | Next, I am going to zoom in a little bit here,
and I am going to do the Offset Command to
| | 00:24 | this particular beam.
| | 00:25 | Now, to begin with, you always
have to select on the object.
| | 00:28 | Once you have done that, you can come up here on
the Ribbon, and we can find the Offset Command.
| | 00:33 | The Offset Command looks like a couple of
lines; one with a blue line on the outside
| | 00:37 | of it, go ahead and select on that.
| | 00:40 | Next, we need to set an offset distance.
| | 00:42 | How far away do we want the
copy to be from the original?
| | 00:45 | In this case, I will go
ahead and type in 8 feet.
| | 00:49 | I will move my mouse down
until I am touching the object.
| | 00:52 | You can see there is a
blue dash line that appears.
| | 00:55 | This is a very vital step.
| | 00:57 | Know wherever that dash line is showing up at, that's where the copy is going to be placed.
| | 01:03 | For instance, if I want it to be on the
inside here, make sure that blue dash line is to
| | 01:07 | the inside of this, A and B.
| | 01:10 | So, go ahead and select when you see
that, now you can see where it goes to.
| | 01:14 | If I've had the blue dash line be on the
outside like it is right now, and then clicked, you
| | 01:18 | can see its 8 feet away in this
direction from where this beam had been at.
| | 01:23 | Also, the Offset Command works with this
little checkmark right here that says Copy.
| | 01:28 | So, that's the reason why it's making a copy, and
it's not just moving the object a certain distance.
| | 01:34 | So, if I clear out the copy and then still
have 8 feet in here, I can then move down,
| | 01:40 | highlight the objects I want to be able to
in this case move because Copy is not checked;
| | 01:44 | and then where that dash line shows up,
that object has not moved down 8 feet.
| | 01:48 | Now that's kind of an unusual way to go
about using the Offset Command, keeping the Copy
| | 01:53 | unchecked; most people still just
use the Move Command to do that.
| | 01:57 | But, it is a functionality that's there,
and it's something you will see if somehow the
| | 02:01 | Copy Command box somehow gets unchecked.
| | 02:04 | One other thing that you can do is instead
of a Numerical way of going about this, you
| | 02:08 | can also do a graphical offset.
| | 02:10 | And if you instead do a graphical offset,
essentially what it means is you end up selecting
| | 02:14 | on the object, and then graphically coming
over and specifying on the screen how far
| | 02:20 | over you want it to be.
| | 02:21 | So, instead of having that dash line, I pick
the point, I move it over in this direction.
| | 02:26 | And when I pick my second point where those
dash lines are showing up at, that's where
| | 02:31 | the objects that I am going to offset are
going to get, in this case move to because
| | 02:35 | I didn't put Copy here for this box.
| | 02:38 | So, by using Offset, we can create a copy
of an object a specified distance away
| | 02:43 | in parallel to another
object with the same properties.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Trimming and extending objects| 00:00 | Trim and Extend are tools which allow us to clean up
how certain drawn objects cross or touch each other.
| | 00:05 | While they used to all be the same tool,
today they actually have three buttons to do all
| | 00:10 | their different functions, and
they can be found up on the Ribbon.
| | 00:13 | So, in order to be able to see those, let's go
ahead and take a look at Level 2 Structural Plans.
| | 00:19 | And, we're going to zoom in and select on
one of these beams that's going across here.
| | 00:25 | By doing this, we now have our Modification
tools up here on the Ribbon, and the one we're
| | 00:29 | going to be looking for of course is
going to be the Trim/Extend to Corner Tool.
| | 00:33 | Also, there are two other tools up there
which are Trim/Extend Single Element as well as
| | 00:37 | Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.
| | 00:39 | Now, for what it is worth, Trim/Extend
Single Element, and Trim/Extend Multiple Elements
| | 00:44 | are almost the exact same tool.
| | 00:45 | The only difference is, as the name implies,
is that Single Element allows you to use the
| | 00:50 | command essentially one time, while
Multiple Elements allows you to do this to multiple
| | 00:55 | different objects essentially at the same time.
| | 00:58 | So, the two main different commands here are going to
be Trim/Extend to Corner and Trim/Extend Single Element.
| | 01:04 | So, let's start by illustrating
the Trim/Extend to Corner Tool.
| | 01:07 | So, we'll go ahead and select on that.
| | 01:09 | Next, we want to select on this beam
right here, and then this one here.
| | 01:14 | We'll do the same thing down here below.
| | 01:17 | Now, the reason why these happen to be
cleaning up to a corner like this is that there are
| | 01:22 | some certain clean-up
tools that are in play here.
| | 01:25 | Now, if we wanted one to stop before the
other one, we'll learn about those Beam Join Tools
| | 01:30 | in the Beam Join exercise in Chapter 8.
| | 01:33 | Now, in this case, we can see how they've
all come together and it looks almost exactly
| | 01:38 | like this image up here of
the Trim/Extend to Corner.
| | 01:41 | Well, if we select on this beam right here,
and now hold your mouse button down, you'll
| | 01:46 | also notice that if we move this from side to
side, this will continue to flex and adjust
| | 01:51 | based on the fact that it knows that it's
supposed to be tied in here at this end and
| | 01:56 | it knows it's supposed to
be tied in here at this end.
| | 02:00 | Another thing that we can do is if we
decided to select on this, pull this back so it's
| | 02:04 | now once again on the column grid, we could
also select on one of these end pieces, one
| | 02:10 | of these end beams, and we'll get these
little dots that show up here on the end.
| | 02:13 | Now technically, these dots are called grips.
| | 02:16 | And if you select on a grip, you can pull
it out, or if you select on a dot, a grip,
| | 02:22 | it allows you to pull it back.
| | 02:23 | Now, if you do this, you can see it's no
longer cleaning up the way that it was before.
| | 02:27 | Now technically, we can use a Trim/Extend to
Corner Tool if we wish, and it would automatically
| | 02:31 | get that same condition that it had before.
| | 02:33 | But, there's a couple of other things that we could
do if we wanted to have these clean up on one another.
| | 02:38 | The first thing is that we can click on this
little grip and we can just sort of pull it
| | 02:41 | forward until it got to
that intersection right there.
| | 02:45 | And you can see how it
automatically cleans itself up.
| | 02:47 | In fact, if it's just a one-off kind of
condition, this is what I do an awful lot.
| | 02:51 | I'll just click on one, just pull it back
and get them so they line up and have them
| | 02:54 | just automatically, as much as
possible anyway, clean up on one another.
| | 02:58 | You can see here one of the weaknesses in
doing that. Sometimes when I am just clicking
| | 03:02 | on it and pulling it, and sort of eyeballing
it, it won't clean up quite the way that you
| | 03:07 | would expect it to.
| | 03:08 | In fact, it might even give you an error
message saying that it can't keep the things actually
| | 03:11 | joined to one another.
| | 03:12 | And in this case, that's okay.
| | 03:15 | The reason is that we can still use our
tools from up here like Trim/Extend to Corner
| | 03:20 | in order to be able to fix these conditions.
| | 03:23 | Now, another thing that we can know or we can
use is this Trim/Extend Single Element Tool.
| | 03:28 | Now, if we use the Single
Element, this is what it does.
| | 03:31 | By selecting on this column, we can click
on it and pull it out; this one, we can click
| | 03:36 | on it and pull it back.
| | 03:39 | And if we decided to do the Single Element
Tool instead--instead of saying where this
| | 03:44 | beam and this beam cross each other--it's
pulled this one back to wherever the face
| | 03:49 | of this beam is at.
| | 03:52 | So in this case, I'm going to pick this outside
edge here, and then select on this particular beam.
| | 03:57 | And you can see how it pulled it back to
where the face of this beam is at. And we can do
| | 04:02 | the same thing with this one down here.
| | 04:04 | So, we'll go ahead and I'm
just escaped out of the tool.
| | 04:07 | I'll select back on here.
| | 04:09 | Once again, I'll use the Trim/Extend Single
Element, pick that line, take the beam, and
| | 04:14 | we could see how they end up
cleaning up on one another.
| | 04:17 | Now, it's important to know that these
commands apply to walls and beams and many other types
| | 04:21 | of entities including line work.
| | 04:24 | And by using their power, we can clean up
many different conditions without the need
| | 04:27 | to redraw the objects from scratch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Creating Levels and GridsCreating and modifying levels| 00:00 | A Level is a control used by Revit to set
the elevations, or height of each building
| | 00:05 | component, inside of the project.
| | 00:06 | Now, as we can see, we're currently
inside of the South Elevation View.
| | 00:11 | And what's already here in the project is
Level 1 and Level 2, and we're going to need
| | 00:15 | to add a top of footing level as
well as several levels up above.
| | 00:19 | In order to be able to do this, there are
really two different methods that we can use.
| | 00:23 | The first method is to come up here on the Ribbon, underneath the Structure Tab, and look for Level.
| | 00:28 | It should be over toward the right-hand side.
| | 00:31 | Go ahead and select on Level.
| | 00:33 | If you move your mouse down, you'll see that
you can move the mouse up above your existing
| | 00:38 | levels, or down below your existing levels.
| | 00:41 | In this case, we're going to draw the top
of footing level, and since the footing is
| | 00:44 | going to be down below; and each of our
levels are just going to go at 15 foot increments.
| | 00:49 | So I'm going to move this
down until I see the number 15.
| | 00:53 | And you can see there is a dash line there.
| | 00:54 | That dash line comes into play if I
move over to the right or to the left.
| | 00:58 | And If I'm lined up directly at the end
point of this particular level, we'll see that 15
| | 01:04 | foot mark, and the dash line.
| | 01:06 | So, go ahead and click there, move over until you see
the next dash line over there on the right-hand side.
| | 01:12 | And go ahead and click.
| | 01:13 | Now, if we zoom in, and you can do that by
using the wheel on your mouse, you can see
| | 01:18 | there's now a level 3 at -15 feet.
| | 01:21 | Also, level 2 right now is at 10 foot, and
we're going to want to have that be at 15 foot.
| | 01:26 | So, in order to be able to adjust this one's
elevation up to 15 foot, we'll start off by
| | 01:31 | just hitting Esc couple of times on the keyboard
in order to make sure that we're out of the command.
| | 01:35 | Next, we're going to select
on that 10 foot dimension.
| | 01:38 | And if we click on it the second time,
you'll start to see it highlight, and you can just
| | 01:41 | type in 15 foot at this time.
| | 01:43 | Now, we're going to need to
do a couple of more things.
| | 01:46 | Now, we could just keep drawing our levels in.
| | 01:48 | But, what I'd like to do now is the second
way of going about drawing our levels, and
| | 01:53 | that is to use the Copy Command to do it.
| | 01:55 | So I'm going to select on a level.
| | 01:57 | And once you do that, you'll notice that the
Copy Command is available up here on the Ribbon.
| | 02:01 | Go ahead and select on Copy, pick a point; in
this case, I'm going to pick a point on level 1.
| | 02:06 | What this is going to allow us to do is be able
to make multiple copies at 15 foot increments.
| | 02:11 | One thing to know first, if you don't
already have Multiple checked here, make sure that
| | 02:15 | Multiple is checked, or else it's only
going to allow you to make one copy and you will
| | 02:19 | have to re-execute the command again.
| | 02:20 | So, go ahead and select a point
here on Level 1. Move up like this.
| | 02:25 | Select a point on Level 2.
| | 02:27 | We now have our third level.
| | 02:28 | I know it says Level 4, but eventually
we will rename this as our third floor.
| | 02:32 | So, we'll make this fourth floor, fifth,
sixth, and keep executing this command.
| | 02:41 | We'll move this up to 7, 8, 9, and
this last one is going to be a roof level.
| | 02:48 | So, this is going to be our 10th
level or 10th floor or roof floor.
| | 02:53 | If you've done it right, if you zoom in, you
should notice that this last one is at 135 feet.
| | 02:58 | You can go ahead and hit Esc a
couple of times to get out of the command.
| | 03:01 | Now, the next step that we need to do is
actually rename each of these levels so that they;
| | 03:07 | one, display right; and two, they will show up in
the right order over here on our Project Browser.
| | 03:14 | So far, all the ones that show up here on
the Project Browser are levels 1, 2, and 3.
| | 03:20 | We can tell that, even without looking here
at the Project Browser, because currently
| | 03:25 | they all have labels that show
up as being the color of blue.
| | 03:28 | Now, we'll talk about how to make plans over
here underneath the Project Browser associated
| | 03:33 | with each of these other levels.
| | 03:34 | But first, let's go ahead and
rename this bottom one first.
| | 03:39 | This is going to be 0-T.O.
Footing, so top of footing.
| | 03:47 | It will ask, Would you like to
rename the corresponding views?
| | 03:51 | And what that means is would you like to
rename the views that show up underneath the Project
| | 03:55 | Browser here over on the left-hand side.
| | 03:57 | And the answer of that
question is going to be Yes.
| | 03:59 | We can now see that we have zero, dash, Top
of Footing level (0-T.O.Footing) Plan View
| | 04:03 | over here in the Project Browser.
| | 04:06 | Go ahead, and do this with Level 1,
where we'll have 1 - First Floor.
| | 04:13 | Rename corresponding views?
| | 04:14 | We'll just keep saying Yes to
that for now; 2 - Second Floor, Yes.
| | 04:25 | This next one is going to be the third floor.
| | 04:26 | So, of course it's going to
be the number 3 - Third Floor.
| | 04:30 | Now technically, this can be any sort
of naming scheme that you want to do.
| | 04:34 | So, if you just wanted to say third or
structural floor or whatever you want to call it, you
| | 04:39 | can; so that one is
going to be the Fourth Floor.
| | 04:42 | Now, the reason why we're putting the number
first is that when it comes time to make these
| | 04:48 | views, it will try to do it numerically
over here underneath the Project Browser.
| | 04:52 | If we don't put that number in, then it will
try to do it alphabetically instead, and then
| | 04:56 | you're going to have floors a bit out of
sequence of one another, and it will be a little bit
| | 04:59 | harder to find over here.
| | 05:00 | So, I always like to put the numbers in
first just so it looks right over in the project
| | 05:05 | browser, and it makes
things a lot easier to find.
| | 05:08 | This will be the Fifth Floor.
| | 05:11 | We'll continue to do this on up
until we get to the Ninth Floor.
| | 05:17 | And this final one is going to be 10 - Roof.
| | 05:19 | Technically, we could call it R - Roof if
we wanted to, but realistically this is just
| | 05:24 | going to be 10 - Roof or 10 - Roof Plan.
You can name it the way that you want to.
| | 05:29 | Now that we have these, we have all of our
levels in place, but we still don't have all
| | 05:33 | of our floor plans showing up over
here underneath the Project Browser.
| | 05:36 | So, what the next thing we'll need to do is
come up here underneath the View Tab on the
| | 05:41 | Ribbon, and we're going to need to look for
this word here that says Plan Views. And we're
| | 05:45 | going to select Structural Plans,
| | 05:47 | so it's going to put these roofs under
the Structural Plans in the Project Browser.
| | 05:50 | Next, we can just highlight each of these.
| | 05:54 | And you can do that by just selecting on one,
holding down the Shift key, and then clicking
| | 05:58 | the last one, and click on OK.
| | 06:00 | Now, you may have seen a flash on the screen.
| | 06:03 | If your computer is a little bit slower than
mine, you may have seen these views automatically
| | 06:06 | regenerate on the screen.
| | 06:08 | And what happened is that it automatically
created all these different views over here
| | 06:11 | on the Project Browser, and what we're looking at
is in this case it happens to be the Roof Plan View.
| | 06:16 | And if we close each one of these individually, we'll eventually get back to our first floor
| | 06:21 | view. Or actually in this case, we
end up closing out that last view.
| | 06:24 | So, it ended up actually taking us back to our
Elevation View, in this case our South Elevation View.
| | 06:30 | And now that we have all these over here
in the Project Browser, it means that we can
| | 06:33 | start to draw any of our entities
from Revit inside the appropriate view.
| | 06:37 | So, using Levels, we can specify such things as
floor-to-floor heights, and locations of objects.
| | 06:43 | And, these four Plan Views will be the
basis for everything else that we draw.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and modifying structural grids| 00:00 | A structural grid is used as a layout and
dimensioning tool for those creating structural
| | 00:04 | layout of a building.
| | 00:06 | To create this grid in Revit, we
need to be in a Floor Plan View.
| | 00:09 | So, in this case, we'll go
to our 1 - First Floor View.
| | 00:13 | And underneath the Structure Tab again on the
ribbon, we're going to come over here to Grid.
| | 00:17 | So, go ahead and select on Grid.
| | 00:19 | We need to draw in where our first
structural grid is going to be located at, and this is
| | 00:23 | going to be our first one.
| | 00:24 | We'll move our mouse down to somewhere in
this general area here on the screen, and
| | 00:29 | click once, and then just move straight up.
| | 00:33 | Somewhere in this area, go ahead and click.
| | 00:34 | Now, the exact length of these doesn't really matter
so much; we can always make adjustments to them later.
| | 00:39 | And I'll zoom in here just so you can see
that this is the first one that we've done.
| | 00:43 | Now it is labeled number 1.
| | 00:45 | Because that one is labeled number 1, it
means if we stay in this command, then move our
| | 00:49 | mouse down here to the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:51 | Now, if we move over until this says 25 feet,
and for right now, we'll just eyeball it and
| | 00:55 | just get it till it says
25 feet, and then click.
| | 00:58 | We can then move straight up and click.
| | 01:00 | And we can see that, that one is number 2, and all
the rest of them are going to continue the sequence.
| | 01:05 | So, we'll have a 3, a 4, a 5, and a 6.
| | 01:09 | So, we can zoom out, move
back down to the bottom again.
| | 01:12 | And now this time instead of just sort of
eyeballing it and getting that 25 feet like
| | 01:15 | what we did last time, you can type in 25 for
25 feet, and then just hit Enter on the keyboard.
| | 01:22 | Now, that will automatically place that at 25
foot spacing away from the last one that you did.
| | 01:28 | Come straight up until it's lined up,
and repeat that process one more time.
| | 01:33 | So, 25 feet, Enter, come straight up, and
click; 25 feet, come straight up, and click.
| | 01:43 | Now, this next one is going to be number 6.
| | 01:46 | This one is going to be a
little bit different from the rest.
| | 01:48 | It's going to be for 2 columns that we're
going to have in a future exercise, that are going
| | 01:51 | to be located right around here.
| | 01:54 | So, this one isn't going to be at a 25 foot spacing, this one is just going to be at 8 foot, 6 inches.
| | 01:59 | So, in order to be able to accomplish that,
all you have to do is come down to the bottom
| | 02:03 | just like you did before, and type-in 8, the foot sign, and then the number 6.
| | 02:09 | It will automatically assume that, that's
6 inches because it's after a foot sign.
| | 02:14 | Hit Enter, move straight up until that's
lined up with the rest of them as well.
| | 02:18 | Now, we can see that we
have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
| | 02:22 | Now, the next one we need to do is going to be the
letter A and that's going to go from right to left.
| | 02:28 | Now, to do this, you can
just click once, move over.
| | 02:31 | But, Revit likes to keep these in sequence.
| | 02:32 | So, you can see that this last one
that we just did is number 7 now.
| | 02:36 | Now, in order to be able to
adjust that is fairly simple to do.
| | 02:39 | All you have to do is hit Esc on your
keyboard a couple of times, select back on that Grid,
| | 02:45 | click on the number 7, and
now change that to be an A.
| | 02:48 | If you've done Levels, then you'll know that
you can do the same thing with your Levels.
| | 02:53 | Select on the level line, click on
the name of the level, and then type in.
| | 02:57 | It's the exact same process.
| | 02:58 | Now, with the letter A here, we could
continue to draw the way that we have been doing, but
| | 03:04 | I'll point out that you can also use another command, the Copy Command, in order to be able to do this.
| | 03:08 | So, go ahead and select on a Level, click
on Copy, move straight down, and when you
| | 03:13 | see there's temporary dimension showing up
there on the side--in this case, it says 13
| | 03:17 | feet--go ahead and just type in 25, and
it will continue this 25 foot spacing.
| | 03:22 | And, you can see since the last one we did was A,
this next one we're going to do is going to be B.
| | 03:27 | Move straight down again 25 feet, do this one more
time, you want to have a grid line D; so 25 feet.
| | 03:34 | Now, if for some reason the command
stopped when you just did the first one, remember
| | 03:38 | it's probably because you had this multiple
and it wasn't checkmarked. So as you had Multiple
| | 03:42 | checkmarked, you should have been able
to do multiple copies of the same time.
| | 03:45 | Now, you can go ahead and hit Esc a couple
of times to get totally out of the command.
| | 03:48 | Now, it's important to remember the
structural grids in Revit are really easy to create,
| | 03:53 | and their job is to provide the framework
for all the structural layout of our building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using temporary dimensions| 00:00 | Temporary Dimensions are used for
reference and layout of objects inside of Revit.
| | 00:04 | Now, inside of this First Floor View, we're going
to go ahead and select on one of these column grids.
| | 00:10 | So, go ahead and select on perhaps this
one that has a number 4 associated with it.
| | 00:14 | When you do that, you can see
these Temporary Dimensions show up.
| | 00:17 | Now, what the Temporary Dimensions allow
you to do is if you click on the number--like
| | 00:22 | in this case, I'm going to click on the 25
feet--you can then type in, this case 20 for
| | 00:26 | 20 feet, and it will automatically give
you that spacing between one and the other.
| | 00:31 | You'll also notice the next one
happens to be in this case 30 feet.
| | 00:35 | If instead of being 30 feet, you wanted this
to be perhaps 20 feet, we could just click
| | 00:40 | on the number 30, change this to be 20, and you
can now see how that's 20 and now this one is 30.
| | 00:46 | So it just temporarily gives you a dimension
that reports the information between the objects
| | 00:51 | that that it's measuring.
| | 00:52 | Now, in this case, I
actually like the 25 foot spacing.
| | 00:54 | So I'm going to go ahead and change this to
be 25 foot; so this is 25, and 25 foot again.
| | 01:00 | Now, something else to know about these
temporary dimensions is that they don't necessarily
| | 01:04 | have to go just to these spots
that we're currently looking at.
| | 01:07 | But, in order to be able to adjust
this, let me show you something else.
| | 01:09 | There's this little option down
here that looks like a dimension.
| | 01:12 | If you go ahead and click on that, and
then click somewhere out here in the space,
| | 01:16 | you'll now see that these have now become
what's considered a permanent dimension.
| | 01:20 | So, if I select on this, zoom out, pull it
up, you can now see that we have a permanent
| | 01:28 | dimension, one that didn't go away when we
deselected anything up here at the top of the screen.
| | 01:33 | If for some reason, we don't want to have
one of these two dimensions, it's not hard
| | 01:37 | to make that adjustment.
| | 01:38 | All you have to do is move your arrow over,
hit Tab--and you can see how I hit the Tab
| | 01:42 | key, I am just clicking on
it right now--to select one.
| | 01:46 | You can then hit Delete on your
keyboard, and it will delete that dimension.
| | 01:50 | If you hit Esc, that dimension is still there.
| | 01:53 | Now, if I select on this dimension again, I
can always click on these dots that show up here.
| | 01:59 | In this case, I'm going
to click on this top dot.
| | 02:01 | I'm just going to hold my mouse button
down, and drag it over here to the end.
| | 02:04 | And you can see it's starting to give me an updated
dimension based on where I'm clicking-and-dragging
| | 02:10 | this over, and touching another object.
| | 02:11 | So, let me click here, drag it over.
| | 02:15 | You can see that there is a dimension there.
| | 02:17 | And I could do the same thing here, because
this is going to be really my main bay between
| | 02:22 | number 1 and number 5, and I
can just click-and-drag that over.
| | 02:25 | And now I can see that my overall
dimension of my bay is 100 feet in this direction.
| | 02:30 | If I wanted to, I could do the
same thing going down the sides.
| | 02:33 | So, at their heart, temporary dimensions are
really just quick reference in modification
| | 02:38 | tools that are provided in Revit structure.
| | 02:41 | They allow you to be able to make quick modifications,
and get immediate feedback on distances between objects.
| | 02:46 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Pinning elements| 00:00 | Sometimes we need to keep items from
moving when we model and draw them.
| | 00:04 | To do this in Revit
takes a command known as Pin.
| | 00:07 | In this example, we'll use Pin to keep the
structural grid in its proper location so
| | 00:11 | we don't accidentally move
them as we design our structure.
| | 00:14 | So, to use Pin, all we have to do is decide,
what is it that we want to be able
| | 00:19 | to pin in place so they don't move?
| | 00:22 | In this case, we don't want any of our
structural grids to be able to move as we're drawing
| | 00:26 | everything else around them.
| | 00:27 | So, simply move your mouse up here, sort of above
where the A and the 6 is at, and click-and-hold down.
| | 00:35 | Move over in this direction, and then when
you have all your structural grids highlighted
| | 00:38 | in blue like this, go ahead, and let go.
| | 00:41 | Now, you should see all of your
structural grids highlighted like this.
| | 00:44 | Now, the next thing we're
going to do is use the Pin tool.
| | 00:47 | And the pin actually looks like a
little pushpin that you can push down.
| | 00:50 | And go ahead and select on the pin.
| | 00:51 | When you do it, you'll get all
these little pinhead symbols show up.
| | 00:55 | What it means is that each of these objects that
have been highlighted are now pinned in place.
| | 01:01 | What this means is if you select on one, and
then try to move it from spot to spot or use
| | 01:06 | the Move Command, it won't allow you to do
it, because they're pinned and there is no
| | 01:10 | way to be able to move their locations.
| | 01:12 | This way, you don't have your structural
grid moving 6 inches in one direction and then
| | 01:16 | when it comes time to build it out in the
field, they end up building something that
| | 01:19 | just isn't structurally
feasible and might end up falling down.
| | 01:23 | So, think of it as sort of your safety
valve to be able to pin stuff in place, and not
| | 01:27 | have to worry about it moving.
| | 01:29 | So, in this exercise, we learned that the
Pin Command holds items in their spot, so
| | 01:33 | they can't be accidentally moved.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Structural ColumnsPlacing structural columns| 00:00 | Structural columns are one of the most
commonplace elements in many projects.
| | 00:04 | They are the structural members that hold
the building up and bring all the weight, also
| | 00:08 | known as force, down to the ground.
| | 00:11 | To use them in Revit, we need to
activate the Column command from the Ribbon.
| | 00:15 | So, we'll come up here and we're
going to try to find our columns.
| | 00:18 | So here we have Structure and
Column, and go ahead and select on that.
| | 00:23 | Now, underneath Properties here on the left
hand side, we have what's technically called
| | 00:28 | the type selector list.
| | 00:30 | And if you select on it, you will get a series
of different columns that we can choose from.
| | 00:36 | Unfortunately, this building is a great big
building, so as a result of that all these
| | 00:40 | structural members that we're looking
at right here are pretty small for it.
| | 00:43 | So, we need to load in a family
that's going to be the appropriate size.
| | 00:47 | To do that, over here, we see that there's a
big button that says Load Family. Go ahead
| | 00:52 | and select on that.
| | 00:54 | Next, we're going to look
for structural, and columns.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and open up that folder.
| | 01:02 | We're going to go under Steel, because this
is going to be a steel structure. And we want
| | 01:06 | this Welded Wire Flange-Column.
| | 01:08 | So go ahead and just double
-click on that really fast.
| | 01:10 | Now, this gives us a list of all the
different steel sizes that we have available to us.
| | 01:15 | And we can come down on list, and what we're
going to work for is going to be the 18 x 337.
| | 01:23 | So, WWF 18 x 337. There it is.
| | 01:29 | It's a proper size just like you get out of
the structural steel catalog. And go ahead
| | 01:34 | and click on Ok to that.
| | 01:37 | And we'll see that it's now loaded into the
project, and shows up here on the Type Selector
| | 01:41 | list over on the left-hand side.
| | 01:43 | So, just make sure that
WWF 18 x 337 is selected.
| | 01:47 | And the next thing we're going to do is
we're going to move over here, and we're going to
| | 01:51 | place it at the intersection of A and 1.
| | 01:55 | One thing to know is that right now, we're on
the first floor, and right now it's saying depth.
| | 02:00 | If yours says height already, that's great. If
it doesn't, go ahead and change it to say height.
| | 02:06 | And make sure that it's going up to 2 - and it's
kind of getting cut off here, but it's our second-floor.
| | 02:14 | The information that shows up here is always
is going to be the same information you see
| | 02:17 | here underneath the Views.
| | 02:19 | Now, just click over here once, right at the
intersection, and you can see it almost snaps to the point.
| | 02:24 | In fact it kind of feels like a snap to point, if you
move your mouse ever so slightly. And it and it does.
| | 02:31 | And currently it's placing this column in
from the first level up to the second level.
| | 02:36 | Now, we could take the time to do
this on each and every one of these.
| | 02:40 | In fact, the ones we want to do it are going
to be through this area of the grid right here.
| | 02:45 | We're going to have a couple of
special columns placed in later on, over here.
| | 02:49 | So, the faster way to go about placing each
and every one of these is using this command
| | 02:54 | right here that says At Grids.
| | 02:55 | So, if you select At Grids, then move over
here, click and hold the mouse button down,
| | 03:03 | and create this window around
your structural column grid.
| | 03:06 | Once you get to this point, you'll already
see sort of the highlights or outline of each
| | 03:11 | of those columns we are
getting ready to be placed.
| | 03:13 | The next thing we want to do is--and this is
always important--is to click on the big green
| | 03:18 | checkmark up at the top of the screen. And
that's for Finish; we want to finish the sketch.
| | 03:25 | Once we've done that, we now
have those columns in place.
| | 03:28 | And let's go ahead and take a
look at these in the 3-D view.
| | 03:31 | And to do that you can just click on the loaf,
default 3-D view house up here at the top of the screen.
| | 03:36 | So, we've placed all these columns of the
right size here along the structural grid.
| | 03:42 | Now, these just happen to be the
ones between the first and second floor.
| | 03:47 | We still need to place these same
columns all way on up the building.
| | 03:50 | So, in order to be able to do that, let's
go ahead and go back to our First Floor plan.
| | 03:56 | Next, we're going to do that same sort of
window move that we did before, and just click
| | 04:01 | over here, window around.
| | 04:04 | I don't really want our
structural grid to be in this.
| | 04:08 | So, we can use another tool here which is
called Filter, and you can just click on the
| | 04:11 | Filter; and then click where it has grids, so
that only structural columns has a checkmark
| | 04:18 | next to it, and click on Ok.
| | 04:22 | By doing this, we can see just
our columns are highlighted now.
| | 04:25 | We didn't really need the grids, because
the grid was already going all the way on up
| | 04:28 | through all of our floors anyway.
| | 04:30 | So, now that we have that all highlighted,
we can come up here and there is this option
| | 04:35 | here that says Copy to Clipboard; make sure
you hit this one. There is technically a Copy
| | 04:40 | command over here, but this is not the same
as Copy to Clipboard was shows up over here.
| | 04:45 | Once you've copied it to the clipboard,
there is the option here that says Paste.
| | 04:49 | Now, don't do the old Windows standard Ctrl +
V in order to paste things in, it won't work
| | 04:54 | the way you want it to.
| | 04:55 | But if you click on the word Paste, there is
an option here that says Aligned to Selected
| | 05:00 | Levels; click that.
| | 05:03 | This is going to give us a list of all the
different spots, so we can copy these things
| | 05:07 | that we've just selected on up to.
| | 05:09 | In this case, we want to copy them from the
second floor all the way up to the ninth floor.
| | 05:15 | And because of their height, and they know
that they should go between floors--in this
| | 05:19 | case it had been between floors one and two.
| | 05:21 | What it will do when it gets to the ninth
floors is it will copy it between the ninth
| | 05:25 | floor and up to the roof structure.
| | 05:27 | So, go ahead once you have these highlighted--
and you can do that by just clicking once
| | 05:31 | and then holding down the Shift key
and clicking the next level--click on Ok.
| | 05:35 | Now, this could take a few seconds, because
right now it's copying and pasting each of
| | 05:40 | these columns up floor by floor by floor.
| | 05:43 | Now, we can kind of verify that, if you look
here back in our 3-D view again; and now we
| | 05:48 | can see each of these have been copied up.
| | 05:50 | And by the way, if you want to be able to spin
this around so you can see it a little bit better,
| | 05:54 | You can just hold the Shift key down on
your keyboard, and then hold down the wheel on
| | 05:59 | your mouse, and just
gently rotate your mouse around.
| | 06:03 | And now you can see each of those columns
and each of them have been brought up to each
| | 06:09 | floor where they are supposed to be at.
| | 06:11 | So, structural columns could be placed by
single clicks or by selecting the structural
| | 06:15 | grid they will be associated with.
| | 06:18 | Also remember that we can load different column sizes
by using the Load Family tool when executing the command.
| | 06:23 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying columns| 00:00 | Once your columns are placed, we can make
minor modifications to them, either by adjusting
| | 00:04 | the Properties, or picking a
different Column from the Type Selector List.
| | 00:08 | So in order to probably better illustrate
this--though we can definitely do this from
| | 00:12 | a Floor Plan View--lets go ahead
and take a look at this in a 3D View.
| | 00:16 | To do that, once again, you can just come up
to the little house that shows up at the top
| | 00:20 | of the screen, and click on it.
| | 00:21 | I am going to rotate this surround just so
we can see it just a tiny bit better, and
| | 00:25 | to do that I am going to hold down the Shift key on
my keyboard, as well as the wheel button on my mouse.
| | 00:30 | I am just going to spin this around just a
little bit and then zoom in here down at the
| | 00:36 | bottom of the screen.
| | 00:38 | Now this column, if I move my mouse over it,
and click on it, we can now see that it's
| | 00:44 | highlighted in blue and it happens to be Column
located at the D-5 location on the Column grid.
| | 00:49 | If we ever want to be able to verify that,
we can always go to our First Floor plan,
| | 00:53 | and just double-click
where it has 1-First Floor.
| | 00:56 | And we can see that 5 in D, so D-5,
that's where a Column is highlighting in blue.
| | 01:06 | I'll go-ahead and close out of this view just
by clicking the little x up here in the corner,
| | 01:12 | select that from the column and make sure
that it is highlighted, and now we'll go ahead
| | 01:15 | and try to adjust some of the
Properties associated with it.
| | 01:18 | Now one property that we can
adjust is how tall this column is.
| | 01:21 | In order to do that, we can either come in
here and tell it that it should go up to
| | 01:27 | a different floor by changing the Top Level,
or we could even come here to Base Level which
| | 01:32 | would tell the base of it, the bottom of it,
to go down to a certain floor. Like in this
| | 01:38 | case, we wanted to go down the top of footing,
we could just by highlighting on that. But
| | 01:43 | the kind of modification that I'm going to make
to this is just going to be a real gentle one.
| | 01:46 | In this case, we are going to take the Base,
or the bottom of it, and just raise it up by
| | 01:51 | up about 4 feet, just so you can see it done.
| | 01:54 | So you can type in 4 foot, move your mouse
over here, and you can already see that this
| | 01:59 | is now a little bit higher than it was.
| | 02:01 | Let me just move this down, so we can it adjust,
changes from being 4foot, to 0 again, see how
| | 02:08 | this just ended up getting longer, and we
could theoretically do the same thing for
| | 02:13 | the Top of this as well.
| | 02:15 | Tell it should be either positive, which will
bring it up X distances, or tell it be a negative
| | 02:21 | number, which will drop down a
certain distance off of that level.
| | 02:25 | So you can make it really easy and minor
adjustments related to height by just is selecting on
| | 02:31 | it in, and then telling it you want it
to be a certain height off of the level.
| | 02:35 | Now another kind of adjustment that we can
make is completely switch the Column out
| | 02:39 | with one of a different size.
| | 02:41 | To do that, you can just select on the Column,
come over to the Type Selector list, and pick
| | 02:45 | a different column off of it.
| | 02:47 | In this case, we will be go with W8/10, which is way
undersized for this, but you will definitely see a difference.
| | 02:53 | See how it swapped that much bigger column
out for the much smaller one; and we can bring
| | 02:58 | that back again by just selecting on it,
coming back to Type Selector list, and picking one
| | 03:03 | of the appropriate size off of the list.
| | 03:06 | So columns can be modified easily in a
variety of views, including Plan, and 3-D Views, and
| | 03:12 | Elevation views, just the way that we
were just doing it inside of this View.
| | 03:16 | These columns can they have their
properties adjusted very easily just by making those
| | 03:20 | adjustments inside of the
Properties palette over here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing slanted structural columns| 00:00 | Structural columns can also be slanted if
you choose to place a slanted column type.
| | 00:05 | In order to be able to do this, it's always
best to be inside of your First Floor plan
| | 00:08 | or whatever floor plan you want to start with,
then come up underneath the Structure tab
| | 00:13 | and select on Column.
| | 00:16 | From here, we can look over here and we
can see that there's two different options.
| | 00:19 | The one we probably would have placed in the past would
have been a vertical column, but if want to
| | 00:23 | be able to slant or tilt, we have to use the
slanted column. So just go ahead and select
| | 00:28 | on Slanted Column right here.
| | 00:29 | Next, you want to be able to draw the slanted
column from the first floor up to the second
| | 00:35 | floor. And right now we can see here on the Options
bar, this says 1st Click, and it has top of foundation.
| | 00:42 | If you're says something different that's
okay, but what we're going to do is going
| | 00:45 | to change this to be First Floor.
| | 00:48 | If we try to do this right now, it might
generate an error, and the error message is going to
| | 00:53 | say the first click elevation cannot
equal the second click of elevation.
| | 00:57 | What that means is that it was going to
have a column that was going to have absolutely
| | 01:00 | zero height to it and it didn't like that.
| | 01:03 | So usually if you're going to be
placing some like a slanted column,
| | 01:05 | I usually like to adjust it
where it has 2nd click first.
| | 01:10 | In other words, change this up to second floor, and now
change this, where it has top of footing, to be first floor.
| | 01:17 | Now, since this one and this one are not the
same, that means that the column is going to
| | 01:21 | have a height, so it's no longer going to
generate that error message whenever we try
| | 01:25 | to first place that slanted column.
| | 01:27 | Now that we've actually adjusted these settings,
another thing we'll need to do is make sure
| | 01:31 | the 3D snap is currently not on.
| | 01:34 | 3D snap if you're inside of a 3D view works
really well, if we're going to be placing the
| | 01:39 | slanted column. But since we're in a two-
dimensional view we really don't need it, and frankly it
| | 01:43 | can kind of get in the way.
| | 01:44 | So just make sure that box is cleared out, and
now we're going to place a slanted column
| | 01:49 | over here to the right-hand
side on the grid of 6 and B.
| | 01:55 | Now, it's going to ask us to do two clicks.
Technically this first one is going to be
| | 01:59 | for the very first, or the very bottom of
this column; and now it's going to want us to do
| | 02:05 | a second one. And I like to usually just do
my second click pretty much in the exact same
| | 02:09 | spot as the first.
| | 02:13 | You may get an error message. Don't worry about
it; we're going to make adjustments to it anyway.
| | 02:19 | Now let's go ahead and take a look
at this inside of an Elevation view.
| | 02:23 | So we'll move down in a Project browser,
we'll open up the South Elevation. And now, this
| | 02:30 | is the column that we just placed, and like
we specified in the Options bar, it's between
| | 02:34 | the first and second floor.
| | 02:37 | Now if want this to be slanted, all we have
to do is select on it, click on the little
| | 02:41 | grip that shows up, hold down your mouse
button, and just sort of drag it in the direction
| | 02:46 | you want it to slant.
| | 02:47 | If you know the exact angle of it, we can
always tell it what angle we want it to be at.
| | 02:52 | In this case though, I just know what the
distance should be away from our building.
| | 02:56 | Now, I know that the base is in the right location,
because that's why I put it on the structural grid.
| | 03:00 | In this case, it happens to be 8-foot-6
off the center of this column, but I want the
| | 03:05 | top of this to be 12-foot-6 away
from the center of this column.
| | 03:09 | So in order for me to do that, we're really
going to have to place a dimension in here.
| | 03:14 | Now this is easy enough to do.
| | 03:16 | All you have to do is come up here to the
Annotate tab, and pick on this button right
| | 03:19 | here that says Linear. And that's just going
to create a dimension that goes straight, sort
| | 03:24 | of like the dimensions that
you see here in the preview.
| | 03:27 | Next--and this might be the hardest part to do
because it almost looks like you're clicking
| | 03:31 | blind--but just move your mouse until you
have this spot right here. And you might even
| | 03:36 | see a blue dot on your screen, depending on
the resolution; and you can just click once,
| | 03:41 | move over, and then pick the center
point of this beam or of this column.
| | 03:48 | Then move straight up and just click again;
and then click somewhere out here in space.
| | 03:52 | Now just the place a dimension in for us and
that'll be a reference dimension for everything
| | 03:56 | else we're getting ready to do.
| | 03:58 | Now the next thing we'll do is, we'll go
ahead and we'll select back on the column. And you
| | 04:02 | can see how this is telling
this is a 14 feet and 1/8th of an inch.
| | 04:06 | Now, as I'm looking at this, I'm seeing that
this might not be exactly on center, so we're
| | 04:10 | just going to zoom in just a little bit and
make sure if it's on center or not. It looks
| | 04:13 | like it just slightly off for this dimension,
because it is. If yours is fine, then you
| | 04:18 | don't have to do this; but I'm selecting on
my dimension, clicking on this little circular
| | 04:22 | shape right up here that says Move
Witness Line. And I'm just going to click and hold
| | 04:26 | my mouse button down and just sort of drag
it out until it's lined up with that line.
| | 04:30 | So now I know that I could have that
dimension, have it just sort to be right and have it
| | 04:33 | snap to the right location.
| | 04:34 | Let me see if I can do this with the bottom
one here. Pull it up, pull it back; there we go.
| | 04:42 | One of those things about moving witness
lines is sometimes they don't always like to snap
| | 04:45 | just right where you want them to go. So if
that ever happens, you just click on it and
| | 04:49 | drag it way out here, and just pull it
straight back, and then it will just sort of grab onto
| | 04:54 | the spot that you want it to grab onto.
| | 04:57 | Now, once you finally have that
dimension in place, it gets to be really easy.
| | 05:00 | All you have to do is select on your column,
tell it what you want this dimension to be--
| | 05:04 | In this case, 12-foot-6 inches--and zoom out.
You'll see that the bottom of it is moved, but now
| | 05:12 | it's easy; you just click and drag that
over by selecting on this little circular shape
| | 05:17 | here. And now your column is in the right spot and
has the right distance or slope associated with it.
| | 05:24 | So, in conclusion, creating a slanted
column actually takes some practice, and sometimes
| | 05:29 | it takes a creative use of views. But with
dimensions as your guide, you'll have the
| | 05:34 | greatest level of success in creating that
slanted column and making it be as accurate as possible.
| | 05:38 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding architectural columns| 00:00 | Architectural columns are a lot like
structural columns, but they have different properties
| | 00:04 | associated with them.
| | 00:05 | Their primary function is usually not to
bring loads down to the ground, but instead they
| | 00:10 | create a finish look to your building.
They're the reason why you normally don't see steel
| | 00:14 | beams as you walk through most spaces;
instead you see these ornate architectural columns
| | 00:19 | that actually surround the steel
beams which are giving it its structure.
| | 00:23 | So let's go ahead and show how to put
an architectural column into the space.
| | 00:28 | To begin with, we can't really do it
underneath the Structure tab; we are going to need to
| | 00:31 | come over here at the Architecture tab. And
then underneath Column here, if you select
| | 00:36 | on the word Column, you'll
notice that there's two options.
| | 00:39 | One is a Structural Column which is
exactly the same as the Structural Columns we saw
| | 00:43 | over here underneath the Structure Tab, or
there is a Column Architectural, and that's
| | 00:48 | the one we will want to use.
| | 00:51 | So go ahead and select on that; it's going
to give you a message saying that there aren't
| | 00:54 | any Architectural Columns currently loaded
into the project, do you want to load one
| | 00:58 | in right now? And the answer
to that is going to be Yes.
| | 01:02 | So go and select on yes to that.
| | 01:03 | We will look underneath Load family here,
and we are going to look for Columns. So here
| | 01:09 | we have Columns. Double-click on that, and
we are going to load in just a rectangular
| | 01:15 | column. It's kind of a
generic column for right now.
| | 01:18 | So Rectangle Column and when I say generic, it
doesn't have real material Properties associated
| | 01:23 | it, it just sort of looks like a big
rectangle. That could always be changed later.
| | 01:28 | Next, we have this rectangular column, and it says 24"
x24". That happens to be the exact size that we need.
| | 01:36 | So that's going to work out just
fine for us. And we'll zoom in here.
| | 01:42 | And at the intersection of 2 and B, we are going
to try to place our first architectural column.
| | 01:48 | So go ahead and move it over here, click,
you can see it places it in. And you can just
| | 01:53 | keep clicking this in order to place in each
of these architectural columns in the place.
| | 02:01 | So select and select, and we will just do it
at these 6 Interior Locations for right now.
| | 02:08 | Once these Architectural Columns are in place,
we'll hit Esc a couple of times and get
| | 02:11 | out of the command.
| | 02:12 | Next, we are going to move to a 3D View,
and try to take a look at them in a 3D View.
| | 02:18 | So go up to little house, select on that; now we
are going to spin this around by just holding
| | 02:24 | down the Shift key and the wheel on the mouse.
| | 02:27 | And one of the things you'll notice is that
we are not seeing our architectural columns
| | 02:30 | as of right now. And the reason is inside
of a structural view, oftentimes such things
| | 02:36 | as the architectural columns
might be shut off by default.
| | 02:39 | If they are, this is how you can
go about turning those things on.
| | 02:43 | We can just use our Visibility Graphics, and
you might remember that we can type in the
| | 02:47 | letter V twice for Visibility-Visibility, in
order to bring up that dialog box. Or we can
| | 02:53 | click on the Edit button next to Visibility
Graphics, and that's what I'm going to do now.
| | 02:58 | Click on the Edit button, and we can see
that our columns are currently shut off inside
| | 03:03 | of this view, but our structural
columns are currently turned on.
| | 03:07 | That's why we can see our structural columns
here but we can't see our structural columns,
| | 03:12 | or architectural columns
I mean, here on the View.
| | 03:14 | But if we put a little checkmark next to
columns and click on OK, suddenly down here at the
| | 03:19 | bottom, we now have our architectural
columns surrounding our structural columns.
| | 03:25 | And, if we don't want to be able to see
through them, you can come down here and we can see
| | 03:29 | that right now our Visual
Style is set to Wireframe.
| | 03:32 | We probably don't want that, so we will go
ahead and turn this to be Hidden Line instead.
| | 03:38 | And now we can see our architectural columns,
which are surrounding our structural columns.
| | 03:43 | Now, it's an important remember that
architectural columns are there so they can create a finish
| | 03:47 | look around our columns.
| | 03:49 | Why they are important on structural side
is that they also were great as such things
| | 03:53 | just as pilasters. Think of concrete columns
that might surround some of your structural
| | 03:58 | members down around your foundation walls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Structural WallsCreating custom walls| 00:00 | Sometimes you need to create a custom wall
type inside of a Revit project, so that the
| | 00:04 | wall has the right thickness or materials.
| | 00:07 | In this project, we need to
create a 24" thick foundation wall.
| | 00:11 | So let's start going through that process.
| | 00:14 | In order to best do this, we need to come up
here to where it has wall and select on Wall.
| | 00:19 | Next, we can see it says Basic
Wall Generic 8" here on the list.
| | 00:24 | Well, go ahead and select on that, and we
can see that there's a variety of wall types
| | 00:29 | already loaded into our project.
| | 00:31 | Now, if 24" thick foundation wall
was here on the list, I'd have to select on it and
| | 00:36 | go about using it; but there isn't.
| | 00:40 | The good news for us though is that there is
a Foundation - 12" Concrete foundation
| | 00:44 | wall that's available to us.
| | 00:46 | Now that's not going to work for us, but we
can modify that so that it has the properties
| | 00:51 | that will work in our project.
| | 00:52 | So go ahead and select on
Foundation - 12" Concrete.
| | 00:55 | Next, there is an option here that says Edit
Type, and this is going to allow us to start
| | 01:00 | to edit some of these properties.
| | 01:02 | So select on Edit Type, and this
might be one of the most important steps.
| | 01:06 | There's a big button here that says Duplicate.
| | 01:09 | What we're going to do, we're going to make a
duplicate of this Foundation - 12" Concrete
| | 01:14 | wall, so select on that, and we're going to
rename it to be Foundation - 24" Concrete.
| | 01:22 | And we'll click on OK.
| | 01:26 | What this allowed us to do is we're still
able to keep that 12" Concrete foundation
| | 01:30 | wall should we ever need it, but now we have
a duplicate of that wall which is currently
| | 01:34 | named 24" Concrete.
| | 01:37 | But just because it has a name doesn't mean
that it's actually 24 inches thick just yet,
| | 01:41 | so we need to make that adjustment.
| | 01:43 | So there's a big button here
that says Edit, next to Structure.
| | 01:46 | Go ahead and click on Edit.
| | 01:49 | From here, we can see all the different layers
and materials that happen to make up this wall.
| | 01:53 | If we want to be able to see this in a
little bit more graphical form, we can come down
| | 01:57 | here into the lower left-hand side
and select on the Preview button.
| | 02:01 | This is the way that this wall
will look inside of a Plan view.
| | 02:04 | If we want to know how it's going to look
like in an Elevation view or Section view,
| | 02:08 | we can come down here to Section and
click on the Section: Modify type attributes.
| | 02:13 | And this is the way it's going to look like
if we would cut a Section through this wall.
| | 02:17 | Now the reason why it's all highlighted in
blue is because it happens to be highlighted
| | 02:20 | here, but if I click on either number one
or the number three, we can see we're just
| | 02:25 | taking a section through the wall.
| | 02:26 | If we want to be able to add extra layers
and materials to this wall, all we'd have
| | 02:30 | to do is click the Insert button right here.
You would add extra layer--or like something
| | 02:35 | above number 1 or something below number three--
but then we could tell that that layer
| | 02:40 | material needs to have a
certain thickness associated with it.
| | 02:42 | In this case though, it just
24-inch thick concrete wall.
| | 02:47 | So all the properties are already there, all
we need to is change this from being 1'
| | 02:53 | and then we can give you type in 2'
or if wanted we can just type in 24".
| | 02:59 | It'll automatically change it to be 2'
thick, and then from here we can just click on OK.
| | 03:06 | We can now see that we have a wall with
the Type properties, that's 24 inches thick.
| | 03:11 | If we click on OK to this, you can now see
that there's a Basic Wall Foundation 24"
| | 03:16 | Concrete available to us, and we could
start to put that inside of our project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing walls| 00:00 | Walls are versatile families in Revit;
they can be made up of multiple materials.
| | 00:04 | In this exercise, we'll learn the process
of placing foundation walls, which support
| | 00:09 | the building and go into the
ground, into our Revit project.
| | 00:12 | For your information, this is the
same process as placing framed walls.
| | 00:16 | If you're not familiar with that
terminology of framed wall, a framed wall is a type of
| | 00:20 | wall most likely surrounding you in the room
that you're currently watching this video in.
| | 00:24 | Usually, it's made up of multiple layers and
materials, and it's not made out of just thick concrete.
| | 00:31 | But in this exercise, we're going to go ahead
and start to place in some foundation walls.
| | 00:36 | So to start, we need to come up here to the
Wall Tool, we'll select on that. And we have
| | 00:43 | some options here including this
Basic Wall Foundation 24" Concrete.
| | 00:49 | And that's the one that we want to use.
| | 00:50 | If it did not show up for you just go ahead
and select on, right here in the Type selector
| | 00:54 | list where it has Basic Wall
Foundation, or whatever it says for you.
| | 00:58 | And then just select Foundation -
24" Concrete off of your list.
| | 01:04 | Next, we're going to move over here, zoom
in just a little bit, and what we're going
| | 01:09 | to do is we're going to place a foundation
wall going from A-1 over, down, back over
| | 01:16 | again, and then back up
in order to finish it off.
| | 01:20 | Before we start clicking though, we need to
make sure that it is going down; in this case we
| | 01:24 | can see that there is a
depth associated with it.
| | 01:27 | We want to make sure that there's a
specific height associated with it.
| | 01:31 | In this case it says Unconnected and it's
going to go down 12 feet into the ground.
| | 01:36 | Well, that might be okay depending on your
project, but in this example I'd like to go
| | 01:40 | down to where the top of our footing is up.
| | 01:43 | So we can pick that top of Footing level
off of our pulldown list, and that associates
| | 01:48 | itself with the different levels that are
in the project. And we can see that that
| | 01:52 | will go down to 15' below
where our first level is at.
| | 01:57 | The location line, in this case, we're
going to keep it at Wall Centerline. But you can
| | 02:02 | also draw your walls to the finish face of
the outside of the wall, to the finish face
| | 02:08 | of the inside of the wall--so you're at
the very outside or very inside of the walls--
| | 02:12 | or to the structural parts of the walls, if this
wall has multiple materials associated with it.
| | 02:18 | In this case though, we're going to go with
the Wall Centerline, so right down the center
| | 02:23 | of the wall. There is an option here for chain--
make sure there's a checkmark in there that's
| | 02:28 | going to allow us to draw
one wall right after another.
| | 02:31 | We can just leave the
defaults for everything else.
| | 02:34 | Now go ahead and just move your mouse until
you get to the intersection of A and 1, and
| | 02:40 | click; and then move over in this direction.
| | 02:44 | Come over here to this spot. and click. You
can zoom in and out really easy by just using
| | 02:52 | the wheel on your mouse.
| | 02:55 | Zoom down and click, come over and click,
and then come back up again, and click.
| | 03:05 | Now I realize the columns are not completely
supported by these walls right now, and that's
| | 03:09 | because in the future we'll be putting some
extra structural members on the underneath
| | 03:12 | side of these, but let's go ahead and
take a look at this in a 3D view now.
| | 03:16 | So just come up here to the
Default 3D View and select on it.
| | 03:21 | We can now see that we have a concrete
foundation wall going around the outside of our building.
| | 03:27 | Now, it's important to remember that
whenever you're working with walls, they have many
| | 03:30 | options associated with them; and since we
say options, we know most of those
| | 03:34 | options will show up on the
options bar and going across the top.
| | 03:38 | But the important thing really to remember
about placing walls is to remember that we
| | 03:43 | need to specify their location, ideally
in a Plan View, and where we want to go.
| | 03:49 | So do we want them to go down a certain
number of feet and then connect at height? Or do we
| | 03:53 | want them to go down to a certain level?
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying walls| 00:00 | There are variety of ways to
modify walls and the way that they look.
| | 00:04 | In this exercise, we'll discuss how to
modify their shape by using the Edit Profile tools
| | 00:09 | available in Revit.
| | 00:10 | So, in order to do this, our best bet is
to go into perhaps a West elevation.
| | 00:16 | So underneath the Project Browser, let's
scroll down and so we can find our Elevations, and
| | 00:21 | then double-click on West.
| | 00:23 | Next, I'm going to zoom down here to
this wall, keep zooming in, there we go.
| | 00:30 | And we're going to just move into the
right hand side of our building. And then we're
| | 00:35 | going to select on the wall,
so that it's all highlighted.
| | 00:39 | Once that wall is highlighted, you can move
up here and there is a big button that says
| | 00:43 | Edit Profile, and that's what we want to select.
| | 00:47 | When you do that, you'll get this purple, pink,
magenta--whatever color line that is--and you
| | 00:53 | can make adjustments to it.
| | 00:55 | Now the key here is that this wall has to
be one continuous line as you follow it around.
| | 01:01 | So when we we're done with the sketch we're
getting ready to do, it needs to be one continuous line.
| | 01:08 | To begin with, we want to be able to bring
a line--so we're just going to select in the
| | 01:12 | Line Tool,--from the intersection of this
corner down 3 feet. And the reason why we're doing
| | 01:20 | this is perhaps the grade or the
ground is sloping down in that direction.
| | 01:25 | So we need to have the footing go down a
little bit farther into the ground, in order to be
| | 01:28 | able to support this side of the building.
| | 01:31 | So just move this straight down 3 foot, or
you can type in three'. Next, move over
| | 01:38 | to the side and we're going
to move over 12' 6".
| | 01:43 | So just type in 12' 6", hit Enter, and
come straight up and then you see that little
| | 01:50 | x, go ahead and click. And hit a Esc
a couple times to get out of the command.
| | 01:55 | Now, you will look at this and you'll realize
this is not one continuous line as I was just stating.
| | 02:00 | So in order to make this be one continuous
line, we need to select on this line, click
| | 02:06 | on the circle or the little grip that shows
up at the end, hold your mouse button down,
| | 02:11 | and just kind of drag it over.
| | 02:12 | And now, if we follow it around with our mouse,
we can see it's one continuous line that comes
| | 02:18 | all the way back to the start
again. That's where we want it,
| | 02:21 | so just come up here to the big green checkmark.
And now the wall is taking on that shape that
| | 02:27 | we just drew out in that sort of Profile view.
| | 02:30 | So let's go ahead and do this to the other
wall, which in this case is going to be the
| | 02:34 | south wall, so that it comes down
and meets this intersection as well.
| | 02:39 | So we'll move to our South Elevation view,
select on the wall, click on Edit Profile,
| | 02:46 | zoom in a little bit; once again, we'll use
the Line Tool. And by the way, this is the outside
| | 02:53 | or the thickness of that wallthat we just
modified a minute ago that we're seeing here in the gray.
| | 02:59 | Now go ahead and select right here, move
straight down, we know that's 3' because well,
| | 03:05 | that's what it was before on the other wall,
and we can also see this 3' dimension
| | 03:09 | that shows up here.
| | 03:11 | And now move over to your right
15 feet, then come straight up.
| | 03:18 | Now we still have this condition where it
needs be one continuous line going all the
| | 03:21 | way around; so click, select on the DAW just
like we did last time, and pull it over. And as
| | 03:29 | we look at it,
| | 03:30 | we can go from start to finish. And when you can
do that, you know that this will clean up correctly.
| | 03:37 | Now, pick the big green checkmark, and we can
see that this wall has now taken on this shape.
| | 03:43 | So let's go ahead and get a better look
at this by looking at it in the 3D View.
| | 03:48 | We can zoom in, we can already see this
wall looks right. And if we hold down the Shift
| | 03:53 | key and then the wheel on the mouse, we can
spin it around, maybe zoom in and out just
| | 03:58 | so we can see that a little bit better. And now we
can see that shape at that corner of the building.
| | 04:04 | So in recap, remember if we need to change
the shape of a wall, then we need to edit its
| | 04:09 | profile, making sure that it's one continuous
line if you follow it around from start to finish.
| | 04:16 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. FoundationsCreating and customizing footings| 00:00 | Footings are used to distribute the weight
of the building above, so that the ground
| | 00:04 | can hold up that much weight in one spot.
| | 00:06 | Our out-of-the-box Footings of Revit have
certain default dimensions which can be modified,
| | 00:11 | and we will need to do that for this project.
| | 00:14 | So to create a custom Footing for our project,
we need to begin by executing the Footing
| | 00:18 | tool which oddly enough happens to
be called Wall up here on our ribbon.
| | 00:25 | So, above Foundation it says,
Wall, and go and select on that.
| | 00:30 | When we do that, we can come over here
underneath properties and select our Type Selector list.
| | 00:35 | And when we click on that, we can see that
there's currently two separate Footings that
| | 00:39 | are available in here.
| | 00:40 | One is called a Bearing Footing
and the other is a Retaining Footing.
| | 00:44 | The general shape is a little bit different
and the dimensions are a little bit different.
| | 00:48 | In order to create a new Footing that's going
to be good for our project, what we are going
| | 00:52 | to do is we are going to base it
off of this Bearing Footing 36 x 12.
| | 00:57 | So make sure that that is selected
and then come down here to Edit Type.
| | 01:00 | When you select on Edit Type, the next thing
we will want to do is come over here to this
| | 01:05 | big button that says Duplicate, and we're
going to create a duplicate of this Footing.
| | 01:10 | Now the reason what we want to do this and
we don't want to actually delete this 36 x
| | 01:14 | 12 that's already in there. Who knows, we
might decide to use it later on in the project.
| | 01:19 | But in this case, we want to use its
properties and just modify them a little bit.
| | 01:24 | So it's going to be a 42" x 24" Footing.
| | 01:28 | So we're going to click on Duplicate, the
name of course isgoing to be 42" x 24", which
| | 01:35 | is size we want. We'll also get rid of this
little extra 2 that shows up at the end. Click on OK.
| | 01:44 | Next, these are the properties of the dimensions of
this Footing; and once again we want it to be 42" x 24".
| | 01:52 | So you can just type in 42" here.
It will automatically convert it to feet and
| | 01:59 | inches. For the Foundation Thickness this
is going to be 24", a nice big footing.
| | 02:05 | And we'll come down here just click on OK.
| | 02:09 | We'll now notice that underneath Properties
over here, we have our 42" x 24" footing,
| | 02:14 | and we would be ready
to place into our project.
| | 02:17 | So, by duplicating and modifying the
dimensions of an existing footing, we can adjust its
| | 02:22 | size to meet most of our needs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing footings| 00:00 | FootingS support the weight of the structure
up above, and in this case we want to support
| | 00:04 | the weight of our Foundation Wall, which is
going around the perimeter of our structure.
| | 00:09 | In order to do this, we can either do it
inside of the plan view like we are currently in,
| | 00:12 | or in a view that I prefer, which is the 3D view.
| | 00:16 | So let's go ahead and go in to 3D view and
try to place them inside of that type of view.
| | 00:21 | So, up here click on the little house, and
this brings into our 3D view of our structure.
| | 00:28 | Now, if we are going to be placing a footing,
I usually like to zoom in just a little bit
| | 00:32 | so we can see our entire foundation inside
of the screen, and we can see the edges of
| | 00:37 | our foundation walls.
| | 00:39 | Next, we have the underneath Structure.
| | 00:41 | It says Foundation, and
we're going to select Wall.
| | 00:45 | This is going to execute our footing tools.
| | 00:48 | We can see over here that we have a 36" x 12",
that's not the size that we want; we want
| | 00:53 | to use our 42" x 24" Bearing Footing.
| | 00:58 | Once you do that, all you have to
do is move arrow your over here,
| | 01:02 | select on the wall, click, and it will
automatically put a footing on the underneath side of this wall.
| | 01:08 | And let's go ahead and do
that for each of these walls.
| | 01:13 | And we can see how it's placed them
underneath the walls, and it's automatically cleaned up
| | 01:17 | on themselves here at the corners.
| | 01:21 | So, footings can be installed at Foundation
Walls quickly, particularly if we select them
| | 01:26 | inside of 3D views.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding piers and pilasters to a foundation| 00:00 | In this exercise we'll introduce how to
add our footings and peers under our columns.
| | 00:05 | Of course, their job is to transfer the
weight of the building above into the ground, which
| | 00:09 | will help keep the building structurally sound.
| | 00:11 | To begin this process, let's use our skills
that we developed when creating our footings
| | 00:15 | to create some of our own custom peers and
footings that we'll place under these objects in our model.
| | 00:22 | To begin by doing this, we need to come up
here on the Structure tab on the Ribbon; next,
| | 00:28 | we'll move over here, and we can see that
there is this option for isolated. And that's
| | 00:32 | going to be the kind that we create; it's going
to be considered an isolated peer or an isolated
| | 00:36 | footing. So we'll select on isolated.
| | 00:40 | Next, over here on the left-
hand side we have a 72" x 48" x 18".
| | 00:46 | Now the 72" x 48" x 18" isn't quite the size
we're going to be needing in this project,
| | 00:51 | so we're going to need to duplicate it and
then add a few more sizes to it so that we
| | 00:57 | can place those into our model.
| | 00:59 | So to begin with, we're going to come down
here to Edit Type and click on Edit Type.
| | 01:03 | Next, we really need to create three separate
footings for what we're getting ready to do.
| | 01:09 | So in order to do this we'll start off by
duplicating, creating a new footing, and then
| | 01:14 | we're going to do that two more times.
| | 01:16 | So, come up here to Duplicate, select on that,
and the first one we need to do is 48"
| | 01:22 | x 48" x 18', so very deep
looking footing, which is going to actually act as
| | 01:30 | one of our peers to hold up the column up above.
| | 01:34 | So, we'll start off by renaming this
to be 48" x 48" x 18', and click on OK.
| | 01:42 | Now, the width is already okay, that's 4 feet--
or actually this should be 48", so I'll
| | 01:47 | have to rename that here in a second--and we'll
go ahead and change this to be 4', change
| | 01:53 | this to be 4' and this is going to be
18'. So I'll go ahead and put feet on
| | 01:58 | that. Up here there is still an option to
rename it, so I don't have to duplicate it
| | 02:03 | in order to create a new one.
| | 02:05 | Since I need to change this to be 48"
x 48", I could just come over here,
| | 02:11 | click Rename, change this to be inches,
change this to be inches and click on OK. And we
| | 02:18 | can see that it renamed it. And we have
the appropriate dimensions down here.
| | 02:23 | Now let's go ahead and do two more duplicates.
| | 02:26 | This next one is going to be 48" x 48" x 15',
and we're going to go ahead
| | 02:32 | and type-in 15' right here. And the next
one it's going to need to be quite a bit smaller.
| | 02:38 | It's going to be 72" x 72" x 24".
So we'll duplicate it. We'll do 72"
| | 02:46 | x 72" x 24".
| | 02:53 | And we'll go ahead and type the 72" in,
which we can now see a 6 feet; we'll make
| | 03:01 | sure that that's 6' and we'll
do the 24" for right here.
| | 03:09 | Once we have that, we can already see that if
I move my cursor around, we have this little
| | 03:13 | footings this is just sort of
falling it around no matter where I go.
| | 03:17 | Now technically I could start placing it here,
but I sometimes have mixed results placing
| | 03:21 | these inside of a 3D view,. So I usually
recommend in this case with this type of footing,
| | 03:26 | doing it inside of one of our Plan views.
| | 03:29 | In this case, I'm going to go to the 1 - First
Floor and I'm going to double-click on that.
| | 03:34 | Next, we need to put these footings right in
some of these different locations, so we're
| | 03:39 | going to do footings around here, and then
we're going to do some footings here in the middle.
| | 03:45 | The first one that we need to do is going to
be down here in the lower left-hand corner.
| | 03:51 | so Foundation>Isolated, and we're going to
choose the appropriate size off of the list.
| | 03:58 | Now, since we're on the first floor and
this one needs to go down further because this
| | 04:03 | corner of the building is a little bit
deeper than the other parts of the building.
| | 04:07 | We're going to come over here to the 48"
x 48" x 18', and we're going to
| | 04:13 | come right over here until we hit the
intersection of them, and we're just going to click. And
| | 04:18 | then by default it'll try to drop these
footings down to be at the right elevation level. And
| | 04:24 | we'll continue to do this on around; except
in all the other locations we don't need the
| | 04:28 | 18' we're just going to need the 15'
deep one all the way around the perimeter here.
| | 04:36 | So it's just a matter of clicking each place
where these columns happened to be located at.
| | 04:43 | Once we've done that we can come back in and
start to put our different peer footings on
| | 04:48 | the underneath side of these areas as well.
| | 04:55 | Now that we've gotten to this point, let's
go ahead and change this over to be the top
| | 04:59 | of footing, so it's 0 - T.O.
Footing. And now we need to add our main footings on
| | 05:04 | the underneath side of these peers.
| | 05:07 | So in order to be able to that, we once
again need to come up here to Isolated, and we're
| | 05:12 | going to pick that smaller footing that we
did earlier--in this case is 72" x 72" x 24".
| | 05:19 | We'll come over here, and once again we're
just going to start picking the intersections
| | 05:22 | of these different spots.
| | 05:25 | Now that we're almost all the way around, we
can come over here and we can select right here.
| | 05:30 | Now, I can tell you since this one is a
little bit lower than the rest of them, it's going
| | 05:34 | to create an interesting condition
when we look at this in a 3D view.
| | 05:38 | So go ahead and hit Esc after you've
placed them in all the different locations, and then
| | 05:42 | come up here to this default 3D view
button and we'll take a look at what we have.
| | 05:46 | We can see that we have the peers
and the footings in every location.
| | 05:53 | The only problem is that this one is a
little bit high, so in order to be able to modify
| | 05:57 | it so it matches the properties of these down here,
all we have to do is select on this particular footing.
| | 06:04 | Next, we tell it it needs to be offset a
certain distance down. But when we created
| | 06:10 | these walls we dropped this wall down 3 feet--
that's the reason why this is still floating
| | 06:14 | up your 3 foot higher--so what we need to
do is we need to set a offset distance of
| | 06:20 | -3 foot and then click on Apply. And you'll
see it automatically drop down and clean up
| | 06:26 | on itself with the other footings that are
down there at the base of the foundation wall.
| | 06:32 | So placing these items as simple as creating a
footing of the appropriate size then selecting
| | 06:37 | the column you want to put it under.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a concrete slab or floor| 00:00 | In this exercise we'll use our Drawing Tools to
create a concrete slab, or floor, at the first level.
| | 00:07 | So in order to do this, once again we need
to be underneath Structure, and then come over
| | 00:12 | here. We are going to need to find our
Slab tool. And we can find that over Foundation
| | 00:16 | right here, and we are just going to
select a Structural Foundation Slab.
| | 00:22 | Next, once that activates we can come over here,
and we can see that we have different thicknesses
| | 00:28 | of slab that we can use.
| | 00:30 | For this example, I am just going to keep
it with the default. I'm just going to use
| | 00:33 | a 6 inch Foundation Slab.
| | 00:36 | Next we need to draw out the perimeter of
our slab, or our concrete floor that is going
| | 00:40 | to be inside of this area.
| | 00:41 | So in order to do that we can come over here
and we have a choice: we can either use one
| | 00:47 | of our different Drawing Tools--such as just
draw lines, or draw a rectangular shape--but
| | 00:53 | the thing I usually like to do is use the
Pick Walls tool if that's available to me.
| | 00:57 | So, I'll go ahead and
select on the Pick Walls Tool.
| | 00:59 | Next, I am going to zoom in just a little
bit so I can see where I am picking, and I
| | 01:04 | am going to try to pick on
the inside face to the wall.
| | 01:08 | If you pick toward the outside, it will draw
this to the outside of the wall; but in this
| | 01:13 | case we just want it to be on
the inside of our foundation wall.
| | 01:15 | So just pick a spot right on the
inside face of that wall, and click.
| | 01:20 | You'll kind of be able to see if it's there
because you'll see that purpl/pink line right
| | 01:23 | there on the inside face to the wall.
| | 01:26 | Now go ahead and let's just do this
for all four sides of this.
| | 01:31 | So now we have this rectangular shape.
| | 01:33 | Next, all we've to do is come up here to the big
green checkmark, and select on the big green checkmark.
| | 01:40 | It's going to ask us a
couple of different questions now.
| | 01:43 | The first one is, would you like the walls that go
up to this floor's level to attach to its bottom?
| | 01:48 | Now, from time to time you might say yes to
this, and what it would do is if there is any
| | 01:53 | wall that are going to be directly
underneath this floor that we just created, then those
| | 01:58 | walls will be flush with
the bottom of the floor.
| | 02:02 | And in this case, I
don't really want to do that.
| | 02:04 | So I am just going to head and say No to this.
| | 02:07 | This next once says, The floor/roof overlaps
the highlighted walls--and it's really talking
| | 02:13 | about these blue lines we're
seeing around the outside here.
| | 02:16 | Would you like to join the geometry and
cut the overlapping volume out of the walls?
| | 02:20 | In this case, it might be a little bit questionable
as to whether or not we should or should not do this.
| | 02:25 | But so that you can see it, we are
going to go ahead and say Yes to this.
| | 02:31 | Now, right off hand it doesn't look like very much
has happened, but something pretty big actually has.
| | 02:37 | If we take a look at this in the 3D View now
by coming up here to our Default 3D View icon,
| | 02:42 | we can now see that, yes indeed, we have this
floor and it's put in place right here at our Level 1.
| | 02:49 | It's also sitting on the inside
where our Foundation Walls are at.
| | 02:52 | If it's a little bit hard to see, we can
always come down to our Visual Styles and we can
| | 02:56 | turn on Shaded which is going to give us a
little bit of color, and we can see where this goes.
| | 03:02 | One other thing to know is that one of those
questions we answered Yes to, which was cut
| | 03:06 | the material out of it. But when it says,
do you want to cut the material out, what
| | 03:10 | it's really going to do is this.
| | 03:11 | If we come down here to where this color
box is, where we change the Graphic Display
| | 03:16 | Options, turn this to Wireframe now.
| | 03:19 | Now we can see through it, and we can see
what it's really done. It has actually cut the
| | 03:24 | material out of each of these--I'll call
them the Column Locations or Pier locations--
| | 03:28 | and in fact, it's even cut the material
out right here, sort of lowering it down.
| | 03:34 | So we now have everything actually sitting
on top of our concrete floor or concrete slab
| | 03:39 | that we just put into place.
| | 03:42 | You'll find that slabs and floors are very
similar elements, but slabs are entities that
| | 03:46 | are designed to be on grade--which means on
the earth, and are often load bearing entities.
| | 03:52 | Thus they have structural properties and
can be used by structural analysis software in
| | 03:56 | analyzing buildings and their loads.
| | 03:59 | So that's kind of the difference between
using a Floor tool and using the Slab tool.
| | 04:04 | In this exercise, we used it more as a
floating slab, which means it doesn't really hold up
| | 04:08 | any weight, just to illustrate how it can be drawn.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Structural ReinforcementSetting the cover depth| 00:00 | In this section of movies we're going
to discuss Structural Reinforcement.
| | 00:04 | Traditionally, to reinforce a concrete wall or
slab, rebar is placed inside of it at a certain depth.
| | 00:11 | Adjusting this depth is
considered setting the cover depth.
| | 00:14 | To do this inside of Revit, we need to use
the Cover command which once again shows up
| | 00:19 | underneath Structure and Cover.
| | 00:21 | Unfortunately, it's kind of difficult for us
to be able to do this inside of a Plan view,
| | 00:25 | so we are going to need to create a little
section going through our building here, and
| | 00:29 | then from there we can set the cover depth.
| | 00:31 | So we'll go ahead and we'll come up
here to the View tab and select on View.
| | 00:35 | Next, there is this little option here that
says Section; just click on that, move down
| | 00:40 | here to the bottom of the screen, click
right in this area here between B and C.
| | 00:48 | Move over to the side and click again.
| | 00:51 | We'll be talking more about Sections and how
to go about creating them later on, but for
| | 00:55 | right now let's go ahead and zoom in here.
| | 00:57 | So to click off of the section, and
then click here where the circle is at.
| | 01:03 | If you double-click really fast on that
it should take you to the Section view.
| | 01:07 | If you have any problems with that taking
you to the Section view, you can always look
| | 01:11 | over here on the Project Browser, scroll down,
and you'll find Sections is a new area.
| | 01:16 | You can click on the little + sign
there, and you'll find your Section View, and
| | 01:20 | you can just double-click on that in
order to be able to get to this view.
| | 01:24 | Now once you're here you can zoom in and we
want to see what the existing cover--which
| | 01:29 | is what it's called in
this case--depth, already is.
| | 01:33 | So we'll come over here to the Structure tab,
move over here to Cover, and we'll select on Cover.
| | 01:39 | You'll probably notice there are some green
dashed lines just show up--a little bit hard
| | 01:44 | to see, so we'll zoom in here a little bit more.
| | 01:47 | This is the Cover that was in there by default for
these objects that we're currently cutting through.
| | 01:52 | If you need to be able adjust this cover depth
so that things like our rebar will automatically
| | 01:57 | get placed a little bit
lower or a little bit higher,
| | 02:00 | we can absolutely do that
by using this Cover command.
| | 02:03 | Now there are two different sections of
using the Cover command, and the first one here is
| | 02:08 | the Pick Elements tool.
| | 02:09 | Now if we Pick Elements, you can see we can
either pick on the wall or we can pick on the footing.
| | 02:15 | If we pick on the footing, it highlights the
footing, and then we have some Cover Setting
| | 02:20 | that shows up here. Well we can click on
the Down Arrow and here we see some predefined
| | 02:26 | settings that we can use that's
going to affect the entire object.
| | 02:31 | For instance, if we use this Cast against
earth 3" and select, you can start to
| | 02:36 | see some of these green dashed lines have now
sort of contracted themselves, and they are
| | 02:41 | now 3 inches away from the
outside edge of this concrete footing.
| | 02:46 | If we would change this to be something else--
perhaps 2"--see how those green dashed
| | 02:52 | lines are now moved a little bit closer to
the outside edge? That's because they are
| | 02:56 | now 2" away from the
outside edge of the footing.
| | 03:00 | And we can set this to be anything we want
it to be. I am just going to go head and move
| | 03:04 | this back to 3" just for now.
| | 03:07 | Now, the other thing that we could have done was
pick this tool right here, which is Pick Faces.
| | 03:12 | So, I'll go ahead and do that next, and in
order to do that though, we are going to go
| | 03:15 | ahead and hit Esc just once.
| | 03:17 | Next, we can go ahead and come back up here to
Cover, and you notice this is no longer grayed out.
| | 03:23 | Once you have kind of one of these commands,
you sometimes have to get out of it again
| | 03:26 | in order to be able to
activate it to be able to use it.
| | 03:29 | So we'll select on Pick Faces.
| | 03:31 | I am just going to pick on one of the
individual lines here that's going around the outside
| | 03:36 | edge, perhaps this one.
| | 03:39 | Now this is the bottom of the footing that
we are looking at. And instead of where we
| | 03:44 | use this one and it picked the entire thing
and set these properties for the entire thing,
| | 03:49 | this is just going to set the
properties for the one line that we selected.
| | 03:54 | So we can take a look at this, this is 3". what
if we want to make this be perhaps 2" instead.
| | 04:01 | You can see just the bottom has now
dropped down to that 2" mark, or we could set
| | 04:06 | it back up to the 3 inch mark if we wanted to.
| | 04:10 | Also, if one of sizes that you want to be
able to do, doesn't show up on this pull-down
| | 04:14 | list, you can create your own custom sizes
by clicking on this little box here with the
| | 04:18 | three little dots in it.
| | 04:20 | And you can always either adjust these settings,
or click Add, which is going to add a new column
| | 04:26 | there, which you can type in anything that you
want as well as put in any depth that you would want.
| | 04:33 | You could click on OK, and then when it comes
time to be able to use these commands again,
| | 04:39 | you'll notice that that's now on the list.
| | 04:42 | In this case, if I select on the 4",
you can see it's now moving in 4", and
| | 04:47 | we can once again select up here where it
has a 3" and it will move itself back.
| | 04:52 | So in summary, setting the cover depth allows
us to control the placement location of where
| | 04:57 | our Structural rebar will
eventually be inside of this concrete object.
| | 05:02 | In summary, setting the cover depth allows
us to control the placement location of the
| | 05:06 | structural reinforcement, which
we'll be placing within the concrete.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing rebar| 00:00 | Rebar is used to reinforce our structures
and Revit Structure is capable placing of
| | 00:05 | both two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally.
| | 00:08 | For this discussion, let's look at
how to place it three-dimensionally.
| | 00:12 | To execute the Rebar command, we first need
to come up here to Structure, and then find
| | 00:17 | Rebar on the ribbon. It's toward the middle;
it's right here. And we'll go ahead and select on Rebar.
| | 00:23 | Next, we can see that there's a few options
associated with rebar, such as what shape do we want to use?
| | 00:30 | Now, these shapes correspond with the same shapes
that show up over here in the Rebar Shape Browser.
| | 00:37 | If we would make a Selection over here,
it'll automatically update over here.
| | 00:40 | In fact, you can actually see that shape that
we are getting ready to place in three different
| | 00:45 | locations because it will show up
underneath the Properties as well.
| | 00:48 | Now, actually before we get too far, it's
going to be difficult to place rebar inside
| | 00:53 | of Plan view like we are looking at right now.
| | 00:56 | So we really actually should go to a Section
view, and then execute the command. So, we'll
| | 01:01 | go ahead and hit Esc, and then we'll move in
here in to our Section, and then just double-click
| | 01:06 | where you see the circular shape.
And it should take you to this view.
| | 01:11 | If you have problems with the little double-
click, you can always look underneath the Project
| | 01:15 | Browser. Come down here underneath
Sections, and then just double-click on Section 1.
| | 01:21 | Next, we're going to zoom down here to where
we end having our footing down here and down
| | 01:26 | below. And one of the things we are going
to want to do is we are going to want to put
| | 01:30 | some rebar that's going to
go from here to here to here.
| | 01:34 | So it's going to actually be three pieces
of rebar that are going to be going across
| | 01:37 | the bottom of this Footing.
| | 01:39 | Now this rebar is actually three-dimensional.
| | 01:42 | So when we go to place it, it's going look
two-dimensional, but in reality it's going
| | 01:46 | to stretch whatever the length
of this footing currently is.
| | 01:50 | So let's go ahead and do that.
| | 01:52 | So we will execute the rebar command once
again underneath the structure. Next, we need
| | 01:57 | to decide, what shape of
rebar do we want to place?
| | 02:01 | Now, in order to be able to do that, we can
look over here underneath the Rebar Shape
| | 02:04 | Browser, and in this case let's just pick
Rebar Shape 0.0. Essentially it's just a straight
| | 02:11 | bar. It hasn't been bent or anything.
| | 02:14 | So once you have selected on that, we will
come over here and our next option is,
| | 02:18 | what Size of rebar do we want to place.
| | 02:21 | For this instance, we are
going to use rebar number 8.
| | 02:23 | Now, if you are not very familiar with rebar,
the smaller the number, the smaller in diameter
| | 02:30 | the Rebar happens to be.
Number 8 is sort of a midsize rebar.
| | 02:34 | Now that we have picked number 8, the next
thing we want to do is move down here, and
| | 02:39 | we can start to see this black line that's
falling around wherever our cursor is going.
| | 02:44 | Now, that's controlled by this work
plane placement, which is located up here.
| | 02:50 | Now let's go ahead and select on this Perpendicular to
Cover and move down. Now we can see where the rebar is at.
| | 02:58 | Now, this green dash line, this is the
existing cover and if we ever went to Structure and
| | 03:04 | Cover, that's what we are looking at.
| | 03:05 | So I am just going to select back on Modify
Place Rebar, and you can see that that rebar
| | 03:11 | does not want to go
outside of the Cover location.
| | 03:15 | So, we'll just go ahead and place it right
to the outside edge of this cover here, right
| | 03:19 | to the outside edge of the cover here; and
then there's really not a Snap tool for this,
| | 03:23 | so we are just going to have to eyeball it.
And we are just going to place this rebar
| | 03:26 | roughly right here in the middle.
| | 03:28 | Now we have three pieces of rebar and they
are actually three-dimensional and they are
| | 03:31 | going back as far as with this foundation wall,
or in this case this footing, happens to be drawn.
| | 03:37 | We'll take a look at that here in just a
moment, but I would like to go ahead and add in yet
| | 03:41 | another piece of rebar into the structure.
| | 03:44 | Now, I'm going to go ahead and zoom back out,
and that actual rebar, I am going to start
| | 03:48 | off by placing it up here inside of the foundation
wall. And we'll go ahead and just hit Esc to that.
| | 03:55 | We will once again execute the Rebar command.
| | 03:59 | In this case, rebar number 8 is still good,
and the shape that we wanted to use in this
| | 04:04 | case is going to be called 17 A.
| | 04:05 | And you notice that we can just come
near the pulldown list, go to Shape 17 A.
| | 04:11 | These are all just standard rebar
shapes that you can purchase and buy.
| | 04:16 | Take a look over here and here we have the 17 A.
| | 04:19 | So it's going to be sort of an L-shaped rebar.
| | 04:21 | Next, I am just going to move over here;
and then once we get inside of this wall, all
| | 04:27 | I am seeing is just one single little dot.
That's not what I want to see; I
| | 04:31 | want to see this L-shape.
| | 04:33 | So let's come up here and
let's try Parallel to Cover.
| | 04:36 | How about Parallel to Work Plane.
| | 04:40 | Sometimes it gets a little bit confusing as
far as which direction this is going to try
| | 04:43 | to spin itself around.
| | 04:45 | So, I know that I've been
known to just click on one and go,
| | 04:48 | 'No, it doesn't look right' and just
click on the Parallel to Work Plane in order to
| | 04:52 | be able to get it to work, or
whichever one to get it to work.
| | 04:54 | So now I am going to move my mouse over here,
and we want to make this to be sort of like
| | 04:58 | a J or reverse L-Shape.
| | 05:01 | So once you move it and you can see this outline,
go ahead and click on the inside of wall and
| | 05:06 | now it's placed this rebar inside of the wall.
| | 05:09 | One other thing to know is if I select on this
rebar, there's this option up here that's says Layout.
| | 05:16 | Now technically, this was here even
when we were getting ready to place it.
| | 05:18 | I just didn't change the
original settings on it.
| | 05:21 | Right now, it's just a single piece of rebar.
| | 05:24 | Let's go ahead and change this, so
that it happens be a maximum spacing.
| | 05:29 | So we'll select on Maximum Spacing. The
spacing between each of the Rebar is going need to
| | 05:33 | be 4" and that's already set.
| | 05:36 | So if for some reason it's a different
setting for you, just change that to be 4".
| | 05:40 | And what this is going to do is that we
can already see this says Quantity 223.
| | 05:44 | So it's going to place this rebar over the
length of the wall and right now, there's
| | 05:49 | going to be 223 pieces of rebar stretching
from one end of the wall to the other, based
| | 05:55 | on the section that we just placed it in.
| | 05:57 | Now, if we want to be able to make a
modification to this, so that it isn't just inside of the
| | 06:01 | wall--perhaps you want to bring it down, so
it's inside of the footing--we can do that.
| | 06:06 | All we have to do is select on these
double arrows that show up, drag it down, and
| | 06:10 | drag it down so it's just above this piece
of rebar right here. And then you can even
| | 06:14 | click on little grip here and pull it out.
| | 06:19 | Now let's go ahead and take a look at this
in the 3D view, so we have a better idea of
| | 06:22 | what it is that we have placed.
| | 06:25 | So we'll come up here to the little house,
which is the 3D view button. Next, we will
| | 06:30 | want to spin this around, which can you
either do by selecting on the Shift key and then
| | 06:34 | holding down the wheel, and then spinning it around.
Or, another option is just to click on a little
| | 06:40 | corner up here at the view cube, and you can see
them here at the very edge of the cube. Spin it around.
| | 06:47 | We can start to zoom in.
| | 06:50 | Now, it's partially getting hidden;
sometimes because it's so close to the surface, Revit
| | 06:54 | will try to display that bar. But in order
to be able to really see it, all we have to
| | 06:58 | do is come down here, and at the Visual
Style change this to be a Wireframe view.
| | 07:03 | Now, we can see how it spaced it from
here all way down to the end of the wall.
| | 07:10 | Now, this can be adjusted and edited, which
we will have the opportunity to talk about
| | 07:15 | in the future video.
| | 07:16 | That being said, whenever we place rebar,
we always need to consider what its size is,
| | 07:22 | what its shape is, and the location of placement.
| | 07:25 | You pretty much always needs to be inside of a
Section view as well in order of able to do it.
| | 07:30 | But once we have the proper information set--
as well as the proper Cover Depth so we know
| | 07:35 | how far away from the outside edge of the
wall it needs to be--we can easily drop the
| | 07:40 | rebar into our design.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing rebar| 00:00 | Once the rebar is already placed you can
still go back and modify its placement, or modify
| | 00:05 | the way it displays.
| | 00:07 | Now, currently I'm inside of a Section view,
and in this case it happens to be Section
| | 00:12 | #1, and we can go ahead and zoom in here.
| | 00:15 | What we're seeing here is this is a piece of
rebar; and these are three individual pieces
| | 00:20 | of rebar. And they're currently stretching
the length of this entire either footing or
| | 00:25 | wall, depending on what it
is that it's going through.
| | 00:28 | What we can do is if we want to change the
way it displays so that we can see the thickness
| | 00:33 | of the rebar, we can come down
here to where it has the Detail Level.
| | 00:37 | Currently, it's set at a Coarse level of detail.
And whenever you have rebar in a Coarse Level
| | 00:42 | of Detail, it always
displays being just line work.
| | 00:45 | If we change it and say, this should be a
Fine Level of Detail, we can now see this rebar
| | 00:51 | is nice and three-dimensional.
| | 00:53 | Now technically this is as well, the only
thing is that we were already kind of looking
| | 00:57 | at it straight on and it was just sort of
a dark donut, and that just didn't change in
| | 01:02 | this particular display.
| | 01:04 | It is now a solid donut as
opposed to just some thick line work.
| | 01:08 | The next thing that we can do is I can
zoom out just a little bit, and I want to point
| | 01:12 | out that even though this was already put
in place, and the shape has already have been
| | 01:16 | set; if we wanted to
change the shape of it, we can.
| | 01:19 | And in order to that we can just come over
here to Shape, either underneath Properties
| | 01:24 | or up here on the Options bar, and then
change it to be perhaps a different shape.
| | 01:29 | Maybe you want it to be this 01 Shape.
| | 01:33 | Now we'll go ahead and just move your mouse
over and here we'll click on Apply, and you
| | 01:36 | can see it's automatically trying to take on the
shape that's associated with that 01 piece of rebar.
| | 01:43 | Now, if we wanted to change
it back to that 17A, we can.
| | 01:47 | We just move up here, click on 17A, and we
watch it sort of bounce its way back up again.
| | 01:53 | Now, one thing that you notice has just
happened is that it doesn't automatically take on the
| | 01:57 | properties it had before. You still might
need to stretch and adjust and move it after
| | 02:02 | you've made that shape change,
if you ever need to do that.
| | 02:05 | And that's still easy enough to do.
| | 02:06 | You can just click on the grip and then just
pull it back, or pull it forward by just holding
| | 02:12 | your mouse button down on
that little circular shape.
| | 02:16 | Also, if we need to be able to bring this up,
we can select a little circle and bring it
| | 02:21 | up to well right about there.
| | 02:25 | So now we've been able to adjust the shape
and be able to make some of these adjustments
| | 02:30 | right here inside of the Section View.
| | 02:31 | Now let's go ahead and
take a look at this in 3D.
| | 02:34 | So come up here to the little 3D house,
select on the 3D house. We'll zoom in here.
| | 02:41 | Now I'm going to rotate this around by
just holding down the Shift key on my keyboard
| | 02:45 | and the wheel on the mouse, and
then I'm going to zoom in here.
| | 02:51 | And perhaps I don't want this to stretch
this entire length of the wall, maybe I want to
| | 02:54 | actually come in between, and I'll just
call these two piers or these two columns.
| | 02:59 | So if I want to do that, I can move over
here and I'm just going to click right here on
| | 03:03 | this face of the view cube.
| | 03:04 | And that will automatically spin us around to be
looking at this building from that elevation view.
| | 03:11 | Next, I'm going to zoom in here
and then just select on that rebar.
| | 03:17 | Now it gets to be pretty easy.
| | 03:18 | We can just click on the little arrows and
we can pull this back and we can move this
| | 03:23 | to wherever it is we want
to be able to move this to.
| | 03:27 | Now it's still staying contained within the
wall, but we just have the adjustment ability
| | 03:31 | to be able to say, it needs to be
between this location and this location.
| | 03:36 | Whenever it's all set and done, we can just
sort of click off of it, and if we want to
| | 03:40 | view this once again in a true three-
dimensional view--technically we already are, but we're
| | 03:45 | looking at it face on.
| | 03:46 | So we'll just click one of the corners of
the view cube here, let the model automatically
| | 03:51 | regenerate itself, and then we can zoom in and we
can now see it's adjusted itself three-dimensionally.
| | 03:58 | So now it's in between those two
piers that we wanted to bring it between.
| | 04:02 | So all we have to remember is that modifying
the properties, or the placement of rebar after
| | 04:07 | it's been placed, is fairly easy to accomplish.
| | 04:11 | All we need to do is either be in a Section
view or be in a 3D view and then we can adjust
| | 04:16 | its properties appropriately.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding reinforcement to an entire area| 00:00 | To reinforce concrete walls, rebar is
usually added inside of those walls.
| | 00:05 | The Area Reinforcement command allows for entire
areas to have that reinforcement added at once.
| | 00:11 | In this example, we'll add that
reinforcement to part of a foundation wall.
| | 00:16 | To do this, we'll go to the West
Elevation, and reinforce that portion of the wall.
| | 00:21 | So, underneath the Project Browser, we're going
to move down and we're going to find our West
| | 00:26 | Elevation, and just double-click on that.
| | 00:30 | Next, we'll go ahead and zoom in on that area,
and let's just reinforce this middle portion
| | 00:35 | of the foundation wall.
| | 00:37 | Now realistically the entire wall is
probably going to get this reinforcement, but this
| | 00:41 | is just a little bit of the overall process.
| | 00:44 | So, we'll go ahead and zoom in here, and
we're going to place that reinforcement between
| | 00:50 | these two columns right here.
| | 00:53 | So to begin with, we'll move up to Structure
and we're going to look for Area Reinforcement.
| | 00:59 | So select on the word Area.
| | 01:01 | Next, it's going to ask us for the floor
or wall to add this area reinforcement to.
| | 01:09 | In this case it's going to be a wall, so
move up to the very top of this wall and select
| | 01:13 | on the top of the wall.
| | 01:15 | Now I will say that if you move your mouse
down toward the middle of the wall, you notice
| | 01:19 | it isn't highlighting--and you can try to
click there all day, it won't select the wall.
| | 01:23 | It's always easier to select something in
Revit by coming up to one of the edges of
| | 01:27 | it in order to be able to make that selection.
| | 01:30 | So go ahead and select on the wall;
everything sort of gray itself out, but it just means
| | 01:36 | that the Structural
Reinforcement command is now in effect.
| | 01:39 | So we can see over here it says
Structural Area Reinforcement.
| | 01:44 | And if we look at the Properties over here,
we can see that it's going to be doing what's
| | 01:48 | called a Maximum Spacing of however many
feet that we specify. In this case it's going to
| | 01:54 | be every foot we're going to have a
new piece of rebar put inside of our wall.
| | 01:59 | The size of that rebar
currently is going to be at #4.
| | 02:02 | If we decided to change that, we could just
pick a different size of rebar off of the list.
| | 02:07 | We can also say whether or not there's
going to be some sort of hook at the end of the
| | 02:11 | rebar so that'll curve up or however way that
we want that to be structurally put together.
| | 02:17 | And all of this is already contained inside of
the Properties of this Structural Reinforcement.
| | 02:22 | If you want to change any of it, you can
just come in here and change the Properties of
| | 02:27 | it and that's how it will show
when we place it into the wall.
| | 02:30 | So now we need to actually draw where in this wall
the Structural Reinforcement is going to show up.
| | 02:36 | So in order to be able to do this, usually
I just start using my drawing tools and draw
| | 02:40 | it in this location.
| | 02:42 | And we're going to do that; but before that,
I'd like to add an offset up here of perhaps
| | 02:48 | 3 inches, just so that we keep this rebar
away from the very top or the very bottom
| | 02:54 | or the very edges of our wall, so that it
has enough area to be able to be completely
| | 02:58 | covered by the concrete.
| | 03:00 | So once we type in 3" here, we're
going to move up here and this time we're going
| | 03:05 | to use a different tool; we're going to use
the Rectangle tool because it's really the
| | 03:09 | fastest tool for doing this.
| | 03:11 | So you select in a little rectangular shape up
here, move down, and then pick on the intersection
| | 03:16 | of the top of the wall and
the top of this pier or column.
| | 03:21 | Now move over in his direction.
| | 03:24 | One of the things you'll notice is when we
selected this and we're moving in this direction,
| | 03:27 | we're getting this colored line.
| | 03:29 | Unfortunately though, it's currently on the
outside of the wall, which isn't where we want
| | 03:33 | it to be; we want to be
offset three inches to the inside.
| | 03:36 | So in order to be able to that all you have
to do is click on the Spacebar, like you're
| | 03:40 | going to put a space between words.
| | 03:43 | Now you can see how it's flipped to the inside, and
now pick this other corner down here in the lower right.
| | 03:51 | Now where it's going to place this rebar is
going to be in between each of these lines.
| | 03:57 | Last thing before I click the big green
checkmark up here, is that we could have made this be
| | 04:00 | any shape with curves or arcs or circles, as
long as there was one continuous line going around.
| | 04:07 | Now just come up here to
the big green checkmark.
| | 04:09 | It's going to automatically give it a note
saying that these are #4 rebar spaced at 1'.
| | 04:16 | And, if we decide to take a look at it in a
Section View, we can come up here and just
| | 04:20 | double-click on the little section head here.
We can now zoom in and we can see how every
| | 04:27 | one foot there's a piece of rebar going in
this direction, a piece of rebar going in this
| | 04:31 | direction, and there's rebar coming up
here as well as rebar coming down here.
| | 04:37 | So it put the entire thing of rebar spaced
exactly the way it showed in the Properties
| | 04:43 | inside of our wall.
| | 04:45 | So, area reinforcement allows you to model
all your structural reinforcement in an area
| | 04:50 | simultaneously, without the need
to draw each bar individually.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding reinforcement on a path| 00:00 | Path reinforcement allows us to specify a
path which the structural members would follow,
| | 00:05 | and then auto-populate themselves.
| | 00:07 | In this example, we'll do this with a
rebar along the edge of our concrete slab.
| | 00:12 | So, in order to be able to do it, let's first
go to our First Floor Plan. Next, the reason
| | 00:19 | why we needed to go to the First Floor is because
technically, we can actually see our floor here.
| | 00:23 | I know it's a little bit hard to see here
in the image, but if we decided to come down
| | 00:27 | here, and then turn on our Shaded graphic
display style, we can then see this is where
| | 00:34 | the floor is located at.
| | 00:36 | Now let's go ahead and shut that back off
just for right now; I'm going to just turn
| | 00:39 | this into a Wireframe View, so that we
can easily see the rebar once it's created.
| | 00:43 | Now, we'll zoom in here, and we're going to
execute the Reinforcement Path command from
| | 00:49 | underneath the Structure tab.
| | 00:53 | Once you execute that command, it's going
to ask you to select on the floor that we
| | 00:57 | want to be able to place this in.
| | 00:59 | In fact, that message is just right down
here near where your Start Menu probably is at.
| | 01:05 | Now you can come up here and click.
| | 01:07 | It just selected the floor.
| | 01:08 | You can see it's all grayed out.
| | 01:11 | Now we have the Structural Path Reinforcement.
This happens to be all the properties associated
| | 01:17 | with this rebar is getting ready to be placed.
| | 01:20 | In this case, they happened to be size number 4.
| | 01:22 | It says what their length is going to be.
| | 01:24 | Is it going to be at the top face of the wall--
or at the top face of the floor in this case--
| | 01:28 | or at the bottom face of the floor?
| | 01:30 | And different properties associated with this
rebar, its shape, and what its length should be.
| | 01:36 | Now what it wants us to do is specify
what the length of this path needs to be.
| | 01:40 | So in order to do that, we can
come up here and just draw a line.
| | 01:43 | I will point out that technically, we could
also use this Pick Lines tool if we just had
| | 01:47 | a line already on the screen.
| | 01:49 | We could select that line and it
automatically draw the line for us.
| | 01:52 | But, in this case, we'll just draw it out.
| | 01:55 | So, just pick the line.
| | 01:56 | Let's come over here to the intersection
here, which is the edge of the slab, and now just
| | 02:01 | draw a line straight across
then pick the end point of the slab.
| | 02:07 | Once you've done that, that's pretty much
all that you need to do except to come up
| | 02:10 | here and select on the big green checkmark.
| | 02:13 | When you've done that, it will automatically
space that rebar out as well as give you the
| | 02:19 | note saying what the rebar
spacing is there inside the slab.
| | 02:22 | In fact, if we take a look at this in the
3D view now, we can move over here, sort of
| | 02:28 | spin the model around, and zoom in. And we
can see that spacing, as well as how it ends
| | 02:34 | up curving itself down and
around the edge of the slab.
| | 02:38 | So, Path Reinforcement automates the tedious
task of placing rebar at continuous spacing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Beams, Joists, and BracingsAdding beams| 00:00 | In this video we'll be
placing beams in Revit structure.
| | 00:03 | To draw these beams, we need to select
the Beam Tool while in any Model view.
| | 00:08 | In this case, we'll come into our Second
Floor view and then start to zoom in just a little
| | 00:14 | bit so that we can see where
each of our column locations are at.
| | 00:18 | Next, we're going to need to come up here
underneath the Structure tab and then select on Beam.
| | 00:25 | Now the kind of beam that we're going to need
to have in this case is going to be a W21x57.
| | 00:31 | So that it happens to be a
specific steel shape and size.
| | 00:35 | Now if we look here on our list, we can see that
all we have loaded in here are W8x10s through W16x26.
| | 00:42 | What that means is that none of them are quite large
enough for the kind of building that we're building.
| | 00:46 | So what we're going to need to do is come
in and actually load in another beam size.
| | 00:50 | So, up here there's this option for Load Family.
| | 00:53 | I'll go ahead and select on Load Family.
| | 00:56 | Next, this is going to be a structural beam
so we need to load for the word Structural.
| | 01:03 | Now there is no category here that just
says, beams. But what this is, is it's going to
| | 01:07 | be Structural Framing.
| | 01:10 | So go into there; there's
an option there for Steel.
| | 01:15 | Then down toward the very bottom, there is
a W-Wide Flange, and that's what we want.
| | 01:20 | So go ahead and highlight
on that and click on Open.
| | 01:24 | Once you do that it's going to bring up a
list of all of the different W-shapes that
| | 01:28 | we could load into our project.
| | 01:30 | In this case once again we want to do W21x57.
| | 01:35 | So we're just going to find that on the list by
scrolling down or clicking, and here we have our W21x57.
| | 01:47 | Now if you select on it in order to be
able to highlight that row, you can then click
| | 01:51 | on OK and that will load that into your project.
| | 01:55 | Now if you get this message that says
Family Already Exists, that's partially true.
| | 01:59 | What it really means is that there's
already a W family loaded into the project, do you
| | 02:05 | want to add that exercise to it?
| | 02:08 | And in this case, yes you do.
| | 02:10 | So just say Overwrite the existing version, and it
will go ahead and add that exercise into your project.
| | 02:16 | Now if we look here on the list we're going
to find a W21x57, the one we just loaded in.
| | 02:21 | So go ahead and select on that. Now if you
want to be able to draw these in, we
| | 02:26 | can do it individually first and that's
pretty easy just by zooming in, picking a point--
| | 02:31 | In this case it's intersection of A and 1--
and then picking another point over here.
| | 02:36 | And you notice that by default
it's coming as just a single line.
| | 02:40 | If we do this again, it'll show
up as just a single line again.
| | 02:44 | Now this is the way it's supposed
to display in this kind of view.
| | 02:48 | Now, when I say that it really means that this is
the way it's supposed to display in this Detail Level.
| | 02:54 | In this case, we have the
Detail Level being Coarse.
| | 02:56 | But if we change this to be a Detail Level
of being Fine, we can then see it having each
| | 03:02 | little layer of material,
each thickness showing up here.
| | 03:07 | So if we decide to draw another one, this
time we're going to see all of the lines and
| | 03:11 | the appropriate thickness, just like
if we were looking at it from above.
| | 03:16 | But one thing that we could do is we could
continue on drawing in between each of these--
| | 03:20 | sort of playing connected dots if we wanted to--
but there is a faster way to go about doing this.
| | 03:25 | The faster way is to move up here to
where it has On Grids, and select On Grids.
| | 03:31 | Next, move your mouse over here, sort of
between the five and the six, and then click and hold
| | 03:36 | your mouse button down.
| | 03:38 | And then just create a window going
around all of these different things.
| | 03:43 | Now what this is going to do is it's going
to select the structural grid, and it's going
| | 03:46 | to place this kind of beam
along the structural grid.
| | 03:50 | And all you have to do at this point is just
click on this big green checkmark here that
| | 03:53 | says Finish, and now we have those
beams in all of these different locations.
| | 04:00 | Now one beam that you may have gotten is
this one right here; we don't really want it.
| | 04:05 | So if you end up getting an extra beam
here or here, feel free to just escape out and
| | 04:09 | just select on the beam, and then hit the
Delete key on the keyboard. Or right-click and then
| | 04:16 | go down here to delete and say Delete.
| | 04:18 | And it will just get rid of the
extra beams that we don't need.
| | 04:24 | Now we can go ahead and take a look at this
in the 3D view so we have a better idea of
| | 04:26 | what it is that we've done so far.
| | 04:29 | So this is what
our condition currently is.
| | 04:34 | Now, the next thing we need to do is be able
to bring these exact same shapes and sizes
| | 04:38 | all the way on up to the top of our building.
| | 04:42 | So in order to be able to accomplish that,
we're going to go back to our Plan view--and
| | 04:45 | you can either do that by double-clicking here
on Second Floor or just closing this window down.
| | 04:50 | And if you move your mouse down here to near
where this D is at, don't actually click on
| | 04:55 | anything but just sort of click in Space,
hold your mouse button down and just window
| | 04:59 | around all of these
different entities that are here.
| | 05:03 | Let go off the button.
Everything will turn blue.
| | 05:06 | Now this is a little bit more than what
we really wanted to be able to select.
| | 05:10 | So we can come up here to
this thing that says a Filter.
| | 05:13 | It kind of looks like a funnel, and if you
click on the Filter, what we want to be able
| | 05:18 | to select here is that we're going
to select our Structural Framing.
| | 05:21 | So you can clear out Structural Columns because
they already exist, as well as just the regular
| | 05:26 | Columns--those are the
architectural columns--and we can click on OK.
| | 05:32 | Now the only thing are currently selected
are those different beams that we just placed.
| | 05:38 | Now that we've done that we can come up
here to the Copy command--and it's not this Copy
| | 05:43 | command--you have to pick this Copy
command, which is the Copy to Clipboard.
| | 05:49 | Once you've done that you can click on the
word Paste--and be sure to click on the word--
| | 05:53 | and select on Aligned to Selected Levels.
| | 05:58 | What this is going to allows us to do is
it's going to allow us to choose which levels we
| | 06:01 | want to have the structural
information brought up to.
| | 06:05 | In this case, we want it to be
brought up all the way up to the roof.
| | 06:08 | So just highlight everything from the Third
Floor down the Roof, and you can do that by
| | 06:12 | selecting on Third Floor, holding down your Shift
key and then picking on Roof. Next, click on OK.
| | 06:19 | Now it might take you a few seconds here,
but once it finishes processing feel free to
| | 06:24 | come up here to the 3D view and click on that.
| | 06:28 | And what you'll see is that this copied that up,
level by level, all the way up to the Roof Level.
| | 06:35 | So in conclusion, to place your perimeter
beams you just need to leverage the Beam tool up
| | 06:39 | here on the Ribbon, and select the grids or
points where you want to place your beams.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding beam systems| 00:00 | A beam system is a group of beam spaced
evenly, usually inside of a structural bay, and that
| | 00:06 | holds something up above.
| | 00:08 | To draw these beams, we need to execute the
Beam System command underneath the Structure
| | 00:13 | tab. So go ahead and select on Beam System.
| | 00:17 | Now for this particular building we're going to
need to adjust a few different properties here.
| | 00:22 | The first thing is, we want to
have beams of a certain size,
| | 00:25 | in order to be able to adjust the size of
the beams that are getting ready to be placed.
| | 00:30 | Here on the Options Bar, it says Beam Type.
Right now it says W21x57. I'm going to go
| | 00:36 | ahead and select on that, and the kind that
we want to place in here will be a W14x30,
| | 00:43 | so let's just look for that on the list
, find it, and then just select on that.
| | 00:48 | Now the Justification beam center is just
fine. What that means is how do we want these
| | 00:53 | to be spaced from the beginning: do you
want it to be centered in the bay, or do we want
| | 00:57 | it to be based at wherever the end of the
bay or the back of the bay is going to be at.
| | 01:02 | Center is just fine in this case, this is
the distance apart that each of the beams
| | 01:06 | need to be spaced, and in this case 6'
is what we want, so we can be fine with that.
| | 01:12 | But one thing that we do want to do though
is we're going to change this from being in
| | 01:15 | a fixed distance to be
what's called clear spacing.
| | 01:20 | So we're just going to try to space these
evenly inside of here; and you can see if
| | 01:23 | I move my mouse in here, you can start to see
some of dash lines showing up inside of the bay.
| | 01:28 | Now one thing that I did do--and this was
a mistake on my part--is I just typed in 6
| | 01:34 | and then I believe I actually put the inch
sign after it, because right now we've seen
| | 01:36 | it was based every 6 inches maybe, or
maybe that's what it was by default.
| | 01:40 | So what we're going to do, is we're going to
change this to be 6' instead of 6",
| | 01:44 | because that have been obviously
way too close. And then by moving the mouse
| | 01:49 | back down again, you can see that there are
dashed lines in there indicating where those
| | 01:53 | beams are going to get placed.
| | 01:55 | Also before I click in there, I'll go ahead
and point out the fact that I could change
| | 01:58 | all that information as well,
underneath the properties over here.
| | 02:03 | So if you can either choose it here, or
you can choose up here in order to be able
| | 02:06 | to make your changes.
| | 02:08 | All that being said, we have
everything setup the way that we want.
| | 02:11 | Now we can go ahead and just
move our mouse inside of here.
| | 02:14 | I want this to go from left to right, not up
and down. So come up here to the top of the
| | 02:18 | bay, and now you can see the dash lines
going from the left to right and then just click
| | 02:23 | on the inside there, and
continue to do this going across.
| | 02:29 | Unfortunately there is not a really a faster
way to do this, but really this isn't very long.
| | 02:34 | We're going to be talking about perhaps
12 clicks by the time this is also done.
| | 02:39 | Now that we've done that, we can see
right now it's just single line symbology.
| | 02:43 | If we wanted to have this be two lines show
what the actual thickness of the beams are,
| | 02:47 | we could always come down here to our Detail
Level and change it from a Coarse level of
| | 02:51 | detail up to a Fine level of detail, and be
able to see each of those beams in this case.
| | 02:59 | Just so that you can see it let's go ahead
and take a look at this in a 3D view. Zoom
| | 03:04 | in a little bit here.
| | 03:06 | We can see how they are going to look when
placed. I'm going to come up here one more
| | 03:12 | time, click on the big X,and I'm going
to click on the big green checkmark here.
| | 03:19 | If you ever get this error message that says
it hasn't been specified, what it really means
| | 03:23 | is that you are in the middle of the command and you
just need to cancel out of the command. And that's okay.
| | 03:28 | So we'll just click on Quit Sketching
here, and that'll get us out of the command.
| | 03:34 | The last thing we're going to need to do is
we're going to need to copy this up, so these
| | 03:37 | conditions are on each of the structural
base going all the way on at the building.
| | 03:41 | So in order to be able to do that, we'll
just come down here to near where the D is at,
| | 03:46 | we're going to click, window around, and
now we're going to come back up to this Filter
| | 03:51 | Tool again. Select on Filter, and what we're
going to want to bring up is going to be that
| | 03:57 | Structural Beam System. So we can clear out
everything but the Structural Beam System,
| | 04:03 | click on OK to that.
| | 04:04 | Next, we're going to come up here to copy
the Clipboard. Then we're going to select
| | 04:11 | on the word Paste, and we're going
to align that to our Selected Levels.
| | 04:16 | In this case, it means if we're going to copy this
from the Third Floor all the way up to the Roof level.
| | 04:22 | Now we're away for a few
seconds for this to process.
| | 04:27 | Now the purpose of these going across the
building will be to support our floors up
| | 04:30 | above, as well as up on the roof level
to be able to help support the roof.
| | 04:35 | Now once it's finished processing, feel free to go
ahead and go to your 3D view and take a look at it.
| | 04:42 | And you can spin the model around either by
selecting up here somewhere on the view cube,
| | 04:46 | or else by just holding down Shift
and the button on your wheel mouse.
| | 04:54 | Adding beams to a structural bay is easy to
accomplish, we just need to choose the appropriate
| | 04:59 | beam and its properties, and
specify where we would like to place it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding beam annotation| 00:00 | One of the fastest things we
can do is label our beam systems.
| | 00:03 | In order to do this, first you
should always be inside of the Plan view.
| | 00:08 | Next, we'll go ahead and zoom in just a little
bit so we can actually read some of the text,
| | 00:14 | and then we'll come up here to
the Annotate tab on our Ribbon.
| | 00:17 | Now, once you select on Annotate, there is
a big button over here that says Tag All.
| | 00:23 | Go ahead and select on Tag All.
| | 00:25 | Now, it's going to be a
big long list of things here.
| | 00:30 | We're going to have to look for tag that's
going to allow us to tag these individual things.
| | 00:35 | In this case, it's going to be a Structural
Framing Tag, and we're just going to use the
| | 00:39 | Standard Structural Framing Tag,
so you can just highlight that.
| | 00:43 | Now, what each of these actually are, is that
they are each tags for different kinds of objects.
| | 00:49 | If they have multiple different kinds of
conditions here where it says Loaded Tags, what it has
| | 00:54 | given you is different looks to the tags.
| | 00:55 | So you can just choose which kind of look that you
want to have associated with that particular tag.
| | 01:00 | This one that we're choosing here is just
going to have the steel size associated with it.
| | 01:05 | So, we'll go ahead and click on OK to that.
| | 01:08 | And, as you can see, of all these
structural members that we had in this view, they now
| | 01:13 | all have a Size tag to them.
| | 01:16 | If one of these members were happen to change
to be something of a different size for instance--
| | 01:20 | like in this case I'm going to click on this 14x30--
I am going to select on a little pinhead
| | 01:25 | here, and just unpin it; that's
going to allow us to change it.
| | 01:29 | If I change this to be a different size, perhaps 12x26,
we'll see the tag automatically update on the fly.
| | 01:35 | And let's go ahead and
change that back to a 14x30.
| | 01:39 | And once again you can see it
automatically update itself on the fly.
| | 01:45 | One thing to know though is if we would go
to our Third Floor, those tags are not there,
| | 01:49 | so you don't need to use that command
again on each of your subsequent floors.
| | 01:53 | So, labeling our beam systems is easy.
| | 01:55 | All you need to do is come up here and
select on Tag All or your other option will be to
| | 02:01 | select on Tag by Category.
| | 02:03 | What this will allow you to do is label each of
these individual beams on an individual basis.
| | 02:08 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding coping to a beam to change its shape| 00:00 | Adding coping to a beam changes the shape of the
beam to be able to make a connection with another beam.
| | 00:05 | In order to be able to do this in Revit,
let's go ahead and move to our Level 2 Structural
| | 00:11 | Plan, so that we can draw a beam in.
| | 00:13 | Now I'm going to zoom in here
to this left-hand structural bay.
| | 00:19 | Next, move up here to where we have the
Structure and Beam, and select on that.
| | 00:24 | Now, we want to change this from being
this HSS size to being a different shape.
| | 00:30 | The size will be really one,
it's going to be a W12×26.
| | 00:33 | So go ahead and select on that.
| | 00:35 | Next, we're going to need
to start to draw this in.
| | 00:38 | Now this Level 2 is just fine.
| | 00:41 | So we'll move our mouse down, and then when
you see this triangular shape when you're
| | 00:45 | hovering over the beam over here on the left-
hand side, go ahead and click. Go straight across,
| | 00:51 | and then when you see that triangular
shape again, go ahead and click again.
| | 00:55 | And that's going to automatically drop a
beam in right in the middle of this bay.
| | 01:00 | You can hit Esc a couple of
times to get out of the command.
| | 01:03 | Then, move your mouse back over,
highlight the beam, and click on it.
| | 01:07 | What we're going to need to do is that
right now this beam is at the same elevation as
| | 01:11 | all the rest of them.
| | 01:13 | So there's really not much from a
structural point of view how this really needs to be
| | 01:16 | able to change. It's just
going to kind of be flush right now.
| | 01:19 | So, what I'd like to do is I like to drop
this beam down, so that we can cut a little
| | 01:23 | chunk out of it and have this beam
sit on these other two beams right here.
| | 01:28 | So, in order to be able to do that, we'll
come over here where it has a Start Level
| | 01:33 | Offset and an End Level Offset, and we're just
going to change this to be -6" for both of them.
| | 01:39 | So, change that to be -6", this to be -6";
essentially it's going to drop this and this
| | 01:46 | point down to -6", so 6
inches lower than where it was.
| | 01:51 | You can then just sort of click out in
space in order to get out of the selection.
| | 01:54 | Now, let's take a look at this in a 3D view.
| | 02:00 | We can see how it's 6 inches lower than these
other beams have been; and this was the elevation
| | 02:05 | that it was at before we dropped it.
| | 02:07 | So now we need to go ahead and use the Coping
tool in order to be able to cut a little chunk
| | 02:12 | out of this end as well as the other end, so
that this beam can just sit right along here.
| | 02:17 | So, to begin with, select on one of the beams--
it doesn't really matter which one--then pick
| | 02:22 | on the word Cope up here.
| | 02:25 | Once you've done that, you'll
need to select on this one first--
| | 02:29 | this is going to be the one we're going to
be cutting the material out first--and now
| | 02:33 | select on this beam over here.
| | 02:35 | See how it's cut the material out of it.
| | 02:37 | In fact, if we hit Esc a couple of times to
get out of the command, select on the beam,
| | 02:43 | we can then look over here;
move down a little bit.
| | 02:47 | And we can see that there's actually a
Coping Distance parameter that shows up here.
| | 02:51 | Well, if we change this Coping Distance
parameter to be perhaps 3 inches instead and click on
| | 02:56 | Apply, see how it gets that much bigger?
| | 02:58 | What it's doing is instead of just putting a
little bit of a 1-inch gap between this beam
| | 03:05 | and this, it's now making it be a 3-inch gap.
| | 03:07 | If we want to be able to change that back, we can
just make that be 1" again, click on Apply,
| | 03:14 | and you can see how that coping
area is now quite a bit smaller.
| | 03:18 | Now, let's go ahead and add
that down here to the other end.
| | 03:22 | One thing that you can do, particularly if
there's a beam that's already highlighted,
| | 03:24 | is you can just click on this little corner up
here of the view cube, and it will automatically
| | 03:28 | just spin everything around, and it will
keep this beam centered in your picture.
| | 03:33 | Now, we can quickly zoom in here.
| | 03:37 | Take a look at our current condition.
| | 03:38 | We can select on the beam.
| | 03:40 | Then, we'll go ahead and use the Coping Tool,
select on this one first, then this one.
| | 03:46 | And we can see it's
automatically cut that material out for us.
| | 03:50 | So, to wrap it up, the Coping Tool
automates the process of being able to add coping to
| | 03:55 | the end of a beam.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing beam joins| 00:00 | The Beam Joins tool adjusts
how beams interface with one another.
| | 00:05 | So let's create a condition were our steel
members become flush with each other at their ends.
| | 00:10 | Now, in order to be able to do this, let's go
ahead and move to our Level 2 structural plan.
| | 00:16 | And we'll go ahead and zoom
in here on our left-hand side.
| | 00:20 | Now technically these are kind of flush
with one another, and that's an okay thing.
| | 00:24 | But what I'd really like to do is
come together at an angle right here.
| | 00:28 | Now in order to be able to achieve that,
the first thing we need to do is be able to select on
| | 00:32 | one of these beams.
| | 00:35 | Once we do that we'll get the
Beam Joins tool available to us.
| | 00:39 | And that shows up, up here. Often times it's
just a little tiny little icon that looks
| | 00:43 | like two beams sort of coming together, and
you can see by the little preview button here
| | 00:48 | kind of what it does.
| | 00:50 | But if we select on this Beam Joins tool,
we'll then get these little arrows that show up.
| | 00:56 | Now if you select on one arrow,
it will sort of bring one back.
| | 01:00 | If you select on another
arrow, it'll bring them forward.
| | 01:04 | Now if I click on this arrow again--you
notice how if they are sort of going apart from one
| | 01:09 | another pointing away from each other--it'ss allowing them
the clean up and they are coming together at a 45° angle.
| | 01:14 | And this is how I want these to
clean up in this particular condition.
| | 01:19 | So let's go ahead and take a look at that
and try to do that here on the other end.
| | 01:23 | Here, I have one arrow that's
sort of going in this direction.
| | 01:26 | Now ideally, I would like to have this
arrow pointing opposite from it. And you can see
| | 01:31 | when they're pointing opposite directions
from one another it automatically cleans up
| | 01:35 | to this intersection.
| | 01:37 | So let's go head and do that for the next two.
| | 01:45 | Always helps to try to click on the right arrow,
and if you can get them actually pointing
| | 01:49 | away from each other--or in this case they
kind of flipped in and are pointing in--they'll
| | 01:54 | end up getting that 45-degree angle there, and it will
give you the kind of clean up that you're looking for.
| | 02:02 | So the point of the Beam Joins tool is
that it's going to allow you to adjust the way
| | 02:07 | two beams cleanup with one and another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding joists| 00:00 | Our next goal is to learn how
to put joists into our structure.
| | 00:04 | In reality, a joist is really no more than
a beam, and the placement of this is really
| | 00:09 | going to be almost identical
to how we placed our beams in.
| | 00:12 | One of the things that I find that people
tend to do is when they first think about
| | 00:15 | using joist, they'll come up here and try to use
the Truss tool instead of actually doing a
| | 00:19 | joist, and that's really a mistake.
| | 00:22 | The Truss tool will put these absolutely
massive trusses going across your building with these
| | 00:27 | incredibly strong structural shapes,
and it's not really what you want to use.
| | 00:32 | In reality, whenever we're going to be
placing a joist in, all it really is is a beam.
| | 00:37 | So, first thing we're going to do is we're going
to go ahead and move into our Level 2 floor plan.
| | 00:43 | Then we're going to move over here to the
right-hand side, and once again we're going
| | 00:47 | to come up here and select on Beam System.
| | 00:51 | Right now it's given us a listing of this
14K6, and that's probably going to be the right
| | 00:57 | size for us. And what this 14K6
actually is, it happens to be a joist shape.
| | 01:03 | Now if you wanted to be able to add it in
different sort of shapes and sizes that sort
| | 01:07 | of thing, this is essentially just a beam at
this point and you just have to load a beam
| | 01:12 | into your project by coming in here to
structure and beam and then loading in a beam family.
| | 01:19 | And then you'd be able to find it underneath
your structural beams just like the rest of
| | 01:23 | the beams are located at.
| | 01:25 | Now, let me go ahead and start to drop these
joists in, and there is one key thing to remember
| | 01:30 | when we're going to be dropping the joists in,
which is going to be slightly different than our beams.
| | 01:35 | So we'll come up here to Structure and
once again we'll just do a beam system.
| | 01:39 | This 14K6, which is already loaded into the
project, is just perfect for what we want to do.
| | 01:45 | The Fixed Distance is fine of 6 feet. The
justification I like. So we'll just go ahead
| | 01:51 | and move our mouse here to the inside; we
can see some dash lines that are going across
| | 01:56 | this is the direction I wanted to go. I will
point out that if you move over to the left
| | 02:00 | side or to the right side, it's going to go
up and down. But in this case it'd rather
| | 02:04 | expand in this direction.
| | 02:07 | So go ahead and just pick up here and
toward the top and click, and it will go ahead and
| | 02:12 | drop those joists into the project.
| | 02:16 | Now if we take a look at this in a 3D view,
we can kind of zoom in here and it's a
| | 02:22 | little bit difficult to see, but what's going
on here is at the top of the joists are actually
| | 02:26 | flush with the top of the beams. And how
joists work is we really want to have the joists
| | 02:32 | sitting on top of the beams, because the beams
are where we're going to be supporting those joists.
| | 02:37 | And this is what's slightly different from what
we did before when we were talking about beams.
| | 02:42 | What we're going to need to do is just come
up here to the big green checkmark in order
| | 02:45 | to finish the command that we've been activating. it
says Quit sketch, just hit Quit sketch.
| | 02:51 | You should have a screen that looks like this.
| | 02:53 | Once you get to this point, move your mouse
until you see the dashed line show up. And you
| | 02:58 | could do this in a Plan
view as well if you wished.
| | 03:00 | When you see those dashed lines, just click.
They'll highlight in a darker blue or a purplish
| | 03:06 | color and then the next thing we're going
to want to do, is we're going to want to do
| | 03:09 | is we are going to want to
offset this a certain height.
| | 03:12 | In this case, let's just go ahead and
offset this off the level 2.5".
| | 03:18 | This is going to raise these joists up
high enough that they are going to actually be
| | 03:21 | sitting on top of the beams, instead of
dying into the beams. And we'll click on Apply.
| | 03:26 | Joists are used to span larger distances in
Revit Structure, and could be placed very much
| | 03:32 | like beams inside of the software.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding cross bracing| 00:00 | Our next step is to add cross
bracing for extra support in our structure.
| | 00:04 | To accomplish this, we need to use our Bracing tools
which show up up here underneath the Structure tab.
| | 00:11 | So go ahead and come up
here and select on Brace.
| | 00:15 | Once you've done that, you'll see that we
have different kinds of steel metal shapes over
| | 00:19 | here on our type selector list.
| | 00:22 | But probably came up as being the default
which is this HSS6x6--that's probably the one
| | 00:28 | that we'll want to use.
| | 00:28 | So let's go head and just select on that.
Next--and this is probably the critical part--
| | 00:33 | we need to be able to select on the
correct points when placing this cross bracing.
| | 00:38 | In fact, I would say from my own personal
experience, this has been one of the most difficult
| | 00:43 | things to learn about Revit structure, is where to
click in order to be able to place these cross bracings.
| | 00:49 | Now, what I like to do is come in here and
then if I want to cross brace it comes from
| | 00:54 | this intersection up to kind
of up toward the middle here,
| | 00:58 | I like to move down here--and what
you'll be very tempted to do will be to click right
| | 01:03 | here, or maybe click right here.
| | 01:06 | But the best place to click is going to be up
here, right about here. Sort of in the middle
| | 01:12 | where this blue dashed line, or this blue line is
showing up, and that little purple block shows up.
| | 01:17 | So go head and just select right there,
come up here, and then kind of pick right in the
| | 01:22 | middle of this particular beam that shows
up here and then click. And now you can see
| | 01:28 | how that cross bracing piece is coming up
and sort of tying in right the location
| | 01:32 | where you are going to want it to be at.
| | 01:34 | If we try clicking down here or up here or
any other location that wasn't kind of in
| | 01:39 | the center of where these
beams are currently located that,
| | 01:42 | it would put this cross bracing in an odd
angle or crossed over where this beam was
| | 01:47 | at, and it just wouldn't have
cleaned up right inside of the software.
| | 01:51 | So let's go ahead and do that again over here
on the right-hand side. Move over, click where
| | 01:56 | this little box shows up right here, which
is lined up with the middle of this beam. And
| | 02:02 | then come up here where you see the little
triangle which is the midpoint of that beam;
| | 02:06 | go ahead and click. And you can see how
automatically it puts the cross bracing in and cleans it
| | 02:11 | up, so it happens to be the appropriate length.
| | 02:15 | Cross bracing is perhaps most
easily added in framing elevations.
| | 02:19 | The process of creating
the bracing is easy enough.
| | 02:21 | We execute the command and then, tell Revit
the locations we like the beams to join too,
| | 02:26 | and then Revit does the rest.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. FloorsCreating and modifying floors| 00:00 | Now we need to create the
floor for each of our levels.
| | 00:03 | In order to be able to create a floor,
first off we want to make sure that we're on our
| | 00:06 | Second Floor view, because that's going to
be the first place where we're going to be
| | 00:10 | putting this concrete slab on top of.
| | 00:13 | Now, the next thing we want to do is move up
here where we see Structure, and then select
| | 00:17 | on this little picture that looks like a floor.
| | 00:20 | When we do this it will
automatically execute the Floor tool for us.
| | 00:25 | Underneath the Properties, we
have our type selector list.
| | 00:28 | If we select on that type selector list, we'll
see a list of all the different kinds of floors
| | 00:33 | that right now we could possibly use.
| | 00:35 | In this case, I kind of like the default one,
which is just this 3" light weight concrete
| | 00:39 | on 2" metal deck.
| | 00:40 | So, let's go ahead and just use that.
| | 00:44 | Before we even start drawing the floor, we're
going to want to put an offset value to this floor.
| | 00:49 | In this case, it's going to be
whatever the thickness of the floor is.
| | 00:52 | And we have 3" and 2", so
a grand total of a 5-inch thick floor.
| | 00:58 | And that offset value is going to be here
where it says, Height Offset. And the reason
| | 01:03 | why we're going to put this 5-inch value in
here, is that we want this floor to be sitting
| | 01:08 | on top of that structural steel
which is hosted in that level.
| | 01:12 | So go ahead and just put that 5" in.
| | 01:15 | Next, we need to draw out
the border for this floor.
| | 01:20 | And we really have too ways
we can go about doing this.
| | 01:23 | The first way we could do it is by
moving up here, and just picking the supports.
| | 01:27 | But if we do that, we'll have to click and
click and click and click, and we'll have
| | 01:30 | to click about 16 times all the way around.
| | 01:33 | The fastest thing for us to do will be to move up
here to the Rectangle tool and select on Rectangle.
| | 01:39 | Now, I'm going to zoom in just a little bit
here, and I will point out that technically
| | 01:45 | I could add an offset value right here.
| | 01:47 | And the reason why I mention that is that
the first place we're going to click is going
| | 01:52 | to be right here at this A - 1.
| | 01:55 | And in reality, we really want this to be
coming out about an extra 6 inches out in
| | 02:01 | this direction and 6 inches out in this
direction, in order for our floor to be able to cover
| | 02:05 | these beams which are going from side
to side and up and down on our screen.
| | 02:09 | But, what I would like to do is just show
you another property that's related to this.
| | 02:14 | So, I'm going to kind of draw a little bit
differently than how I normally would, and
| | 02:18 | I'm not going to add this offset right away.
| | 02:20 | So, select right here where we have the A
and the 1, move back down here again to where
| | 02:28 | we have this intersection down
here, and go ahead and click.
| | 02:34 | Once you have that colored line going all the
way around the perimeter of your structure,
| | 02:39 | come up here and click on
the big green checkmark.
| | 02:43 | And that will automatically
place the floor in that location.
| | 02:46 | Besides the fact that it's blue and if we
click off of it, you know you won't be able
| | 02:49 | to see that blue anymore,
| | 02:51 | one thing that's going to tip us off
immediately that there's a floor there is the fact that
| | 02:54 | we can see our beams through the floor. But
it's also showing up as being dashed lines,
| | 03:00 | and that's going to be the correct
representation we want to be able say, hey,
| | 03:03 | there's a beam showing up
their underneath our floors.
| | 03:06 | But, the bad thing for us is, and as I kind
of mentioned, is that it actually drew the
| | 03:10 | floor right around the perimeter of
where we drew that colored line at.
| | 03:14 | And since we didn't set an offset value to it
, it drew it exactly on where that line is at.
| | 03:20 | The good news is even after it's been drawn,
we can still set some sort of offset to it.
| | 03:25 | To do that, all you have to do is select
back on your floor, and remember to select on an
| | 03:29 | object--your best bet is
always to select it near the edge.
| | 03:32 | So, I went to the edge of the floor and
clicked right along the edge of the floor.
| | 03:36 | Then you can come up here to the Edit
Boundary option, click on Edit Boundary.
| | 03:41 | We don't have that offset value
after the thing is already been drawn.
| | 03:44 | But what we can do is we can move our
mouse up until one of the lines is highlighted;
| | 03:49 | then click on the Tab key once.
| | 03:52 | By doing that it's highlighted all the
lines that are touching each other, which all the
| | 03:57 | lines that make up the perimeter of our floor.
| | 04:00 | Go ahead and click there.
| | 04:01 | Now, all the lines that make up the
perimeter of our floor are now highlighting.
| | 04:07 | Once we've done that, there's this option
here that says Cantilevers and Concrete.
| | 04:12 | Now change this to be negative -6".
| | 04:15 | And what this is going to do is it's going
to put 6 extra inches, in this case to the
| | 04:20 | outside of our floor.
| | 04:22 | Once you've done that, go ahead and click on
the big green checkmark and we'll start to
| | 04:25 | see those results here in just a second.
| | 04:28 | One thing I'll point out--and if you've
clicked on the big green checkmark already that's
| | 04:31 | okay--but I will point out that as soon as
we entered in that -6",
| | 04:36 | we can now see this dark black
line going around the perimeter.
| | 04:39 | That's where our floor is going to be
designed, or is going to get built.
| | 04:43 | Go ahead and click the big green checkmark, and
now we can see that the floor is now stretching
| | 04:48 | over the top of all our beams and it's in
the location where we wanted it to be at.
| | 04:54 | One more thing we want to do is we want to
be able to copy this concrete slab up to each
| | 04:57 | of those other levels.
| | 04:59 | So, as long as it's highlighted blue,
we can go on up here to the Copy command.
| | 05:04 | If it's not highlighted blue, just come
over here to the edge of your floor and click,
| | 05:09 | and it'll highlight the entire floor blue. Then, come
to the Copy command. So Copy to Clipboard,
| | 05:14 | and then we're going to go to Paste, and
we're going to do Aligned to Selected Levels.
| | 05:20 | And we're going to tell it which levels
that we want to have this floor pasted onto.
| | 05:24 | In this case, we're going to do it from the
third floor upto the ninth floor. The tenth
| | 05:29 | floor would have a roof structure put on
it, so we don't need to worry about that.
| | 05:33 | Once you get that, go ahead and just select
on OK, and it will Copy that floor as we created
| | 05:38 | it up to each of those other levels.
| | 05:40 | In fact, if we take a look
at this in a 3-D view now--
| | 05:44 | we're not really seeing much right now,
but the reason is because right now the Visual
| | 05:48 | Style is set to Wireframe.
| | 05:50 | But, if we change this to be a Shaded visual
style instead, we can see each of those floors
| | 05:58 | and they've been copied
up level by level up here.
| | 06:02 | In fact if we zoom in by just using the
wheel in the mouse, we can also begin to see why
| | 06:07 | we added that 5 inch offset right at the
beginning where it said hide offset, because that's
| | 06:12 | the thickness of the floor and we offset it
from being flush with the top of the beams
| | 06:17 | and we offset it 5 inches, so it's
sitting directly on top of the beams now.
| | 06:22 | So, the key to doing your floors is just to draw
the profile shape exactly the way that you need it.
| | 06:27 | Then, if you have a multi-story structure,
you can simply copy each floor up to their
| | 06:32 | appropriate levels.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing floors| 00:00 | Creating a floor style from scratch is easy in
Revit, as long as you understand the principles
| | 00:04 | about how a floor is actually constructed.
| | 00:07 | And really that's what this video is all about:
understanding those principles about how floors are put together.
| | 00:13 | Now, in order to be able to do this, we're
going to come up here to Structure and then
| | 00:17 | select on the Floor tool.
| | 00:20 | And it doesn't really matter if we do a
Structural Floor or an Architectural Floor--which is just
| | 00:25 | a structural floor without any of the actual
forces and loads associated with it--but I'm
| | 00:30 | going to pick Floor Structural here.
| | 00:34 | Here we can see that we have a floor 3"
lightweight concrete on 2" metal deck.
| | 00:39 | Now, in order to be able to see the
properties of this floor and understand better about
| | 00:43 | how it's constructed and put together,
| | 00:45 | all we have to do is move down here to this
button that says Edit Type and click on that.
| | 00:50 | Then the next thing is
going to be Edit Structure.
| | 00:53 | So always remember, when you need to modify a
floor, do Edit Type, then Edit for the structure.
| | 01:01 | And this will bring us to
the Edit Assembly dialog box.
| | 01:05 | Now, there's actually more to this dialog
box and what we are seeing here on the screen.
| | 01:09 | In fact, that's the reason why I clicked up here on
the top, and then just pulled it over to the side.
| | 01:14 | It's because down here at the bottom, there
is this big Preview button and if you select
| | 01:18 | on that, we'll see a preview of what this
floor is going to look like if we would take
| | 01:23 | a section through it.
| | 01:24 | Now, this happens to be actually each layer of
material that is going to be associated in this
| | 01:30 | case with this floor.
| | 01:32 | By the way, if you ever have this material
metal deck and that's what's selected, what
| | 01:36 | this does is it will automatically assume that
this little bump structure here--which happens
| | 01:41 | to be the shape of the metal deck when
it's put in the place--exists and it will automatically
| | 01:46 | try to put that in your floor.
| | 01:49 | The actual structural part of this happens
be the concrete, and we can see that it is
| | 01:53 | currently listed as being 5" thick.
| | 01:56 | If we wanted this floor to be thinner, we could.
| | 02:00 | All we'd have to do is to change this 5
to be to be something smaller, such as a 3.
| | 02:05 | And then just click someplace else, and you
can see how now this floor is much thinner.
| | 02:10 | If you needed that floor to be
thicker, we could do that as well.
| | 02:14 | Now, what just happened here is that we can
see that this is what's called the material
| | 02:18 | browser, and it was brought up because I
clicked inside of this concrete dialog box.
| | 02:24 | What this does is it allows us to change
whatever material we want associated with this floor.
| | 02:29 | So, if we wanted a different kind of concrete,
if we wanted to have steel or whatever--like
| | 02:36 | in this case we can see the metal deck material--
| | 02:38 | it just be a matter of picking the
appropriate material off of the list, and then that floor
| | 02:43 | will be built out of that material when
model that flooring in Revit structure.
| | 02:48 | Now, I'm going to go ahead and just click
on Cancel in this dialog box, in order to
| | 02:52 | be able to get out of it.
| | 02:54 | There is also a function feature here, and
right now it just says Structure, but you
| | 02:59 | can see that there's
different layers of material.
| | 03:02 | And usually, whenever we're dealing with this,
it's probably always going to be structure for
| | 03:05 | you related to floors.
| | 03:07 | But these same different layers materials
are also available to you, if you're going
| | 03:11 | to be building such things as your walls.
| | 03:14 | And for what it's worth, your walls have
almost the exact same dialog box associated with
| | 03:18 | them, and they're built the same
way as your custom floors are.
| | 03:23 | Essentially it's one layer material, then
another, and then another layer material.
| | 03:27 | Now, back specifically talking about floors,
if we wanted this to be back to just being
| | 03:33 | a 5-inch thick floor, we just type in 5"
here. We'll need to click somewhere out in space
| | 03:39 | in order to be able to make this
actually get its thickness back again.
| | 03:44 | If we wanted to have another layer of material
placed on top of this, perhaps there's another
| | 03:48 | thin layer of concrete or maybe there
is a flooring material on top of this.
| | 03:52 | All you would have to do is select on the
Insert button right here, you would add another
| | 03:57 | layer material, which you can either move up
to the top or down to the bottom, by either
| | 04:03 | hitting up or down.
| | 04:05 | Then, if we wanted to give this
a certain thickness, we could.
| | 04:08 | If we wanted to have another 2 inches of
thickness associated with this, we just add perhaps
| | 04:12 | a number 2 here, click in this box, and now
you can see there's another layer material.
| | 04:18 | It doesn't know what it is yet, because we
didn't click in this By Category box yet.
| | 04:22 | If we wanted to add that layer of material,
tell it that it's a certain layer, just click in
| | 04:27 | here where it has material, and then pick
off of the list whatever material you like to
| | 04:32 | have associated with it.
| | 04:33 | Now, and I realize it's going to be a thick
piece of carpeting but I'll just select on
| | 04:37 | that just so you can see it.
| | 04:39 | And you can see now that it has that
Carpet material on top of the floor.
| | 04:43 | Well in this case I don't really want
to make a change to this particular floor,
| | 04:46 | so what I'm going to do is I'm going
to come down here and click on Cancel.
| | 04:50 | But, if I like the changes that were made
to the floor, technically I could just click
| | 04:54 | on OK and it would save those changes.
| | 04:56 | And any place that floor would appear
inside of our structure, would automatically have
| | 05:01 | those materials added to it.
| | 05:03 | In this case though, I like my floor the way
that it is, so I'm just going to click on Cancel.
| | 05:09 | One last thing I wanted to mention is that of
changing those properties inside of this dialog box.
| | 05:13 | And you remember Edit Type, Edit Structure,
what happens is it will change that for this
| | 05:20 | particular floor--or whichever one you
currently are editing--throughout the entire project.
| | 05:25 | Oftentimes, that's not what you
are going to want have happen.
| | 05:29 | Most of the time in fact, you are probably just going
to want to create a floor essentially from scratch.
| | 05:34 | In order to be able to do that all you
have to do is come here to Duplicate, click on
| | 05:38 | Duplicate, give that floor
whatever special name you want to give it.
| | 05:43 | Something that makes sense, something that in
any case what the structure of the floor would be.
| | 05:47 | In this case, I'm just going to call it Example.
You'd click on OK and then go to Edit Structure,
| | 05:54 | and then add or subtract materials as need be.
| | 05:57 | So, when it comes time to customize your
floor style, just remember you have full control
| | 06:03 | over all of it's properties underneath
Properties, Edit Type, and then Edit Structure.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating openings in floors for staircases| 00:00 | Openings are not just empty areas in Revit,
they are are actually entities created in Revit
| | 00:05 | which can do everything from creating
wall penetrations to openings in floors.
| | 00:10 | In this example, we'll create an opening for a
future staircase that we'll be placing in our structure.
| | 00:15 | So first we need to actually find the spot inside of our
building where that future staircase is going to be at.
| | 00:20 | In this case I know that it's going to be
around column grid B here, so we'll go ahead
| | 00:25 | and start to zoom in here where column
grid B is located at. And I know that it's also
| | 00:30 | fairly close to column grid #2 here as well.
| | 00:34 | So we'll zoom in, and I know that it's going
to be right in this area because it's right
| | 00:39 | to the right of where #2 is located at.
| | 00:44 | So we're going to be placing an
opening object inside of this space.
| | 00:49 | So to begin with placing the opening itself,
we'll need to come up here to where it has
| | 00:53 | structure, then move over to the right-hand
side and we're going to look for our openings.
| | 00:59 | And this particular one is called a Shaft
Opening, and it's good for such things as staircases,
| | 01:04 | as well as places where you
might place the elevators at.
| | 01:08 | So we'll go ahead and select on Shaft.
Next we'll want to start to draw this in.
| | 01:13 | Now I happen to know that this happens to start
off about 1 foot off of where this beam is placed at.
| | 01:19 | So in order to be able to do this, we'll
start off by using the Line Warp tool, but we're
| | 01:25 | going to set an Offset
value to this Line Warp tool.
| | 01:29 | So when we start to draw, it's going to
actually place this first line 1 foot away from where
| | 01:35 | we're drawing the line at.
| | 01:38 | So we'll select Offset 1', pick the beginning
spot for this line where should be, and then move straight down.
| | 01:47 | If for some reason the line is on the other
side--it shouldn't be for you but if it is,
| | 01:52 | you can always hit the Spacebar
to flip it to the appropriate side.
| | 01:56 | So just make sure that it's on the right-
hand side here and then come straight down.
| | 01:59 | And this sort of pink-purple line here is offset
about 1 foot from where we're currently drawing at.
| | 02:06 | Now come back down here to the intersection of
these two gridlines and then just click once.
| | 02:12 | Now keep that 1 foot Offset .
Move directly over to your right.
| | 02:17 | Now I know that we're going to need to make
some sort of adjustment to this a little bit
| | 02:20 | later on, but we're just going
to move over in this direction.
| | 02:23 | Let's just do it down to this grid line right
here, where we have this grid line intersection in.
| | 02:28 | Next, we're going to move straight on up; we
have this intersection here, and click again.
| | 02:35 | Now the Offset that I want to do for this
next one is going to be a little bit bigger;
| | 02:39 | I don't need to have the
staircase fill up the entire bay.
| | 02:43 | So in order to be able to handle that, I'd
like to have this gap to be about 2' 8",
| | 02:47 | so the Offset
here is going to be 2' 8".
| | 02:52 | And then move straight over again, and then
I'm just going to click on the end point of
| | 02:57 | this line, and then hit the Esc a
couple of times to get out of that command.
| | 03:02 | Now it doesn't need to be one continuous
line as we go around, so in order to be able to
| | 03:06 | do this you can just click on the line,
select on the little circular shape there, and drag
| | 03:11 | it down to the endpoint.
And then click out in space.
| | 03:15 | Now this is going to be sort of the
basis of our opening from here on out.
| | 03:19 | And I do know that our opening is going to
be a little bit smaller than this, so what's
| | 03:23 | going to happen is that this line ultimately
is going to move over in this direction, but
| | 03:27 | for right now we're just going to
click on the big green checkmark.
| | 03:31 | What this has done up to this point is it
actually has created our opening object.
| | 03:36 | And if we take a look at this in a 3D view,
then maybe spin this around a little bit so
| | 03:44 | we can start to see through our floor here.
| | 03:49 | We can then zoom in and we can see a
couple of different openings in our floors.
| | 03:53 | In fact, if we move around just right, we can
eventually highlight it and we can see a box
| | 03:59 | there, and that's actually our opening object.
| | 04:02 | Now the opening has its own set
of properties associated with it.
| | 04:06 | Right now it's told to be -1 feet below the level
it's associated with, in this case the First Floor.
| | 04:13 | Well I don't really want to have a hole in
my first floor, so I'm going to change this
| | 04:16 | Base Offset to be 0' 0", or just zero.
| | 04:22 | And I'm going to click here
where it has the number 20.
| | 04:24 | Next, it has an unconnected height of 20
feet, which means the height of it's going to go
| | 04:29 | up 20 feet into the air.
| | 04:31 | It's not really what I want to have done,
so what I'd like to do is I'd like it to come
| | 04:35 | up basically up to our roof level.
| | 04:38 | So in order to be able to do that, we're
going to change the Top Constraint--where it says
| | 04:41 | Unconnected right here--and we're going to
bring this up to level 10, which is our roof.
| | 04:48 | Now it's already started to make one of the
first changes, which is right here with 1 - First
| | 04:51 | Floor. And when we moved our cursor over here to
the right-hand side, you'll see it automatically
| | 04:57 | starts that penetration on up
through all the other floors.
| | 05:00 | So now if we end up clicking off into space
somewhere and then just zoom out, we can now
| | 05:05 | see that floor opening getting carried up
through each and every one of our floor plates
| | 05:10 | going on up in our structure.
| | 05:12 | The next thing we would need to do is we
would actually need to come back in here and then
| | 05:16 | start to clean up some of these holes.
| | 05:19 | If we look at this in a 3D view now--in
fact we're technically in a 3D view--but if
| | 05:23 | we just sort of zoom around here and start
to dive in there, we can see that currently
| | 05:28 | we have some structural
members that are kind of in our way.
| | 05:31 | Since the structural members are already up
on each and every floor, it means that this
| | 05:35 | next move that we're going to do we would
actually have to copy up to each and every
| | 05:39 | floor, or make this
modification on each and every floor.
| | 05:42 | But I'll show you this just on the second
floor, and then we'll know that we would need
| | 05:47 | to do this for all of the
rest of our floors as well.
| | 05:51 | So we're going to come into our second floor and
then we're going to need to make a modification
| | 05:57 | here, so we're going to be framing around
this opening. In fact, we actually need to
| | 06:00 | make this opening the
appropriate size for what we need.
| | 06:04 | So to do this we're going to select on our
first structural member over here which is
| | 06:07 | this W21x57 and then I'm
going to copy this over.
| | 06:12 | So select on that, come up here to Copy, and
you can either have a check in Multiple or
| | 06:19 | not; in this case it doesn't matter.
| | 06:22 | Move over here and just pick a base point
for where we're going to copy this from.
| | 06:27 | Next we're going to move over 1' 10",
and you'll see that it tries the default snap
| | 06:32 | to just 2', or 1' 6". But as soon as
you have that temporary dimension in place,
| | 06:38 | you can type in 1' 10", and it will
automatically make a copy of that beam over 1' 10".
| | 06:47 | Now the next thing I want to do is I want
to make another copy, and I'm going to copy
| | 06:51 | this one right here, and I'm going to
copy it over 8' 4" to the left.
| | 06:57 | So, go ahead and select on it,
Copy command, 8' 4".
| | 07:02 | And you can just type it in as soon as
you see that temporary dimension down there.
| | 07:06 | The temporary dimension in this case says 5',
but we'll change that to be 8' 4".
| | 07:12 | Now we want to clean this particular beam
up, and the best way to do that will be to
| | 07:18 | just select on it, click on the
little circular shape here. Pull it down.
| | 07:25 | Do the same thing here, except pull it up,
and we might need to adjust it just a little
| | 07:32 | bit if you didn't get the exact location right,
and just get it so it's going to be touching
| | 07:36 | each of these different beams
that are currently going across.
| | 07:41 | And then finally we need to
clean this one up right here.
| | 07:45 | Now if you have the little pushpin that
shows up here, you can just click on the little
| | 07:48 | pushpin, click on the little
circle and then just pull it back.
| | 07:53 | Now the reason why that pushpin showed up
when we first selected on this is because
| | 07:57 | this was created with a beam system, and
this beam was locked to the beam system.
| | 08:03 | So by clicking off to the pushpin it means
that we can modify the beam system a little
| | 08:06 | bit so that that beam is in the right location.
| | 08:10 | Now the final thing that we're going to need to
do is start to make a modification to our opening.
| | 08:15 | And to do that, you select on the opening,
click on Edit Sketch, come here to that colored
| | 08:20 | line again, and we're just going to use the
Move command because I already know that this
| | 08:24 | is the right distance away.
| | 08:26 | Pick right here in the center of this beam
on the right-hand side, and then move it over
| | 08:31 | so that we're going to be now clicking on
the center of this beam right here. So it's
| | 08:36 | still the same distance
right here as it was over here.
| | 08:39 | And we can click on the big green
checkmark now that our opening has been resized.
| | 08:46 | Now here on the second floor, we now have the
proper structure in place as well as an opening
| | 08:51 | here in the floors, so it's now framed
around and it's going to be structurally sound.
| | 08:57 | So in conclusion, Shaft Openings are objects
that can be moved around and they'll create
| | 09:02 | penetrations in each floor plate of each
floor that they happen to extend through.
| | 09:07 | Just remember that if you're going through
this process though, you're still going to
| | 09:11 | have to make changes to those different
structural conditions that frame around them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. CirculationCreating basic stairs| 00:00 | In this example, we'll investigate the Properties
of stairs and create a basic stair example.
| | 00:05 | This won't cover every method of stair creation,
but it will provide you with the basic skills
| | 00:10 | required for a traditional staircase.
| | 00:13 | Let's go ahead and start looking in our Model
for a good spot to be able to put that stair.
| | 00:18 | Now what we know is that up here on our Second,
Third, Fourth Floors we already have a hole
| | 00:23 | going up through that's going to be the
location for where our stairs need to be at.
| | 00:28 | In fact, if we move our mouse around enough,
and in this case I kind of stumbled upon it,
| | 00:33 | we can see the general area where the staircase
is going to need be added to, but really,
| | 00:37 | we don't want to just rely on the opening in
order to be able to know where the staircase
| | 00:41 | needs to be placed.
| | 00:43 | So the best method to go about doing it,
if you have already framed all the floors up
| | 00:47 | above to know where your staircase needs to
be, is to come in and actually show one of
| | 00:53 | those Floors up above inside of your View.
| | 00:56 | In this case, we'll go ahead and make sure
that nothing is selected, come underneath
| | 01:00 | Properties, scroll down just a little bit
and look for the word Underlay, and right
| | 01:05 | next to it, right now it should say None.
| | 01:08 | Now if we change this from being None to
Second Floor which is an area that has all
| | 01:14 | the Structural information in it, then we
can click on Apply here and we can see the
| | 01:19 | Second Floor underlaid
underneath the First Floor.
| | 01:22 | And the reason why it's called Underlay is,
back in the old days, you used to do all your
| | 01:27 | drawing on paper, and if you needed to be
able to know, does this piece lineup with
| | 01:33 | this piece, you would take the sheet that's
already been drawn and then slide in underneath
| | 01:37 | the sheet that you're currently drawing on.
| | 01:39 | So you would underlay it, underneath the
sheet that you're currently drawing and then you
| | 01:44 | kind of trace right over the top of it.
That's exactly what Revit is doing in this case.
| | 01:48 | We are underlaying the Second Floor, so that we can
start to draw our staircase in right on top of it.
| | 01:55 | So in this case, we are on the First Floor
plan, and we'll go ahead and zoom in and we
| | 02:00 | can see by where this box is located in,
this box happens be the flooring on the Floor up
| | 02:06 | above, and we know that our staircase
fits just right inside of this opening.
| | 02:11 | So as a result of that, we can start to draw
our staircase around from here up and around
| | 02:15 | and around the corner.
| | 02:16 | One thing to know though, is if we are going
to be doing a staircase, it's not in the normal
| | 02:20 | place where we've been looking for commands up
to this point. Up to now we have been underneath
| | 02:25 | the Structure Tab and we've been looking
over here but there aren't any staircases here.
| | 02:30 | Technically, the staircases are going to
be considered an Architectural Object,
| | 02:34 | so we need to look underneath Architecture
in order to be able to place them.
| | 02:37 | So select on the Architecture Tab, move
over probably toward the center of your screen,
| | 02:42 | and you'll see a Command that it says
Stair, go ahead and select on Stair.
| | 02:49 | Next, we can there are some
options going across the top.
| | 02:53 | Now these options are where do we
what to be able to draw the Staircase.
| | 02:58 | Do we want this to be on the right-hand side
of the staircase, do we want to draw at the
| | 03:02 | left-hand side of the staircase or do we just
want to draw right down the center of the staircase?
| | 03:07 | In this example, let's just go ahead and
select on Right, because we are going to draw from
| | 03:11 | the right-hand side of the Staircase.
| | 03:14 | Before we get too far and start to actually
draw in each of our points, we're going need
| | 03:18 | to make one tiny little change and
that is we don't really want an assembled staircase.
| | 03:23 | An assembled staircase would be this kind
of staircase where you put all the different
| | 03:27 | pieces together. It could be metal, it
could be wood, that kind of staircase.
| | 03:33 | The kind of staircase, we want to able put
in here is going to be a Precast Staircase
| | 03:39 | or if we wanted to, technically
we could've done a Monolithic Staircase.
| | 03:42 | And both cases they are going to be a concrete
staircase, but we are going to choose a Precast Stair.
| | 03:49 | Also we need to verify the
Properties of the Staircase.
| | 03:53 | In reality, we might decide alright maybe there
should be a 1 foot tread, but for this example,
| | 03:58 | I want to put an 11 inch tread on the Staircase.
| | 04:02 | If we want to know some more Properties about
the stair before we start to draw it in, you
| | 04:07 | can always click on Edit Type right here underneath
Properties and it will give you all the Properties
| | 04:12 | associated with this
particular type of staircase.
| | 04:17 | So if you want to be able to a change such
information as what the Materials of the Staircase
| | 04:22 | would be, what the shape of the nosing,
which is the end of the stairs, would look like,
| | 04:27 | you can do all that through the
Type Properties located within here.
| | 04:30 | All right, now we like the Default,
so let's just go ahead and click on OK.
| | 04:35 | Now we need to start drawing the staircase in.
| | 04:38 | So I'll move down here and you'll see that
this box that shows up, click right here in
| | 04:42 | this square and move over.
| | 04:44 | You will notice it's telling how many risers have
been created as well as how many risers are remaining.
| | 04:51 | Revit knows this already because it knows
what the maximum tread height should be,
| | 04:57 | and it knows what the floor to floor height is.
| | 05:00 | So Revit is actually doing the math already,
and we can see that it thinks that the actual
| | 05:05 | riser height should be 6 and 59/64th of an inch.
| | 05:09 | I always like talking to guys in construction
because they'll start laughing immediately
| | 05:13 | when they see these absolutely precise
fractions that Revit produces for these.
| | 05:18 | But actually, that's what it would need it to be
constructed to, to keep that perfect step to step height,
| | 05:23 | the way that it should be and
the way that it would need to be built.
| | 05:26 | Now I am going to go ahead and move over here
to the right and we can make this be 13 Risers
| | 05:30 | created and when it says 13
remaining, go ahead and click once.
| | 05:35 | Next, just move straight up and you'll know you
have got it because that blue dash line will
| | 05:39 | show up and just click once,
and then move directly over again.
| | 05:44 | Now technically, you can click here at the
end or if you just click somewhere out in
| | 05:48 | space, once all of these treads are done,
it's up to you, you'll get the exact same
| | 05:52 | staircase either way.
| | 05:53 | I'm going to click right
here at the end of this box.
| | 05:57 | I am not too worried about the warning messages
popping up right now, it's saying that it
| | 06:02 | might be having a little bit of a problem modeling
a little tiny piece but it's nothing that
| | 06:05 | we should be able to see.
| | 06:07 | So I'm just going to leave it alone for right now.
| | 06:09 | Next, I am going to click on the big green checkmark
up here and that should finish off the staircase.
| | 06:15 | We can see the display representation of the
staircase, part of this was controlled actually
| | 06:20 | through the Type Properties again.
| | 06:21 | That was some more of the settings as far
as where this line is going to show up at,
| | 06:25 | what this little symbol will look like, that's all
controlled through the Type Properties of the staircase.
| | 06:30 | Also, if we look at this in a 3-D View now,
spin the model around, one thing you'll notice
| | 06:38 | is that we can't currently see
where that staircase is located at.
| | 06:42 | Well, the reason is, it's located
underneath the Architecture Tab.
| | 06:46 | So usually if you draw that kind of object, in
certain views, you'll find that your Architectural
| | 06:50 | Objects are shut off, the
visibility of them is shut off.
| | 06:54 | And you might remember that in order to be
able to turn the visibility of an object on,
| | 06:58 | you can come into either your Visibility
Graphic settings by clicking on Edit or just typing
| | 07:03 | the letter V for Visibility-Visibility
twice on your keyboard.
| | 07:07 | And if we take a look here and look for our
stairs, we can see that Stairs currently does
| | 07:12 | not have a checkmark next to it.
| | 07:14 | So let's go ahead and put a checkmark next to
that, move down on the List and click on OK.
| | 07:20 | Now we can see one of our stairs currently
in place, but the staircase really needs to
| | 07:25 | go all the way on up to the top of our building.
| | 07:28 | So in order to be able to that, we
can do this nice and quick and easy.
| | 07:32 | Just select on your staircase, come here
to where it says multi-story and this should
| | 07:37 | say top, so we see multistory Top Level and
changes from being none and we'll just bring
| | 07:44 | this all the up to our Roof Level and you can
see automatically, it automatically duplicates
| | 07:49 | that staircase from that First
Floor all the way up to the top.
| | 07:53 | And the nice thing about this command is, is
if you make a Modification to the staircase
| | 07:57 | that change will reflect on each and every one of
these all the way around that up to the Top Level.
| | 08:03 | So remember that you can create just about
any kind of stair and design condition just
| | 08:08 | by using the Stair Tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a ramp| 00:00 | Let's create a ramp leading to one
of the entrances to our structure.
| | 00:03 | In order to do this, we need to first go to
our First Floor plan view, so 1 - First Floor.
| | 00:10 | Next, let's go ahead and zoom in
right here between our gridlines A and B.
| | 00:16 | And where I would like to draw this ramp
in is going to be right about where my arrow
| | 00:20 | is pointing here on the screen.
| | 00:21 | So, the next thing we are going to need to
do is come up here on the ribbon, select the
| | 00:26 | Architecture tab, if it isn't selected
already, move over, then select the Ramp Tool.
| | 00:34 | Once you click on Ramp, we need
to take a look at its properties.
| | 00:38 | So, move over here to the left hand
side, take a look at Properties for Ramp.
| | 00:42 | Now one of the first things that I'm seeing
is that, right now it's set to go from first
| | 00:47 | level up to the second level or the second
floor, and we don't want a ramp that's going
| | 00:53 | to be 700 feet long.
| | 00:55 | So what we're going to need to do is
we're going to need to adjust these settings.
| | 00:58 | But we wanted this to say is that for the top
level we're going to want this to be 1- First Floor.
| | 01:05 | For the base level it can still be first floor
but we just want a real subtle, short, little ramp.
| | 01:12 | So we're going to make
this Base Offset be -8 inches.
| | 01:17 | Basically it's just enough to be able to step
out the door, go down the ramp, and then get
| | 01:23 | down to the ground level.
| | 01:25 | Whenever you have that -8 inches set feel
free to just click somewhere out here in space
| | 01:28 | or just move your mouse out here,
it'll automatically set those properties.
| | 01:33 | Also, I want to point out that if we come
down here on the list, you'll see such things
| | 01:38 | as Up text, Down text a couple of
little check marks here, as well as width.
| | 01:45 | Now all these that happen to be properties
that are going to affect the in display of
| | 01:49 | how this ramp is going to
look when it comes time to print.
| | 01:53 | Also when we're dealing with such things as
width that's going to affect what the overall
| | 01:56 | width obviously of what the ramp will be.
| | 02:00 | In this case, we want a 4 foot wide ramp.
| | 02:02 | So go ahead and click in there where it
has 3 foot and change this to be 4 feet.
| | 02:08 | Now the next thing we should do is move
over into the drawing area and start to draw in
| | 02:12 | where we want our ramp location to be.
| | 02:15 | Now make sure this says Run, it should by
default but for some reason it doesn't just
| | 02:20 | click on Run and then, click right about
where I'm clicking at here, we can always adjust
| | 02:26 | it after the fact, if it needs to move.
| | 02:28 | Move over to your left hand side and just
go into the ramp basically, just stops drawing itself
| | 02:35 | and then it kind of click out here in space.
| | 02:37 | Once you get to this point,
that's pretty much the ramp.
| | 02:40 | All we have to do is come up here to the
big green checkmark, in order to theoretically
| | 02:44 | be able to finish it off.
| | 02:46 | Now I do say theoretically, and the reason
is I could tell that something was going to
| | 02:50 | be wrong by the way that the ramp looks.
| | 02:52 | If I select back on it again, I can see an
arrow that shows up right here and what this
| | 02:58 | arrow tells me is the direction that
the ramp is currently trying to slope.
| | 03:02 | What this means, is if we take
a look at this in a 3-D view,
| | 03:07 | and now I'm going to spin the building
around to be able to see the ramp on the backside.
| | 03:16 | Right now we're not seeing the ramp, but what that
means is it just shut off in the Visibility/Graphics.
| | 03:22 | So all we have to do is either type the letter 'V'
twice or here at Visibility/Graphics click the Edit button.
| | 03:30 | Once you've done that, we can come in here
and we could take a look for our ramp.
| | 03:33 | And sure enough, ramp doesn't
have a little checkmark next to it.
| | 03:37 | No checkmark means you can't see it.
| | 03:39 | So once we put a checkmark there in that
box, you can come over here and click on OK.
| | 03:44 | And now here's that little
ramp that we just placed.
| | 03:47 | Now one of the problems with that ramp,
if I spin it around we can see it.
| | 03:51 | As we can see it's currently kind of going
up in the air which isn't what we want and
| | 03:56 | that's what that arrow was trying to indicate
to us is that this whole ramp is just trying
| | 04:00 | to go up in the air.
| | 04:02 | So what we need to do is go
back into our 1 - First Floor plan.
| | 04:07 | Select back on the ramp and that
little arrow there you can click on it, too.
| | 04:12 | And if you click on it, we can
now see that it's going down.
| | 04:16 | So if we take a look back in that 3-D view again,
we can now see that the ramp is sloping itself down.
| | 04:24 | Now one other thing that's interesting about
this ramp and you may or may not want it this way,
| | 04:28 | is right now it's just showing the thickness
of the ramp, it's not actually making it so
| | 04:33 | it's liked a sloped concrete pour.
| | 04:35 | What this is, it's just a ramp
that has a certain thickness to it.
| | 04:39 | What I would really like to see with the
ramp like this is that the entire thing is just
| | 04:43 | poured concrete and it's a flat
base and it's touching the ground.
| | 04:48 | So in order to be able to achieve that we
want to go ahead and select on the ramp again.
| | 04:52 | And this time we're going to come over
here to Edit Type and click on Edit Type.
| | 04:57 | Once we do that, we can see a few of the
properties that are also associated with this ramp.
| | 05:02 | Now one of the things is the thickness and
the reason why it displays the way that it
| | 05:05 | does right now, is because the thickness
is listed as being 3 inches in thickness.
| | 05:11 | We can also see what the maximum length of this
ramp was going to be allowed in the properties,
| | 05:16 | as well as what the slope
on this ramp was going to be.
| | 05:20 | You honestly don't want to have a slope that's
too steep or else you are going to have issues
| | 05:23 | with ADA access sort of regulations.
| | 05:26 | What those regulations cover is that you
have to be able to have a certain slope in order
| | 05:30 | to be able to go up the ramp safely.
| | 05:33 | The other thing to know is that right
underneath that ramp in the maximum slope is there's
| | 05:38 | this option here called Shape.
| | 05:40 | And right now it's trying to lock itself to that
thickness which shows up here at the top to 3 inches.
| | 05:47 | What we really wanted to
do is just be a solid ramp.
| | 05:51 | And if we click on Apply to that, we can now
see it has this nice little triangular shape,
| | 05:56 | it's flat on the bottom, so you can just be
flush with the grade down there along the earth.
| | 06:02 | So once we have that in
place, you can click on OK.
| | 06:05 | We're going to zoom out a bit, spin this
around and we can see that the ramp is in the right
| | 06:10 | location, it has that classic triangular
shape and it's essentially just a concrete pour
| | 06:15 | ramp sitting there where it needs to be.
| | 06:19 | Ramps are actually quick and easy to use.
| | 06:21 | We just need to pay attention to such things
as their thickness and their direction based
| | 06:26 | on that arrow when we are placing them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Creating ViewsCreating section views| 00:00 | Sometimes to create our details and do our
structural designs we need to cut a section
| | 00:04 | through the model of our building.
| | 00:07 | To do this, we need to
activate the Section Tool.
| | 00:10 | Now we can find Section
underneath View up here on the Ribbon.
| | 00:13 | Now the reason why it happens to be underneath
View is because we are going to be creating
| | 00:17 | a section view of our model.
| | 00:20 | So go ahead and select on Section up here,
now what we're going to do is we're going
| | 00:25 | to create the actual Section symbol and
have it go through our building, and where
| | 00:29 | I'd like to put this Section symbol, is going
to be where A and B are located at,
| | 00:34 | and I'm going to start by being over here on
the right-hand side when I place it.
| | 00:38 | Now I could be over on the left, it's not
going to really matter the direction that
| | 00:42 | I go with this, but I'm just
choosing over on the right-hand side.
| | 00:46 | Next I'm going to move over to the left and then
click again when I get close to the A and the B.
| | 00:52 | Now we can see that our
Section symbol is here and in place.
| | 00:56 | We can see that these dashed lines are showing
up over here and what these dashed lines actually
| | 01:02 | sort of indicate is really two different things.
| | 01:05 | One is, is how far back the section goes,
and two, is the very fact that the section
| | 01:09 | is pointing in that direction.
| | 01:12 | If we happened to click off of the section
right now, we'll see that those dashed lines
| | 01:15 | go away because we don't want them to print,
but if we would ever highlight back on this
| | 01:20 | section again, we'd see those dashed lines again.
| | 01:22 | Now let's go ahead and take a look at that
section that we just created, and we have
| | 01:27 | a couple of different ways
that we can go about doing it.
| | 01:29 | One way would be to come over on to the left-
hand side on the Project Browser and then find
| | 01:34 | that section that we just created.
| | 01:36 | The other thing that we could do though,
would be to select on the actual Section symbol
| | 01:40 | itself, right-click and we could Go to View.
| | 01:45 | I'll also bring up the fact that if you double-
click on the circular part of the Section symbol
| | 01:48 | really fast it'll also take you to the View.
| | 01:52 | So I selected on the Section symbol,
right-clicked, and then went to View.
| | 01:57 | Now this happens to be a section of our building
and this is a dynamically updating section.
| | 02:04 | What that means is, is if I make any
changes to the Section symbol it'll automatically
| | 02:07 | change what we're seeing
here inside of our Section view.
| | 02:11 | In order to be able to illustrate that
let's go back to our Plan View and do something
| | 02:14 | to this Section symbol.
| | 02:16 | So I'm going to come up here, to the upper right-
hand corner, I'm going to click on this X right here.
| | 02:21 | Next we can see here is the Section symbol,
it has a little double arrows that ends up
| | 02:26 | showing up, up here, right?
| | 02:28 | Well what I'm going to do is I'm going to
go ahead and select on the section and then
| | 02:31 | click on the little double arrows that shows up.
| | 02:34 | You notice that box, and I said that, that
box sort of indicates the direction that the
| | 02:39 | section is pointing in.
| | 02:40 | Well when we click the double arrows it
flipped that to the other side; technically it also
| | 02:45 | flipped the section head showing the direction
| | 02:48 | with this arrow that this view is actually
pointing in, but because we've done that,
| | 02:53 | you'll now notice that the staircase which
is over here - well, it's not over on this
| | 02:58 | side, which means if we go to the section we
should no longer be able to see the staircase.
| | 03:03 | So I'm going to go ahead and select on the single
line, I'm going to right-click and then Go to View.
| | 03:08 | You notice how the staircase is now gone.
| | 03:10 | The reason is that it's not between the Section
symbol and the dash lines of that box anymore.
| | 03:16 | So as a result of that just by flipping the
section we can change how the section displays.
| | 03:21 | I'm going to go ahead and go back to the
Section view or actually back to the Elevation view
| | 03:25 | to look at the Section symbol.
| | 03:28 | Now if we want to be able to flip this to
go to the other side, all we have to do is
| | 03:32 | be able to select on the symbol, click on
the little double arrows that shows up right
| | 03:36 | here, and now we can see that it's
now flipped it back to the other side.
| | 03:42 | Now one of the other things that I'd
mentioned kind of off-hand when we first started this
| | 03:46 | was that, this dashed line here, also indicates
the depth that the section is going to be taking.
| | 03:52 | So it's not only the direction
but how deep the section can go.
| | 03:56 | What this means is if I click on these double
arrows and pull it back like this, we're not
| | 04:01 | going to be able to see very
much inside of our Section view.
| | 04:04 | The reason is that our columns aren't inside of this
little box we have right here, neither is our staircase.
| | 04:10 | So as a result of that if we would happen
to right-click and then decide to, all right,
| | 04:13 | we are going to go to our View again, only
those items that are inside of that little
| | 04:17 | dashed box there are showing up.
| | 04:20 | As a result of this is that
actually it gives us quite a bit of power.
| | 04:23 | What it means is we can only see those things
in this section that we want to be able to see.
| | 04:29 | So if there is a lot of stuff in the
background that we don't want to see, we think it just
| | 04:32 | might be getting in the way, it doesn't
have to be inside of our Section view.
| | 04:36 | Now of course, the power of our Section
view is to be able to do nice sections through
| | 04:40 | the building and see the physical relationships
between the different parts of the structure.
| | 04:44 | In fact, if I would zoom in here right now,
so we can see a little bit better, we can
| | 04:49 | start to see where the floor is sitting on the
different beams that we have going through here.
| | 04:54 | We can see the column grids, we can see different
thicknesses of different materials, and that's
| | 05:00 | all contained inside of our Section views.
| | 05:03 | Now I'm going to go ahead and click
on the little x showing up right here.
| | 05:06 | We can still see that the
Section symbol is pointing down.
| | 05:10 | Now a couple of other properties that
are available with the Section symbol;
| | 05:13 | one is this little Break Tool, which shows
up right here, I call it the little Break
| | 05:17 | Tool because it looks like the old
standard architectural break symbol.
| | 05:21 | If we go ahead and zoom in here and click
on this little Break Tool, what it actually
| | 05:26 | does is it splits this line into two pieces.
| | 05:29 | It doesn't affect how
the section actually works.
| | 05:31 | But I know that some people like to see this
symbology where they only see a part of this
| | 05:35 | line going through the drawings.
| | 05:37 | So you can absolutely create that condition
just by clicking on the Section symbol.
| | 05:41 | Also, if I click back on the Section symbol
again and then click back on that little break,
| | 05:46 | it will automatically heal itself again.
| | 05:49 | Now, so we can see a
little bit more level of detail,
| | 05:52 | I'm going to once again, select on this
little double arrow that shows up here on the dashed
| | 05:57 | lines, and then just pull this out,
so we can see more of our building.
| | 06:01 | Now there is one more thing really
to show on these Section symbols.
| | 06:05 | Actually there's two more things.
| | 06:06 | The first thing is going to be the Split
Element Tool which will appear whenever you have the
| | 06:11 | Section symbol highlighted.
| | 06:14 | Now if we select on Split Element it's going
to allow us to split this Section symbol into
| | 06:18 | two or more pieces, this is what that means.
| | 06:22 | If I decided to click right here, and then
I held my mouse button down I can start to
| | 06:27 | split this section in either like the left-
hand side, the right-hand side, pull one side up,
| | 06:33 | pull one side down.
| | 06:35 | One of the advantages of being able to do
this is perhaps all we wanted to be able to
| | 06:39 | see is the items that we're going in this
area right here, and I just hit Escape two
| | 06:44 | times to get out of the command, or maybe,
if I want you to select back on this again,
| | 06:49 | may be I just didn't want to see the stairs in
this section, but I want to see everything else.
| | 06:54 | Whenever, we're going to be doing this section,
it's going to automatically generate a section
| | 06:58 | based on what's between these
dashed lines and this line right here.
| | 07:03 | So as a result of that what we're going to
see is we're going to see these three columns
| | 07:06 | here, we're not going to see the staircase and
then we are going to see these two columns here.
| | 07:12 | You are not going to really be able to tell
the difference between the columns other than
| | 07:15 | the fact that maybe part of this column
might be partially hidden by the staircase.
| | 07:20 | It kind of depends on how far out the staircase goes
and whether or not it gets in front of the column or not.
| | 07:25 | So in order to be able to do this, we are
going to select on the Section symbol, right-click
| | 07:30 | again, and Go to View, and you can see how
it's sort of cutting through here and we're
| | 07:36 | not seeing the staircase.
| | 07:38 | Go ahead and close this view down.
| | 07:41 | I don't really like to have these breaks in
my sections too often, so I'm just going to
| | 07:44 | click on it, click on the double arrows,
pull it back up, it'll automatically heal itself
| | 07:49 | whenever you get them inline with one another.
| | 07:50 | In fact, it'll even feel like they are
snapping together, so you'll know when they are on
| | 07:54 | a straight line, and you can just let go now,
and it'll show up as being one healed section
| | 08:00 | going through the building.
| | 08:01 | Now the last thing I wanted to do is these
little circles showing up here at the ends
| | 08:05 | and if you click on the little circles,
what they are going to allow you to do is flip
| | 08:09 | through the different section head
options that we have available to us.
| | 08:14 | So if we would rather have the circular side
down here, if we would rather have this little
| | 08:20 | tick or slash mark down here at
the end, we could definitely do that.
| | 08:24 | One last thing that I'll point out is that
you're not just limited to the one end getting
| | 08:29 | moved, and when I say the one end, we use
the Split Tool, and we're just moving the
| | 08:33 | one side, we can always use our Move command
in order to be able to click onto it and just
| | 08:38 | pull it back, pull it forward or move this
to any location that we needed to have it at.
| | 08:43 | So our section of dynamically updating tools
which allow us to see otherwise hidden details
| | 08:48 | and be able to document conditions which we
might need to be able to document in order
| | 08:54 | to be able to construct our buildings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a framing elevation| 00:00 | Structural Elevations allow us to create
details of specific structural areas in our model.
| | 00:05 | They also simplify the drawing of
certain element such as our cross bracing.
| | 00:10 | In order to execute the tool all we have to
do is move up here to the View Tab and once
| | 00:15 | again, the reason why we're going to View
Tab before going to be creating something
| | 00:18 | new like this, it's because we're
going to be create a new view of our model.
| | 00:23 | So up here, underneath the View Tab
there this option here that says, Elevation.
| | 00:28 | Now technically there's actually two
different ones here, one is a Building Elevation and
| | 00:32 | ones of Framing Elevation.
| | 00:34 | And the one that we want to choose in
this case is going to be a Framing Elevation.
| | 00:38 | Building Elevations are these odd little symbols
that we've been looking out here on the outside
| | 00:42 | here and what the Building Elevation do is
that they show the entire building, I mean
| | 00:46 | every piece is steel,
every floor, they show everything.
| | 00:50 | Framing Elevation's on the other hand are
only going to show those Framing Elements
| | 00:55 | that we're going to be close to and we'll
see those results here in just a minute.
| | 00:58 | So I'm going to go ahead and come up
here and click on Framing Elevation.
| | 01:02 | Next, I want to place this between our base
number 3 and 4 which means going to be right
| | 01:07 | in this area right here.
| | 01:09 | So I'm going to go ahead and try to zoom
into this area and as soon as you get close to
| | 01:14 | something that which happens to be on the structural
grid like in this case we have the grid letter D.
| | 01:19 | We'll see our Framing Elevation symbol show up.
| | 01:23 | Now I'm just going to be place this roughly
right here in the middle, I'll click. We can
| | 01:28 | already see, it says it's going to be
Elevation 1 - a which means if we take a look over here
| | 01:33 | on our Project Browser, it'll also be Framing
Elevations it's going to be Elevation 1 - a,
| | 01:41 | this information and this information is
always going to pretty much be the same.
| | 01:44 | So you'll know if you see this information
showing up here, it's going to be the same
| | 01:48 | information over here in the Project Browser.
| | 01:51 | That being said we can go ahead and hit Escape
a couple of times just to make sure that we're
| | 01:54 | out of command and then, we can either double-click
right here in order to be able to bring up that view.
| | 02:00 | Or the other option, is as you can come in
here and click really fast were this little
| | 02:04 | triangular shape shows up.
| | 02:06 | So two real quick fast clicks. This is
what a Framing Elevation is going to look like.
| | 02:12 | Now with the Framing Elevations one of the
things I've mentioned with a regular Building
| | 02:16 | Elevations is it shows everything. The Framing
Elevation only shows those structural members
| | 02:21 | which happen to be right there along that
structural grid that we placed it next to.
| | 02:26 | So here we have 3 and 4 and then, just those
members which happen to be along that structural
| | 02:33 | grid which was highlighted when we clicked.
| | 02:36 | But we can see all these different
levels going all the way up to the roof level.
| | 02:40 | Right, now it's a little bit hard to read
because it's just single individual lines.
| | 02:45 | But the reason why that is, is because down here
we have our Detail Level and it's set to Coarse.
| | 02:50 | If we want to be able to see a finer level
of detail, we can change this to be a Fine
| | 02:55 | level of detail and then, we can see
such things as the floors that are there.
| | 02:59 | You can see the structural members which
are supporting those floors and if we zoom out
| | 03:04 | a little bit here and zoom down to the bottom,
| | 03:07 | here we can even see our foundation walls as
well as are footings down here at the bottom.
| | 03:12 | By using these Framing Elevations they
allow us some more easily document and model
| | 03:17 | our existing structural conditions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using callout views for details| 00:00 | Callout views are used to create enlarged
floor plans and enlarged details which can
| | 00:04 | then be used to illustrate
how a structure goes together.
| | 00:08 | Now in order to be able to create a callout
view, we need to first decide what kind of
| | 00:12 | view do we want to be in order to be able to place
this Callout view or this Enlarged Detail view in.
| | 00:17 | So, looking at this, oftentimes if I was
going to use a Callout view, I might end up doing
| | 00:23 | a little window around an area here
and saying I want to enlarge this area.
| | 00:28 | In this particular case I don't really have
a condition where I would like to do that in.
| | 00:32 | If I had an architectural plan open I
might use this to be able to blow up and expand
| | 00:38 | a kitchen or a bathroom in order to be able
to look at it and then be able to do little
| | 00:42 | notes and modifications
inside of that big bubble.
| | 00:46 | In this case, I want to be able to do
something that's nice and structural.
| | 00:50 | So in order to be able to do that, I think I'm
going to do a Callout view inside of one of my sections.
| | 00:55 | And I'm just going to look down here on my
list and I'm going to choose this Framing
| | 01:00 | Elevation as a section I want
to create my callout bubble in.
| | 01:04 | So I'm going to go to Elevation 1 - a,
I'm going to zoom down here.
| | 01:09 | What I would like to do is I'm going to
create what's considered a Callout bubble right in
| | 01:14 | this area, kind of blowing up this area
where Second Floor and First Floor and the top of
| | 01:18 | footing is located at.
| | 01:20 | The idea is may be you would want to do some
sort of detail working and here, that shows
| | 01:24 | better how this building is actually
constructed and how it's standing up.
| | 01:29 | So up here underneath View
there's this option here for callout.
| | 01:34 | So we'll go ahead and select on Callout.
| | 01:36 | Next, I need to draw that little bubble
I keep mentioning it again and again.
| | 01:42 | And that's by selecting here and holding
the mouse button down and then pulling up and
| | 01:48 | just sort of creating this big
bubble or window around this view.
| | 01:52 | Now this is fairly standard
structural architectural kind of annotation.
| | 01:56 | So there's a good chance you might recognize it,
but really all you have to do is just
| | 02:00 | click here, click here and it will automatically
draw a window with that bubble associated
| | 02:05 | around that particular area.
| | 02:08 | Now the next thing, we're going to do is
maybe this bubble isn't in the area we would like
| | 02:12 | to be in; maybe we like it on
this side or somewhere else.
| | 02:16 | So we can select on this little
callout bubble, by picking on this line.
| | 02:21 | Then there's this dot that shows up, if you
click on the dot and hold the mouse button
| | 02:24 | down you can drag this dot with the
bubble anywhere that you need it to be.
| | 02:29 | I'll also point out that there's this little
thing right here, it looks like another dot.
| | 02:34 | Well, if you click on it and pull it down
it allows you to have sort of an angle there
| | 02:38 | are in your callout bubble in order to be
able to may be better fit this on your sheet
| | 02:43 | or be able to get this bubble in between
different notes that you might have into place.
| | 02:47 | In my case though I just want to go ahead
and just straighten this back out, but you
| | 02:51 | can leave it curved or anyway that you want to.
| | 02:54 | Now when we created this callout bubble, it
actually created essentially a callout view
| | 03:02 | and we can see that right here says
it's Callout Of Elevation 1 - a.
| | 03:07 | If I would double-click on that, it'll take
us to our callout view which is an enlarged
| | 03:12 | detail of that area; we
just put a window around.
| | 03:15 | I keep saying it's an enlarged detail, it
really is bigger and we can start to see that
| | 03:20 | if I start zooming here; we can
start to see each of these individual.
| | 03:24 | I'll use the term coursing right now, it's
really just the metal pan up there that's
| | 03:29 | underneath our floor. If we zoom back out again,
| | 03:35 | one other thing we'll notice is that
this says that a quarter inch equals a foot.
| | 03:39 | If you click on the little x up here, we'll
see that the original one was at an eighth
| | 03:43 | inch equals a foot, so a smaller scale.
| | 03:46 | So to make a long story short related to that,
if you want to be able to create a blown up
| | 03:51 | view, so that you can start doing your architectural
structural detailing on the inside of it.
| | 03:56 | All you are going to need to do is
place one of these callout views.
| | 04:00 | One other thing that I want to mention is
that when you go to place a callout view there
| | 04:04 | is actually one other option that's available
to you, and that one other option is called
| | 04:09 | Reference other view. And if you put a
checkmark in Reference other view, in this case it's
| | 04:14 | going to allow you to reference another
view that might already be in the drawing, such
| | 04:19 | as may be this callout actually exist in
two or three other locations, it has the exact
| | 04:24 | same detail, the exact same
conditions in all those three other locations.
| | 04:29 | If that's the case there's really no reason to
keep creating new views based on that callout.
| | 04:34 | All you have to do is put a checkmark
right here and then pick that other view that's
| | 04:38 | just like this one you just created and
it'll automatically point itself to that view as
| | 04:44 | opposed to creating a new view from scratch.
| | 04:47 | So that's kind of the idea behind
being able to reference another view.
| | 04:51 | Callouts are used for enlarged details and
enlarged floor plans; and they're really designed
| | 04:57 | to better illustrate how design goes together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Annotation and Drafting ToolsAdding text| 00:00 | Text is one of the primary ways of
placing notes inside of a Revit project.
| | 00:05 | In this example what we would like to do
is, we would like to place some notes sort
| | 00:08 | of in this area of our drawing.
| | 00:10 | This is a nice big blown up view and, quite
frankly, it has more information than what we would
| | 00:15 | want to have inside of our detail.
| | 00:17 | So what we are going to do is we are going
to move into our callout view and we can see
| | 00:21 | the little callout symbol right here.
| | 00:23 | Now if we just click inside of the view, zoom
down and we have a couple of different options.
| | 00:29 | The way that I'm going to go is I am going
to double-click here on this little circular
| | 00:32 | shape and this is going to take
us directly to the callout view.
| | 00:35 | If you have any problems with doing that,
I'll also point out that underneath the Project
| | 00:39 | Browser over here on the left hand side you
can double-click on Callout of Elevation 1 - a,
| | 00:44 | that's what this is currently named
and that will take you to the same view.
| | 00:49 | So I am going to move over here, just double-
click here on that little circular shape and take
| | 00:53 | us to our callout view.
| | 00:55 | Now the callout view right now has a
scale of one quarter of an inch equals a foot.
| | 00:59 | And it's not necessarily a bad scale, but
in this case I just want it to be scale that
| | 01:03 | happens to be a little bit smaller, in
this case one eighth of an inch equals a foot.
| | 01:07 | So, we can come down here to this scale, come
up here and then change this to be one eight
| | 01:12 | inch equals a foot.
| | 01:14 | And we can see when we do that
how all the text looks bigger.
| | 01:18 | Now the reality of it is, is all that text
is actually the same size as far as if it
| | 01:22 | was going to print on a sheet, it's
everything else, it's just looks a little bit smaller.
| | 01:27 | What we want to do now is we are going to
add, in this case, three different notes.
| | 01:32 | One note is going to callout
this concrete slab up here on top.
| | 01:36 | Next note is going to be down here and we are going
to be calling out what the structure happens to be.
| | 01:42 | Then the third note we are going to add is
going to be a note relating to this concrete
| | 01:46 | wall and that's what we are looking at here
and it's beyond, it's sort of in the distance
| | 01:50 | and we are going to want to add note there
to describe this concrete wall isn't right
| | 01:53 | in front of our face it's back a little ways.
| | 01:56 | Let's go ahead and get started.
| | 01:58 | Up here at the top of the screen, we don't
want to be the Structure Tab, anything related
| | 02:03 | to the text or dimensions or just think of
anything that might have letters in it, or
| | 02:07 | numbers in it, almost always
is underneath the Annotate Tab.
| | 02:12 | So we go to Annotate, here we can see our
different commands including those dimensions
| | 02:17 | and the tags that you can place in
order to be able label our columns.
| | 02:21 | But think that we are concerned
about here is going to be our text.
| | 02:25 | So come over here to where the big A
is at and go ahead and select on that.
| | 02:29 | Once you've done that we have two different
areas where most of our text properties are
| | 02:33 | going be located at.
| | 02:35 | The first area is over
here on the left-hand side.
| | 02:37 | And if we click here where
it has Text: 3/32" Arial.
| | 02:41 | We can see three different text sizes that
are currently available to us in our projects.
| | 02:46 | Now in this example, the 3/32" Arial is
going to what we use, but I will point out that
| | 02:51 | if you ever wanted to be able to make a
modification to that to have your own custom text size,
| | 02:56 | you can do that by coming over here to Edit
Type, selecting on Edit Type and then picking
| | 03:02 | what size you want the font to be.
| | 03:04 | Now this isn't just what sizes are going to be in
this view, it's what sizes are going to print at.
| | 03:09 | So in this case, it's going to be 3/32.
| | 03:11 | So anytime we would go and hit Print and
send this to a printer, it's always going to be
| | 03:15 | 3/32 as soon as we print the full size.
| | 03:18 | The font shows up here as well, this is an
Arial font and if we would click here, we
| | 03:24 | can see a list of all the standard out of
the box Windows fonts that would be available.
| | 03:30 | As a result, of that you could pick whatever
font, whatever text size you would want whenever
| | 03:34 | you are placing your notes.
| | 03:36 | So we will go ahead and click on OK,
we'll just accept the defaults to this.
| | 03:40 | The next thing we are going to do is we are
going to come up here, we will take a look
| | 03:43 | at the different commands that
we have up here on the ribbon.
| | 03:46 | The first thing that I care about
are these four boxes right here.
| | 03:50 | This first one, it just has the letter A in
it; what this indicates is that it's going
| | 03:54 | to place text without an arrow associated
with an arrow is also considered a leader.
| | 03:58 | So you might even call it
that every once in a while.
| | 04:01 | Over here, this is what's called One
Segment and as you can see in the preview it just
| | 04:06 | does one line with an arrow at the end.
| | 04:10 | The one that we'll be using is going to be
the two segment leader and it's going to have
| | 04:14 | one little line and then a second
line pointing at the piece of text.
| | 04:19 | And the third option that we have is the curved
one and it gives you sort of a more hand written
| | 04:24 | kind of looking leader.
| | 04:26 | And it has more of an arc or a curve
associated with it, as opposed to the straight lines
| | 04:30 | the other two have.
| | 04:32 | In this example, once again I am going to
come up here, I am just going to select on
| | 04:35 | two segments, move up here toward the top
of the screen and we are going to move our
| | 04:42 | mouse down here and we are going to
kind of point right in this location.
| | 04:46 | Now click right in this area it's not going to
snap to it just click and then, move your mouse up.
| | 04:52 | Click once you get up here just sort of
outside of his box, it shows up around the view.
| | 04:57 | Now move over to the right and click again.
| | 05:00 | So what we did is, we just placed that
leader that's associated with the text; it's click
| | 05:04 | once for where you want the arrow to be at; click
again for where you want that elbow to show up at.
| | 05:10 | And then move across and click for
where you want your text placement to be at.
| | 05:14 | In this example, we are going to want this
to be a 5 inch thick concrete slab, so that's
| | 05:19 | what I am going to type in, 5" CONCRETE SLAB.
| | 05:25 | Whenever you get done typing just click
somewhere out in space and it will automatically put
| | 05:30 | that text with that proper size font that was
picked off, of the list over here inside of your project.
| | 05:36 | And you can hit Escape a couple of times in order
to be able to get out of that part of the command.
| | 05:41 | Now let's go ahead and place another piece
of text down here that's going to be calling
| | 05:45 | out what this particular beam happens to be, or
what this particular column actually happens to be.
| | 05:50 | So we'll come back up here
again, we'll select on Text.
| | 05:55 | Now just so that you can see it, I'm
going to go ahead and just choose this one that
| | 05:59 | says No Leader, usually I would continue
to use the two segment, but just so we can try
| | 06:03 | it we are going to do the No Leader one.
| | 06:05 | Now if you are going to place one with No
Leader there's really two different ways you
| | 06:09 | can go about doing it.
| | 06:10 | You can either just click and then start typing
or you can draw what's called a text box which
| | 06:15 | is click, hold the mouse button down and
then do something that looks like, this it looks
| | 06:20 | like a box that's sort of like if you are
going to be selecting a group of objects.
| | 06:24 | And what that will do is it'll try to
keep all the text inside of the box.
| | 06:28 | Now I don't really care which way do you go
in this case this is only going to be one
| | 06:32 | little line of text so
it's not going to wrap around.
| | 06:34 | But in our next text example we'll see it
where it's going to be long enough to wrap around
| | 06:40 | in this text box will actually
affect what it is that we type in.
| | 06:43 | So I am just going to go ahead and let go
my mouse buttons somewhere over here and type
| | 06:47 | in WWF18X337 because that happens to be the
size of this steel member that's over here.
| | 06:57 | Now we can go ahead and just click out in
this space somewhere and that places it.
| | 07:02 | If we want to be able to move this around
after the fact, all we have to do is hit Escape
| | 07:05 | a couple of times and then, move up here click
on the arrow and you can see we can just move
| | 07:10 | this around and kind of place
it where we need to place it.
| | 07:16 | Now if we want to be able to add an arrow to
this so that can point to this area, that's
| | 07:20 | what these buttons up here now allow us to do.
| | 07:22 | So we can click the little plus (+) sign next to
whichever shape that we want to be able to create.
| | 07:28 | And in this case, we can see that there is a
straight leader option, there's an arc option.
| | 07:34 | And in this case, I am just going to go ahead
and just pick on this Straight Leader option
| | 07:37 | that shows up here.
| | 07:39 | See how this leader
comes straight out like this.
| | 07:42 | And we can click on this little dot and move
this into place, click on this dot, move it
| | 07:46 | straight up and now we have the
leader pointing at the right object.
| | 07:51 | One more piece of text we want to do and
it's going to be down here in the box and we are
| | 07:55 | going to come back up here to Text, select
on Text, we are going to do this concrete
| | 08:02 | wall and it's going to be called beyond, so
let's say concrete walls and then the word beyond.
| | 08:07 | Now I am going to once again, just do
that box if you will kind of leader.
| | 08:11 | So we are going to come in here with the text
leave out the leader associated with it,
| | 08:15 | I'm going to click once, do a box just
around this area and then, let go.
| | 08:22 | Now I am going to type in CONCRETE WALL
and I am going to do the word BEYOND.
| | 08:30 | You'll notice BEYOND was going to go over
where this box was at, so it automatically
| | 08:35 | wrapped it down to the level
down below or the line down below.
| | 08:40 | So pretty much all this leaves us to do is add a
couple of more arrows and we'll be done placing this text.
| | 08:45 | So we'll just do it the same
way that we did this up here.
| | 08:48 | Select on a piece of text, tell it that
we want to be able add a leader to it.
| | 08:53 | In fact in this case I actually want to be
able to add two leaders to it, so I am going
| | 08:56 | to pick the one on the right hand side here,
and then we are going to click on this arrow
| | 09:02 | kind of drag it down you can see that I can
drag on this little dot here and pull it up
| | 09:07 | to whichever location I wanted to be at.
| | 09:11 | And I am going to do the same thing here.
| | 09:17 | And by having the arrows in this
arrangement it sort of indicating that whether it's up
| | 09:20 | or down or wherever it is anywhere along
this concrete wall this concrete wall is beyond
| | 09:25 | and sort of in the background.
| | 09:26 | When we are using text, we can take a care of
lot of the annotation inside of our projects.
| | 09:33 | And that's all done by coming up and selecting
Text off of the ribbon and then using the
| | 09:39 | appropriate annotation tools.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating dimensioning labels| 00:00 | In this exercise, we are going to
learn how to use our Dimensioning tools.
| | 00:04 | And in order to be able to do this we are going to
dimension the lower half of our building down here.
| | 00:09 | So we are going to place the string of dimensions
that's going to go from here all the way on over.
| | 00:13 | In fact we will place three
different strings of dimensions.
| | 00:16 | So let's go ahead and zoom in here
on the lower half of our building.
| | 00:20 | Next, dimensions are annotation objects, two-dimensional
objects it only show up in the view that you place them in.
| | 00:29 | So as a result of that because are annotation
objects we are going to come up here to the
| | 00:33 | Annotate Tab and then, find
our different dimensioning tools.
| | 00:37 | One dimension I want to place first before
we place our dimension string going across,
| | 00:41 | is to show off this little angular tool here.
| | 00:44 | What it's going to allow us to do is
actually put an angular dimension sort of like with
| | 00:48 | the preview there showing us.
| | 00:50 | So if we select on Angular and then, we can
kind of look around and see if we can find
| | 00:54 | the angle that we can place this on.
| | 00:57 | In this particular case, I am just going to
place it from right here to right here, just
| | 01:02 | so we can see how the tool works.
| | 01:03 | So it's just a matter of clicking on one line,
clicking on the second line and it automatically
| | 01:09 | generates for us what that angle happens to be.
| | 01:12 | And if you just click in space it'll place it
wherever that point is that you just clicked at.
| | 01:18 | And if you hit Escape a couple of times to
get out of that it'll place that dimension
| | 01:21 | there and it will be a permanent dimension and it
will print just the way that you see it on the screen.
| | 01:26 | Now some of these other dimensions such as
a Radial or Diameter work exactly, the same
| | 01:32 | way as that Angular one did.
| | 01:34 | All you have to do is pick that circular
shape and it will automatically drop in the radial
| | 01:38 | dimension or just automatically place
a diameter dimension in that location.
| | 01:44 | Arc Length is very, very similar; you end
up picking one spot on an arc, a second spot
| | 01:49 | on an arc and it will automatically give
you a dimension between those two spots.
| | 01:53 | Now the main dimensions here that we want
to be able to focus on now are going to be
| | 01:57 | a Linear and Aligned.
| | 02:00 | Now if we are going to start what we
would really like to do is start with align.
| | 02:03 | So we will go ahead and select on Aligned up here.
| | 02:07 | Now in Aligned dimension we'll work in situations
where your dimensions aren't necessarily going
| | 02:11 | up and down or from side to side.
| | 02:14 | In this case we don't really have a dimensional
area that we can really dimension that on
| | 02:18 | and show that kind of angle going on.
| | 02:21 | But it aligns that dimensions have an
extra property about them that makes them a lot
| | 02:25 | more powerful than what your
standard dimension would be.
| | 02:28 | And that's the reason why I like to use them a lot
more often, than this Linear Dimension right here.
| | 02:34 | That extra power is that you can dimension
multiple things at a time by using an Align Dimension.
| | 02:40 | So let's go ahead and try that.
| | 02:42 | So come over here, we'll notice that there
is a dimension here it says Wall centerline
| | 02:47 | or setting here that's says Wall centerline.
| | 02:49 | Well, we can leave this for right now it's
not going to affect we are getting ready to
| | 02:54 | place, there is an option here that says
Pick and it says Individual References.
| | 02:58 | Let's change this to be Entire Walls and
there's a big Options button that shows up now.
| | 03:04 | If we click on the Options button this is
where some of the hidden power of the Align
| | 03:09 | Dimension Tool rest.
| | 03:10 | What it will do is it will automatically dimension
any openings you have in walls, it can automatically
| | 03:16 | dimension any walls that intersect the
wall you are getting ready to dimension.
| | 03:20 | But you can also automatically dimension
such things as your structural grids.
| | 03:25 | Let's go ahead and try this.
| | 03:27 | So right now let's select on
Intersecting Grids and click on OK.
| | 03:33 | Now as the wall goes all the way across, if
you pick on that wall, move straight down,
| | 03:39 | you will notice that each of the structural
grid points now have a dimension snapping to them.
| | 03:45 | You can see there's also, a dimension here
that says 15 foot and 10 foot, this is because
| | 03:49 | we have a special condition going on in our wall and
just trying to dimension that special condition as well.
| | 03:55 | That's okay, we can make modifications to that so that
dimension there, doesn't necessarily show up that way.
| | 04:00 | Now just move your dimension string completely down
and then, somewhere out here just go ahead and click.
| | 04:06 | And that will place that entire
dimension string going across.
| | 04:09 | And hit Escape a couple of times in
order to be able to get out of the command.
| | 04:13 | Now if all we wanted was this dimension to go from
structural grid to gridline, to gridline, to gridline.
| | 04:19 | All we have to do is select on this click
on the circle that shows up sort of in the
| | 04:23 | middle here and it's called Move Witness Line.
| | 04:27 | And if you click and hold your mouse button
down, move over to the structural grid that's
| | 04:31 | right next to the area where you want to
be able to get rid of the dimension and then
| | 04:35 | let go, it'll automatically move that line
over and then get rid of that extra dimension
| | 04:39 | that you didn't need.
| | 04:43 | The next kind of dimension that we are going
to do is still going to be an Aligned Dimension,
| | 04:47 | but instead of picking the entire walls, we are
just going to do the individual references this time.
| | 04:53 | And if we select here and then, select this
gridline all the way down here at the end,
| | 04:58 | we can move it down and we can see it's going
to generate in this case a 100 foot dimension,
| | 05:05 | which is the overall length
between those two different gridlines.
| | 05:09 | Now there's one more that
we can come in here and do.
| | 05:11 | And let's move in here and this time
instead of doing an Aligned Dimension; let's just
| | 05:17 | practice with doing a Linear Dimension.
| | 05:18 | Now technically, we could use
Aligned Dimension for this one as well.
| | 05:22 | But just so you get some practice with
using linear, let's choose on linear.
| | 05:27 | With the linear it isn't quite as evident
where it is that you're picking it, in fact
| | 05:31 | it gets to be really hard to see.
| | 05:32 | If you really squint and look really, really
hard you might be ale to see blue dot on your
| | 05:37 | screen whenever, you're clicking.
| | 05:39 | And it's wherever that point is that you are
selecting on that's where that dimension is
| | 05:44 | going to get placed.
| | 05:45 | In this case, I'm taking the time to just
click on each and every one of these corners
| | 05:50 | here and place in the
dimension to each one of those.
| | 06:01 | And I'll go ahead and just drag this down;
we can even drag it down here in between these
| | 06:05 | two different dimension strings and just
click once you get down here, but make sure you
| | 06:08 | click out in space if you hit the Escape key or anything
like that it'll delete the entire dimension string.
| | 06:14 | And obviously we didn't want to click all
those different points and then, accidentally
| | 06:17 | delete the entire dimension string.
| | 06:19 | One more change or modification that we can
make to this is if we zoom in here, we can
| | 06:24 | see there is a 4 foot dimension.
| | 06:26 | Well sometimes people like it when it's
inside here, but one of the things that I found is
| | 06:31 | I really dislike when these lines get broken
up this way, it sometimes makes it very hard
| | 06:35 | to read where that
dimension is getting taken to.
| | 06:38 | So one of the things that you can do is you
can select on the dimension, click on this
| | 06:42 | little dot that shows up right here.
| | 06:43 | And you can pull it out to the side.
| | 06:45 | Right, it will automatically add this little
line this leader to the end of it, indicating
| | 06:52 | where that dimension should be taken to, and
we can do the same thing over here on this end.
| | 06:56 | Alright and just pull it straight out.
| | 07:02 | Now I do want to point out one more thing
and it's possible that during this process
| | 07:05 | you accidentally clicked on one of these dimensions or
you accidentally clicked on one of the pieces of text.
| | 07:11 | If you did that and maybe you did it twice, you may
have gotten this dialog box pop-up on your screen.
| | 07:18 | Now this usually gets people excited because
they think they can come in here and change
| | 07:21 | the dimensions and they could be something
that it isn't, basically bluff or fool Revit
| | 07:27 | into giving a bad dimension.
| | 07:28 | But if you try to do that inside of Revit,
and I am just going to pick a random dimension
| | 07:33 | and then try to click on OK to that,
| | 07:36 | it gives you one of the biggest error
dialog boxes that shows up inside of the program
| | 07:40 | essentially, tells you that you
can't make changes to this dimension.
| | 07:45 | The reason is that they don't want you to
bluff or not draw things to scale in Revit,
| | 07:51 | they really want you to
make everything be to scale.
| | 07:53 | And then, if you do all your
dimensions will just workout.
| | 07:57 | So this Replace With Text is really in here
for such things as notes like field verify
| | 08:03 | or you can kind of think of any other kind
of piece of text that you might want to place
| | 08:07 | in between two different arrows and you can
replace this with whatever value that you wish.
| | 08:14 | But if you wanted to be able to add maybe a
plus or a minus or a diameter sign, before
| | 08:19 | after this number you can by doing it down here.
| | 08:23 | Also, if you need to place some piece of
text above or below you can do that as well.
| | 08:28 | And in this case, I am just going to type in
Field Verify and the line is listed as being below.
| | 08:36 | And click on OK.
| | 08:37 | And you will notice that Field Verify is now a
piece of text directly underneath that dimension
| | 08:42 | that we tried to modify.
| | 08:45 | What we need to remember is dimensioning in
Revit is simple, but you always need to be
| | 08:49 | able to select an object to dimension
and you can't fudge your dimensions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding extra detail information with detail lines| 00:00 | Drawing lines in Revit is accomplished in
individual views and it is done by using the
| | 00:04 | Line Tool found underneath
Annotate up here on the ribbon.
| | 00:08 | And here we can see this is
where the Detail Line Tool resides.
| | 00:12 | Now in order, to be able to use this tool
we first need to start thinking about, okay
| | 00:16 | what view do we want to be in, in order to
be able to first draw these detail lines out.
| | 00:21 | Where I would like to be able to add detail lines
to it's going to be in a section of our staircase.
| | 00:28 | So, since our staircase currently doesn't
have a section, we are going to need to place
| | 00:32 | a section line into our staircase.
| | 00:35 | So, up here underneath the View Tab because
we are going to be creating a Section view
| | 00:40 | we are going to select on Section.
| | 00:43 | Next, then zoom in here, and then click once
just to the right hand side of the staircase,
| | 00:50 | then move over and then click again.
| | 00:53 | Next, I want to be able to see the other side
of the staircase, too, and right now it's pointing
| | 00:58 | in this direction so I can't.
| | 00:59 | So we are just going to click on the
little double-arrows right here, in order for us
| | 01:03 | to be able to see this section looking in that
direction and be able to see the entire staircase.
| | 01:09 | Since the section has just gotten placed a
good practice is to be able to come over on
| | 01:13 | the left hand side underneath the Project
Browser and then try renaming the section
| | 01:18 | to be something that makes
maybe a little bit more sense to us.
| | 01:21 | Now I can tell you from experience that whenever
the last section that you place it will automatically
| | 01:25 | try to place it there at the bottom of the
list or in this case if you're already done
| | 01:28 | a section 1 and 2, it's going to place
this as being section number 3, so I know that
| | 01:33 | that's the one we need to work with.
| | 01:35 | And since we just cut a section through our
staircase, let's just keep this simple and
| | 01:39 | just call this section Stairs.
| | 01:42 | So to do that all you do is right-click
where it says Section 3, come up here to Rename
| | 01:47 | and then we'll rename
this Stairs and click on OK.
| | 01:53 | Now we have a section that happens to be
named Stairs, if we wanted to double-click on the
| | 01:57 | little circular shape we can go to that view
or we can just double-click where it has stairs,
| | 02:01 | and it'll take us
directly to our stairs section.
| | 02:05 | Now the next thing we need to decide is this
view that we want to be able to do our different
| | 02:09 | sort of detail work in.
| | 02:11 | And frankly at this scale and how big of a
view this is, this is probably going be some
| | 02:16 | really fine work that we are going to be doing
it's going to be down here at the bottom of the steps.
| | 02:21 | As a result of that, that's probably isn't
of the view that we really want to be either,
| | 02:24 | but we wouldn't have been able to create this
callout view which is an enlarged detail view
| | 02:30 | without creating the section first.
| | 02:33 | So now that we are in the section we are
going to come up here and create a Callout view.
| | 02:37 | In order to be able to blow the bottom
half of our staircase up so that we can see it
| | 02:43 | at a much larger scale.
| | 02:45 | Now we are going to go ahead and just click
once right here, move over and once we have
| | 02:50 | a circle roughly this shape,
go ahead and click again.
| | 02:54 | By doing this it has automatically created
another view, in this case underneath Sections
| | 02:58 | and it's being called a Callout of Stairs.
| | 03:01 | The reason why it's called that, it's
because we are currently underneath the Stairs, it
| | 03:04 | was created in Stairs and it just named it
Callout because well technically it's a little
| | 03:09 | callout bubble that we added to it.
| | 03:11 | In this case we could leave it as Callout of
Stairs, but let's go ahead and rename this as well.
| | 03:17 | And we are just going to
call this Detail at Stairs.
| | 03:20 | So you remember just select on it,
right-click, rename and Detail at Stairs.
| | 03:30 | One last thing before we go to that.
| | 03:31 | I really hate it when my callout bubbles are
inside of a floor, that makes them very hard
| | 03:36 | to read whenever they are actually
finally placed on to a sheet.
| | 03:39 | So what we need do is select on the line
that's associated with this callout, click on the
| | 03:43 | little circular shape and hold the mouse
button down and we're going to just pull this up
| | 03:46 | so that the callout is no longer
right there in the middle of that floor.
| | 03:50 | Now that we have done the cleanup let's
go ahead and go to this Detail at Stairs.
| | 03:55 | Alright, now we can see
this enlarged detail view here.
| | 03:59 | They're really a quarter inch equals a
foot probably isn't big enough for what we are
| | 04:02 | trying to accomplish here.
| | 04:04 | So let's go ahead and change this to be
three quarters of an inch equals a foot.
| | 04:08 | We can now see that the line work is automatically
adjusted for us, it's not as thick as it was.
| | 04:13 | And it just looks like a nice sort of
prettier thing to be able to draw inside of.
| | 04:18 | And when I use the term pretty, really what
we are discussing is, that it's much easier
| | 04:21 | to read and it's going to
communicate to design that much easier.
| | 04:26 | So now that we've finally done all this work,
well we can finally come up and start to use
| | 04:30 | our Line Work tools.
| | 04:32 | So underneath Annotate we are
going to move over to Detail Line.
| | 04:38 | Now our Detail Lines have a few different
options associated with them, such as Straight
| | 04:43 | Lines, Draw Rectangles, Circles, Polygons,
Arcs, Ellipses, if you've used other drafting
| | 04:50 | programs in the past you've probably had all
these different shapes available to you as well.
| | 04:55 | In this case, in the case of Revit, they
combine it all inside of one command and it allows
| | 05:00 | you to just select Detail Lines and then, pick
whatever the appropriate shape is off of the list.
| | 05:06 | Also, we'll see that there's some
different line styles associated over here, such as
| | 05:11 | Centerline, Demolished, Hidden, also there's
different thicknesses: Thin Line, Medium Lines, Wide Lines.
| | 05:19 | Now we are not going to get too much into
the actual creation of these at this point,
| | 05:23 | but in just a moment I will show you
where those settings are located at.
| | 05:26 | For this detail though I will say that we
will be using Medium lines to be draw in the
| | 05:31 | rest of our objects.
| | 05:33 | Now something you know where that property
comes from, underneath the Manage Tab here
| | 05:38 | toward the middle of your screen you are going
to have a button that says Additional Settings.
| | 05:41 | And if you select an additional settings
about halfway down the list we are going to see
| | 05:46 | such things as Line Styles,
Line Weights and Line Patterns.
| | 05:50 | Line Weights that's your thicknesses, Line
Patterns that's Center, Hidden, Dashed, your
| | 05:55 | standard drafting line types.
| | 05:58 | Line Styles, if we click on the little plus
after clicking on Line Styles, we can see
| | 06:04 | this is a list of those same kind of lines
that we had on our list that we could choose from.
| | 06:10 | It also has a Line Weights and the Line Styles
from those other two menus I just pointed out.
| | 06:15 | Finally, pretty much everything we've seen
inside of Revit is either been black or blue
| | 06:20 | so far, and the reason why most of these
color have been in place is because of the line
| | 06:24 | color that shows up here
underneath the Line Styles.
| | 06:26 | For right now we are just going to leave this the
same, so we just go ahead and click on Cancel to that.
| | 06:32 | I am going to go up to the green tab up here
it says, Modify and Place Detail Lines, Medium
| | 06:38 | Lines is going to be just fine for us.
| | 06:39 | We are going to zoom in here and pick a point.
| | 06:43 | I am going to actually in this case just
go to slightly to the right in the middle,
| | 06:46 | I am going to pick right about here and
then draw a line up in this direction.
| | 06:51 | Now this line where it's going to be indicating
and this is going to be indicating a piece
| | 06:55 | of rebar that's going to be coming up from
that point all the way and up the stairs.
| | 07:01 | And we could always use our text tools to be
able to node this after the fact if we wished.
| | 07:05 | And just kind of move it up to the end.
| | 07:08 | You can see how this has the medium line weight,
this would be about equivalent of the thin lines.
| | 07:14 | Next, let's add some more rebar looking shapes.
| | 07:18 | In this case, little circles.
| | 07:20 | So once again, to do that, come up here,
Detail Line, this time pick Circle, move down to
| | 07:27 | right around this area right here, click once
and then just make a little quarter inch circle.
| | 07:34 | Okay, if you'd ever is just snapped just a
little bit too tiny, every once a while you'll
| | 07:39 | get this message that says, Element is too
small in screen, pretty much it means is if
| | 07:43 | it ends up getting to be less than may be
a 16th of an inch, then it's going to say
| | 07:49 | it's too small in the screens so you might need
to be able to make that just a little bit bigger.
| | 07:53 | So once again, we'll just come down here to
the Circle shape, click again kind of make
| | 07:57 | a circle it's just a tiny bit bigger and maybe
even zoom in so we can actually see it, click again.
| | 08:03 | I can see this is a quarter
inch that's a size of that one.
| | 08:07 | Now we can continue to do that all the way
on up if we wished or we could just select
| | 08:11 | on that use the Copy command, make sure
that Multiple is checked, pick the intersection
| | 08:18 | out there, and just keep picking the intersection
of, intersection, intersection of all the
| | 08:23 | way on up, repeating that rebar
shape all the way on up the model.
| | 08:28 | Now the reason why we are doing this as opposed
to actually using the Rebar tools in the program
| | 08:33 | is that there are going to be occasions where
there is really no reason to model something
| | 08:37 | three-dimensionally, unless you are going
to be taking the quantity of every piece of
| | 08:40 | steel that's inside of the stairs.
| | 08:43 | And frankly, in every project
you might not need that capability.
| | 08:46 | So you might use the Line Work Tool instead
of the three-dimensional modeling tools and
| | 08:50 | in order to be able to a
create these kinds of conditions.
| | 08:54 | Also if you decide to use Line Work instead
of the 3-D tools it's going keep your model
| | 08:58 | leaner lighter and keep things faster than it
has in the process big three-dimensional entities.
| | 09:05 | Drawing detail lines in Revit is used to illustrate
conditions that otherwise, wouldn't need to
| | 09:09 | be modeled inside of the program.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using regions to create material indications and patterns| 00:00 | Regions are simple drafting tools for
creating material indications and patterns.
| | 00:05 | If you're used to an AutoCAD drawing environment,
you might be used to this being called Hatch patterns.
| | 00:10 | If you're used to doing things by hand, you
might have heard this being called Pucci pattern,
| | 00:15 | but inside of Revit it's considered a region.
| | 00:18 | Now we're going to go ahead and zoom in down
here at the bottom half of our staircase and
| | 00:23 | this just happens to be our
Detail at Stairs, Section view.
| | 00:27 | Now that we're here what we are going to do
is we are going to add a little key down here
| | 00:30 | at the bottom of the staircase.
| | 00:33 | And what this key is going to allow us to
do is be able to have some concrete to move
| | 00:36 | down here kind of a rectangular shape and
then, sort of holds the bottom of the staircase
| | 00:41 | there at the floor level.
| | 00:43 | In order of able to draw that of course we are
going to need to come up here to the Annotate
| | 00:47 | Tab, because that's where all our drafting
tools are located at, and we are going to
| | 00:51 | pick the Region command.
| | 00:54 | So let's go ahead and select on Region.
| | 00:56 | Next, we want to use our Line Work Tool.
| | 00:59 | Now I will point out that we could draw circles
and boxes and ellipses and any shape that we want to.
| | 01:05 | But in this case, just using the Line tools
is going to work just fine for us, in fact
| | 01:09 | it's probably going to be the primary
tool that you use inside of this command.
| | 01:14 | Now down here at the end of the
stairs we are going to click once.
| | 01:17 | We are going to move straight down, in this
case, we are going to come down in two and
| | 01:21 | half inches because it's
just a nice number to do.
| | 01:24 | Next, we are going to move over and we
are going to come over 10 1/2 inches.
| | 01:29 | Once we had gone there, we're going to
come straight up and then die in right here.
| | 01:37 | Now, that we've done this we are about half of the
way done in drawing where we want our region to be at.
| | 01:44 | Now the next thing is so far we have been
doing this was what's called Thin Lines and
| | 01:49 | we can see Thin Lines right here.
| | 01:50 | And Thin Lines of course indicating what thickness
the line is going to be whenever it finally gets drawn.
| | 01:57 | Maybe we don't want to use thin lines;
maybe we want to be able use a thicker line like
| | 02:01 | a Wide Line or a Medium Line.
| | 02:03 | If we do we, can select on that and
just start drawing that line shape in.
| | 02:07 | What's going to happen in this case though,
is that we need to make this be one continuous
| | 02:11 | line as we follow it all the way around.
| | 02:13 | We don't really want to have a line
here, and a line going right here.
| | 02:16 | And the reason is this is all going to be
one continuous concrete piece, so we really
| | 02:21 | don't want to have any line work in here at all.
| | 02:24 | In order of able to address that we can't
really use a line that has a certain thickness
| | 02:28 | associated with it.
| | 02:30 | That's the reason why Revit includes inside
of it this tool called Invisible Lines, which
| | 02:35 | will draw line that when we click the big green
checkmark up here will just vanish on the screen.
| | 02:40 | So let's go ahead and try that.
| | 02:42 | So we'll select on Invisible lines.
| | 02:43 | Next, we are going to pick the
Endpoint where we kind of left off at.
| | 02:49 | And even though we will adjust this later
we are just going to move down here and click
| | 02:53 | and then, click again in order to be able
to place our Invisible lines and if I zoom
| | 02:59 | in a little bit we can see
that line work we just placed.
| | 03:03 | One more thing before we click on the big
green checkmark, if we click right now it's
| | 03:08 | going to put a bunch of vertical lines
in this area that we've been drawing in.
| | 03:13 | Now the pattern that we really need is a
concrete pattern not a bunch of vertical lines.
| | 03:17 | So we're going to need to create a filled
region associated with this area right here.
| | 03:23 | So over here, under the Properties we are going to
come over here to Edit Type and click on Edit Type.
| | 03:28 | Next, you can see it says
Fill Pattern and Vertical Drafting.
| | 03:32 | Well, let's go ahead and leave this alone,
but let's create a duplicate of this and we
| | 03:38 | are going to give it a name of Concrete.
| | 03:40 | So we are going to click Duplicate and we
are going to name it Concrete and click OK.
| | 03:47 | Now that we've done that it has the same properties
as that previous pattern that we had, but
| | 03:52 | we come here to the list we can see that all
those patterns that actually were inside of
| | 03:57 | the project to begin with including
Vertical Lines still shows up here on the list.
| | 04:02 | Now that we have Concrete we are going to
come here to the Fill pattern, you can click
| | 04:06 | inside of the box, if nothing happens
automatically, come over here to the right-hand side and
| | 04:11 | click on this little box
here with the three dots in it.
| | 04:15 | And this'll take you to
your Fill Patterns dialog box.
| | 04:19 | This will give you all those different pucci
hatch patterns, fill patterns that are available
| | 04:23 | inside of the program.
| | 04:24 | Next, you can scroll up toward the top and
what we are going to be looking for is Concrete.
| | 04:29 | Here we can see that concrete pattern that
happens to be the same pattern we've been
| | 04:32 | looking at elsewhere in this view.
| | 04:35 | We'll click on OK; we'll
click on OK one more time.
| | 04:42 | Now we have a concrete pattern and we know
that when we place the big green checkmark
| | 04:46 | over here, this whole thing is going
to have the concrete fill look to it.
| | 04:50 | So let's go ahead and click
on the big green checkmark.
| | 04:53 | Now one of the things that's happened is it did
not get rid of the lines that were already there.
| | 04:59 | It's getting pretty close, you can see
it's actually masked out about half of it, but
| | 05:04 | it didn't get rid of all of them.
| | 05:06 | In order to be able to get rid of all of
them this is all we are going to have to do.
| | 05:08 | We select back on the pattern again and we
will get these little arrows that show up
| | 05:13 | right here, if we click in the arrows we can
drag it up just slightly until it's just over
| | 05:19 | the top of the black line.
| | 05:20 | I am going to do the same thing over here,
pull it up so it's just a little bit over
| | 05:24 | the top of the black line and
then, click out in the space.
| | 05:28 | Now we can start to see it was able
to clean up all those different areas.
| | 05:33 | One other thing to know is that right now
I am looking over here and I am seeing just
| | 05:35 | a little bit of extra line.
| | 05:37 | Frankly, you might not be even able to tell
that, that could be just a concrete pattern.
| | 05:41 | But just to make sure, I am just
going to click on this line one more time.
| | 05:45 | Pull it back, ever so slightly
may be pull it up just a tiny bit.
| | 05:50 | And with just a little bit of fudge factor
in here you can start to get rid of this black
| | 05:53 | line that shows up.
| | 05:55 | So we don't have to see it anymore.
| | 05:59 | Last thing I'll mention, we can still see
there's a line going across here, but so that
| | 06:03 | you know what it is that you're looking at.
| | 06:05 | This isn't something that we weren't able
use the term Mask Out, what that actually is,
| | 06:10 | is just the symbol indication for the first
floor level that's going across at that location.
| | 06:17 | So by using your Region tools you can create
any type of look that you require to represent
| | 06:21 | different materials in your details in your
elevation views as well as your plan views.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using detail components to add common two-dimensional items| 00:00 | Detail components are used for quick
insertion of commonly drawn two-dimensional items.
| | 00:06 | They are most often used in section views
and drafting views to document often drawn
| | 00:10 | items that don't require modeling in 3-D.
| | 00:13 | Where we can find those is going to be
underneath Annotate and then, sort of toward the middle
| | 00:18 | here we have this option for Component.
| | 00:21 | If we select on the word Component, we can
then see the list of our different detail
| | 00:26 | components that are currently loaded in the
project over here underneath properties in
| | 00:31 | the type selector list.
| | 00:33 | Now what we are looking at right here are
CMU blocks as well as some Metal Decking and
| | 00:39 | in this case it says, a W-Wide Flange-Section.
| | 00:42 | Now I am not going to actually place this,
but just so you can see it if I click on the
| | 00:45 | W12X26 and move my mouse over, we can
now see we have that steel beam shape.
| | 00:52 | If I moved over here instead change that to
be a CMU block shape, move back over and then,
| | 00:58 | if I would want to place this kind of object
into my view all I would have to do is click.
| | 01:03 | Now we will be doing that here on a moment
but I do want to point out that we're not
| | 01:07 | just limited to these shapes that
are coming in our project by default.
| | 01:11 | What we can do is that we can come over here to
where it has Load Family and select on Load Family.
| | 01:19 | So once you clicked on Load Family,
there's going to be option here for Detail Items.
| | 01:23 | If you double-click on that here we have
our different divisions and we can choose from
| | 01:29 | one of these different divisions what kind of
detail that we might want to load into our project.
| | 01:34 | For instant if we decide to go into Masonry.
| | 01:36 | You can just go ahead and double-click on that.
| | 01:39 | We have our different further
divisions that we can pick on.
| | 01:42 | And in this case, maybe we
want to do Concrete Unit Masonry.
| | 01:47 | Here, if we click on one of these options
and then use the arrow keys on our keyboard
| | 01:52 | we can start to scroll through all these
different two-dimensional components that we could decide
| | 01:57 | to just load directly into our project.
| | 02:00 | It could be different steel shapes, obviously
masonry units, wood shapes, trusses, you name it
| | 02:06 | there is a good chance that you can find
it somewhere, as a detail component inside
| | 02:11 | of Revit just coming by default.
| | 02:14 | One other thing that I'll mention is if you
ever want to be able to create these things
| | 02:17 | from scratch it is possible to do that as well.
| | 02:19 | I am just going to hit Cancel to this.
| | 02:23 | All you have to do is come up here to the
big R, you are going to do a New>Family and
| | 02:31 | then, down here on the list you'll see
that there's option for Detail Item and you'll
| | 02:36 | just double-click on that, it'll open up
what's called the Family Editor and then, you could
| | 02:40 | start drawing in one of these detail components.
| | 02:44 | Now we will be doing some modifications to
a detail component here in just a moment so
| | 02:48 | I am not going to click on Open right now.
| | 02:50 | But this is where you can find the base template to
be able to draw any of these detail components in.
| | 02:55 | So I am going to go ahead and move over here
and hit Cancel and we are going to go ahead
| | 02:59 | and insert in our very first
detail component into this view.
| | 03:02 | Now the detail component that we want to
place is going to be this Metal Deck component and
| | 03:08 | I am going to pick on
this 1 1/2 inch Metal Deck.
| | 03:13 | Next, move over here into the project and
here we can see that ribbing that's associated
| | 03:19 | with the Metal Deck, usually
if you are cutting in section.
| | 03:21 | Now, I realize that this particular floor
that we are getting ready to place this in,
| | 03:25 | technically it's a slab it doesn't really
have this Metal deck associated with it.
| | 03:30 | But if this had been a flooring condition
where the Metal Deck would actually need to be in.
| | 03:35 | This is a great representation of
how you would go about placing it in.
| | 03:38 | So, next I am just going to
move over here and click once.
| | 03:44 | Keep moving over, click again you will
almost feel them snap in the place really once it
| | 03:50 | get kind of to the end of another one.
| | 03:51 | So what you can do even spacing but there
is a better way to be evenly spacing this
| | 03:57 | Metal Deck going all the way on across.
| | 04:00 | In order, to be able to do that there is
actually another command which is directly related
| | 04:04 | to this command that we are currently in.
| | 04:07 | So underneath Annotate, we are going to
look for Component, but instead of clicking on
| | 04:11 | Component we are going to look for this
little triangular shape that shows up right next
| | 04:14 | to it, click on that and this time we are
going to use a Repeating Detail Component.
| | 04:19 | A Repeating Detail Component is exactly, what
it sounds like; it's a Detail Component just
| | 04:24 | like we just placed, except it allows
itself to be repeated again and again and again.
| | 04:29 | Now if we look over here on the list we currently
have CMU, but there's also an option for Metal Deck.
| | 04:36 | Let's go ahead and click on that Metal Deck.
| | 04:38 | We are going to pick the endpoint
where that last detail component was at.
| | 04:45 | And then just move straight on over, you can see how
it's repeating that detail again and again and again.
| | 04:51 | Right now it's showing up on the underside
that's not really a big deal for us; all we
| | 04:56 | have to do is hit the Spacebar and it
will automatically flip it to the other side.
| | 05:01 | And then just click, once you
get out to the end of the view.
| | 05:04 | So you can see how easy it is to
repeat a detail component again and again.
| | 05:09 | One thing that I would like to do with this
detail component though is right now, we are
| | 05:12 | still seeing the concrete going through it
and realistically in this condition there
| | 05:16 | wouldn't be any concrete in here.
| | 05:18 | So we are going to need to come in here and modify the
detail component so we can no longer see that concrete.
| | 05:24 | So to do it we are going to select on one
of the detail components, in this case this
| | 05:27 | one piece of Metal Deck.
| | 05:29 | And we are going to come up here to Edit Family.
| | 05:32 | And when we click on Edit Family it's going to take
us immediately into what's called the Family Editor.
| | 05:39 | This is the exact same environment that I
was talking about earlier where we could draw
| | 05:42 | one of these things from scratch.
| | 05:43 | The only difference is this already has 1, 2,
3, 4, 5 lines already drawn inside of it
| | 05:50 | and it just happens to be this particular
detail component that we have been placing.
| | 05:55 | Now what we are going to need to do
in order to be able to modify this
| | 05:58 | is either, A, we could select on the
individual lines and then make changes to it, this is
| | 06:03 | just like using our normal
line work tools inside of Revit.
| | 06:07 | Or what's going to really help us in this
case, to be able to get rid of that extra
| | 06:11 | material, is we're going to need to
create a Masking Region on the inside of this.
| | 06:18 | Now a Masking Region, its whole job in
life is to be able to mask out other materials
| | 06:22 | that might be in the way.
| | 06:24 | So we are going to go ahead
and select on Masking Region.
| | 06:27 | Next, over here there is this option here, it
says Detail Items, we want to choose Invisible lines.
| | 06:35 | Detail Items is actually a line style that
they created inside of this template and so
| | 06:40 | is Invisible lines.
| | 06:41 | If you use Invisible lines, these are lines
that will not show up in the view that they've
| | 06:46 | been drawn in essentially.
| | 06:49 | So we are going to select each of these
points using our Line Work Tool and just sort of
| | 06:53 | play connect dots all the way around our detail.
| | 06:57 | And then click the big green checkmark,
and then click somewhere out here in space.
| | 07:03 | Right now we really can't see much going on
here, but the reason is, is it's just a little
| | 07:07 | white masking out background
that's showing up here.
| | 07:11 | Now we need to load this into our project.
| | 07:13 | So we can come up here to Load into
Project and just click on that big button there.
| | 07:18 | If you have more than one project open, it will
ask you which project do you want to load it in.
| | 07:22 | After you do that you may get this menu that
says, You are trying to load the Family Metal
| | 07:28 | Deck and it goes on, but essentially it's
asking do you want to update the current family
| | 07:33 | that's in your project and
the answer is yes, we do.
| | 07:37 | And when we do that, keep an eye on each of
these because we added that masking region
| | 07:42 | in, we should no longer see that
material there in the background.
| | 07:47 | See how it just masked that material out
in each and every one of these locations.
| | 07:51 | Now it's important to remember that whenever we
are doing this, this not a three-dimensional item.
| | 07:55 | If we need to place this in other
views we would have to draw it again.
| | 08:00 | Now when I say that this is now still
available to us over here on our list, so if we ever
| | 08:06 | need to be able to place one of these
detail items in it's not a big deal, all the
| | 08:10 | way from here on out, all we have to do is
come up here to Annotate and then pick the
| | 08:14 | detail component off of the list.
| | 08:17 | But this won't automatically show up in each
and every section, you are going to have to
| | 08:21 | draw it again section by section by section,
if you want the same level of detail to show
| | 08:26 | up in each and every one of them.
| | 08:29 | So our detail component are perhaps the fastest way
to draw and document commonly experience conditions.
| | 08:35 | They can be created by using the Drafting tools
that we find up their underneath the Annotate Tab.
| | 08:40 | Then all that's left is to simply insert that
detail in to any view that you may require it in.
| | 08:45 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Schedules and LegendsCreating column schedules| 00:00 | Part of the advantage of using Revit is the
fact that it's built on a database, that database
| | 00:05 | can query the information associated with
each family to create schedules on the fly.
| | 00:10 | To better illustrate this let's go ahead and
create a special kind of schedule, one that's
| | 00:15 | called a Column Schedule.
| | 00:16 | So let's go ahead and move up here to View
up on the ribbon and select on View because
| | 00:22 | we're going to be creating a schedule view
which happens to be a view of Revit's database.
| | 00:27 | Now we're going to look for our schedules and
it's this button right up here, we'll click
| | 00:32 | on that and then you'll always get this pull-down
menu whenever you are getting ready to create a schedule.
| | 00:36 | In this case, we want to do
a Graphical Column Schedule.
| | 00:40 | Now we really need to be careful here,
because if we blink we're going to miss it,
| | 00:44 | we're going to click and suddenly
it's created the entire schedule.
| | 00:48 | We're not going to worry too much about the
message that is just popped up for right now,
| | 00:51 | what its saying is that it didn't create a
schedule for the two little slanting columns
| | 00:55 | that were down there and it's because they had
some special properties associated with them.
| | 00:59 | But for your typical everyday columns your
average everyday column schedule like this
| | 01:05 | will just automatically on-the-fly.
| | 01:07 | So let's go ahead and take
a look what we have here.
| | 01:10 | Right now, it just looks like some just
straight lines which is basically what it is and the
| | 01:14 | reason why is because right now
we're at a coarse level of detail.
| | 01:18 | If we change this to be a fine level of
detail, we can now see our individual columns and
| | 01:24 | what we're really looking at here is each and
every column that happens to be at a specific
| | 01:29 | grid throughout the entire project.
| | 01:33 | So if I zoom down here we can see the
columns for A-1, A-2, A-3 and if they sit at that
| | 01:39 | column location then they're
going to show up on the list here.
| | 01:43 | As a matter of fact, if you would end up selecting
on any of these columns, you'll see the properties
| | 01:47 | related to that specific column over here
underneath Properties, not that you would
| | 01:52 | ever do this next step, but I will state that
you could even come in here and choose a different
| | 01:57 | column off of the list, it automatically
update here it automatically update in all of your
| | 02:01 | elevations as well, in plain view, 3-D,
everywhere throughout the entire project.
| | 02:06 | The reason this is that once again at its
heart Revit is just a gigantic database.
| | 02:11 | So if you change the information is one spot
it'll update that information, those columns,
| | 02:16 | those beams, those everything
throughout the entire project.
| | 02:20 | That being stated, we saw how
fast it was able to create this.
| | 02:24 | Now this may or may not be the
way we would want it to look.
| | 02:27 | Now if we want it to have different sorts
of line weights, line representations maybe
| | 02:31 | different fonts.
| | 02:33 | All that can be controlled actually
through the properties of the schedule itself.
| | 02:37 | So to do that all you have to do is click
some where onto a blank area and then look
| | 02:41 | over here in the Properties.
| | 02:43 | Now if we scroll down on the Properties here,
we could see a variety of different options.
| | 02:48 | One of those things is Text Appearance, if
you click on Edit to that, this is where you
| | 02:52 | can change such things as the fonts what
their size is, how they display their widths all
| | 02:58 | that kind of information.
| | 02:59 | You notice there is a tab
here that says Grid Appearance.
| | 03:03 | There will also be a button over here that
has the same thing and from here you can change
| | 03:07 | such things as what the actual dimensions are
of these grids and that kind of information.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to go ahead and hit Cancel to
this, just to get out of the dialog box.
| | 03:17 | You'll see there's also options here
for Include Off shows as being Gri.
| | 03:21 | Well, if you move your mouse until you just
see this little black symbol, I have going
| | 03:26 | on right here, you can click and hold your
mouse button down and drag this column out
| | 03:30 | to be able to read more that information.
| | 03:33 | In this case, it's saying Include Off-Grid
Columns so any columns that aren't necessary
| | 03:38 | on a structural grid, also there's an option
here for do you want to group similar locations.
| | 03:44 | Now if you decide to group similar locations,
what's it's going to do is that any time that
| | 03:47 | the same columns are going to end showing
up again and again and again they can then
| | 03:52 | be grouped together so we
don't have this entire long list.
| | 03:55 | All we would see just those specific column
conditions and the properties associated with them.
| | 04:01 | So let's go ahead and take a look at that,
by just putting a check mark here next to
| | 04:03 | Group Similar Locations.
| | 04:05 | You'll notice how on-the-fly this ended up
updating; each of these happen to be the exact
| | 04:10 | same column throughout the entire project which
is why this went down to a list of essentially 1.
| | 04:17 | We can see it's grouped by First-Floor, Second-
Floor, Third-Floor and it's trying to push all those
| | 04:22 | different column
abbreviations just into one cell.
| | 04:25 | So it's not quite willing to fit, but you
get the idea that by just putting the check
| | 04:29 | mark here you can make
this chart be much smaller.
| | 04:33 | Also, if you look down on these properties
just a little bit more, we can see such things
| | 04:36 | as what the name of the schedule is going to be.
| | 04:40 | Moving further down there's an option
here for Top Level and Bottom Level.
| | 04:45 | So if we don't want to see all the columns
on this schedule, we just want to see between
| | 04:48 | certain floors, we can specify that.
| | 04:51 | There is all of these options here for Column
Location Start and Column Locations End, that's
| | 04:56 | going to be between columns and you
specify A-1, B-1 and specify between those column
| | 05:03 | grids as to which columns you
want to see on the schedule.
| | 05:07 | Now one of the reasons why you might decide
to do that is if maybe you have hundreds and
| | 05:11 | hundreds of columns and there's no way
they're all going to fit on a single sheet; by doing
| | 05:16 | this you can create essentially several
individual schedules each one can have their own properties
| | 05:22 | up there and each schedule could then show
up here on the list and you can just drag
| | 05:27 | each schedule onto each sheet
that you would want to have it on.
| | 05:31 | So, my leveraging Revit's built-in database
capabilities and it's being able to keep track
| | 05:36 | of this being column or whatever kind of object, creating
a column schedule is really an extremely fast process.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating footing schedules| 00:00 | A footing schedule is much like a column schedule
but it's created in a slightly different way.
| | 00:05 | Let's go ahead and take a look at
how a footing schedule is put together.
| | 00:09 | To begin with we're just going to come up
here to the top of the screen, go to the View
| | 00:12 | tab on the ribbon and then we're
going to create a new kind of schedule.
| | 00:16 | This schedule is going to be a
Schedule/Quantity schedule.
| | 00:19 | In fact, it's partly the most common
kind a schedule that you would use.
| | 00:23 | So we're going to go ahead and click on that.
| | 00:25 | Next, we want to able to create just a
new schedule for these particular footings.
| | 00:31 | So we're going to come down on the list and
one of things that you'll notice is that there
| | 00:34 | really isn't a structural footing schedule here.
| | 00:37 | So what we're going to need to do
is a Structural Foundation schedule.
| | 00:41 | So Structural Foundations and there's two
different ways, to go about doing this; one
| | 00:45 | is Schedule building components
the other is a Schedule key.
| | 00:49 | Now traditionally what you really want
to do is a Schedule building components.
| | 00:53 | The reason is that this is the kind of
schedule that was schedule automatically based on the
| | 00:57 | properties of the objects that
happened to be inside the model.
| | 01:01 | A schedule key on the other hand is a manually
filled in schedule that you can take the time
| | 01:05 | that just type in all the information for it.
| | 01:08 | Every once in a while you'll find a
scheduled key is more appropriate but for this kind
| | 01:12 | of work, this kind of schedule; a Schedule
building components makes a lot more sense.
| | 01:16 | So we'll go ahead and come
down here and click on OK.
| | 01:19 | The next thing, we need to do is fill in
the information that's going to actually be on
| | 01:23 | the schedule itself.
| | 01:23 | But the first thing, we're going to want to
add to this, is going to be the Type Mark.
| | 01:27 | So we're going to move down here, and
select on Type Mark and click on Add.
| | 01:32 | The next piece of information
is going to be the Type.
| | 01:35 | So move up here find Type and click Add.
| | 01:39 | Now we're going to do this for two more columns,
one is going to be for width and the other
| | 01:42 | is going to be for length.
| | 01:45 | So this is all going to be reporting
information about these footings.
| | 01:50 | Once you have these in place the next thing
we want to do is go over to the next tab and
| | 01:54 | this is going to be the Filter tab.
| | 01:56 | Now right now, anything that happens to be
considered a structural foundation is going
| | 02:00 | to show up on the schedule if we would just
click on OK to that right now and that's really
| | 02:05 | too much information for what it is that
we want to be able to generate report on.
| | 02:09 | So as a result of that, we need to set up
some special conditions here that's just going
| | 02:13 | to pick out those items
that we want it to pick out.
| | 02:16 | So in order to do this we're going to come
in here, and we're going to set up a filter
| | 02:19 | and it's going to be based off of the type of mark
that we put in here from fields from the step before.
| | 02:25 | Now that type mark in equal or does not equal
or can be any of this information we see here
| | 02:30 | in the pull-down list.
| | 02:32 | But in this case we are
going to start with begins with.
| | 02:35 | So we'll come down here select with begins
with, and the information we are going to
| | 02:39 | enter in it's going to be the letter F and
then we're going to put a little and it's
| | 02:43 | going to look like a minus
sign, it's a dash in there.
| | 02:47 | After we've done that we're going to move
over to the next tab which is Sorting/Grouping
| | 02:51 | and we'll come back and show where this
property is associated with those particular footings
| | 02:55 | that we need to schedule.
| | 02:57 | So we'll come in here to
Schedules and Grouping next.
| | 02:59 | If we want to put this in a specific order
at this point we could, we could tell it to
| | 03:03 | sort by the Type Mark or the
Type or whatever the case may be.
| | 03:07 | For right now, I am just going to leave this
at none, but it was a specific order we wanted
| | 03:11 | to be in so it would be A first, Bs, Cs whatever,
then we could just do that by the type mark for instance.
| | 03:19 | Alright, the next option down here is going to
be either Grand totals or Itemize every instance.
| | 03:25 | Well, in this case, I have so many of these
Fs that I don't really necessarily need to
| | 03:30 | itemize every instance; just anytime there's one
that's different than I want to show up on the schedule.
| | 03:36 | So I'm just going to clear out the box it
says, Itemize every instance because I don't
| | 03:41 | want a 20 category long thing I have to deal
with, but I will put Grand totals down here,
| | 03:46 | and the reason is I'd like to have a sort of a
total count of what all my different foundations
| | 03:52 | are going to be inside of the project.
| | 03:54 | I'll point out as well but there's a
Formatting as well, as an Appearance Tab.
| | 03:59 | Underneath the Formatting Tab here, we can see that
there is a Type Mark, there is Type, Width, and Length.
| | 04:04 | If any of these had information that could
be calculated such as cost, or total square
| | 04:10 | footages or something along those lines,
then we could put a checkmark next to Calculated
| | 04:14 | totals here and then when it came a time to do
the totals like we saw here on Sorting/Grouping
| | 04:19 | it would automatically tell us what the
total either cost would be, total square footage
| | 04:23 | would be, that kind of information.
| | 04:24 | Now, we have all the information, I
believe on here that we pretty much need.
| | 04:28 | So we're just going to come in here,
we're going to click on OK for right now.
| | 04:32 | Right now, the schedule is showing up as
being blank and the reason is we put that filter
| | 04:36 | in on that second tab that we had going across the top
and it had the F and that minus (-) sign right next to it.
| | 04:42 | Well, everything is blank because there
currently are no foundations that have that F and minus
| | 04:47 | (-) sign next to it
currently loaded inside the model.
| | 04:50 | So that's something we're
going to need to do now.
| | 04:53 | If we come up here to the little house, the
3-D view, and select on it we can then spin
| | 04:58 | this around by holding down the Shift key
and the wheel on the mouse and we can see each
| | 05:03 | of these footings that we have, or in
particular, what we really care about are each of these
| | 05:07 | rectangular shapes right here, and we want
each and every one of these to be able to
| | 05:12 | show up on the schedule and we can see
the properties for those on the schedule.
| | 05:17 | So the fastest way to do that is to simply
select on one, right-click after it's been
| | 05:22 | highlighted and we're going to Select All
Instances of this kind of footing in the entire project.
| | 05:28 | Notice, how they all turn blue, in fact if
there had been some off the screen, since
| | 05:32 | we selected the entire project,
they would have turned blue as well.
| | 05:36 | Once they've all been selected we can go up
to their Type properties, that's by clicking
| | 05:41 | on Edit Type and we can enter in
some certain information about these.
| | 05:45 | Now in this case, it's going to be the
Type Mark and in this case we're just going to
| | 05:49 | do F- and now, technically we could put any
piece of information that we wanted in here,
| | 05:54 | the F is going to stand for footing, the
dash or the minus sign is just sort of the space
| | 05:59 | in between the next thing.
| | 06:00 | If we had 14 different types of footings
this could be F1, F2, F3, F4, in this case I'm
| | 06:07 | going to leave it blank, but there's absolutely
no reason why we couldn't put F12 or any sort
| | 06:12 | of number like that, and the reason is in
that filter for the schedule that we originally
| | 06:16 | set up, we told it to be a Type
Mark that begins with F and dash.
| | 06:22 | So as long as this type mark starts with the
F and the dash it'll show up on the schedule.
| | 06:27 | We'll click on OK to that, now let's take the time
to go back to our schedule and take a look at it.
| | 06:31 | So we're going to come back down on the list
we're going to try to find Schedules/Quantities
| | 06:35 | under the Project Browser and then, just double-
click Structural Foundation Schedule and now,
| | 06:40 | we can see that it has the type mark of F- we
can see the type of footing that it is as
| | 06:47 | well as the dimensions
that are associated with it.
| | 06:51 | Now I'm going to leave the title of this alone,
but if we wanted to call it footing schedules,
| | 06:55 | all you'd have to do is come up here on the
list, highlight inside here and then you could
| | 07:00 | just type in whatever it is that you
wanted to call it such as Footing Schedule.
| | 07:04 | So schedules can automatically generate their
totals on virtually anything that you want to schedule.
| | 07:10 | All you need to do is specify the properties
by which you want to pull that information
| | 07:14 | and Revit will take care of the rest.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding legend components to a legend| 00:00 | Legends take their information from
families already loaded in the project and allow us
| | 00:04 | to create graphical representations of them
to be used in schedules, drawing legends and
| | 00:10 | other things that we might need to
be able to display in our projects.
| | 00:14 | In order to be able to do this we
need to be inside of a Legend View.
| | 00:18 | So we need to create a Legend View.
| | 00:21 | Up here on the ribbon, we need to select on
View and then look for the little legend symbol
| | 00:25 | and it's going to be over here toward the
right-hand side and we're going to click on
| | 00:29 | Legends in order to be able to create a legend.
| | 00:30 | So select the word Legend.
| | 00:32 | Next, it's going to asking for a New Legend
View and we're going to want to be able to
| | 00:38 | call this, let's just
call this Legend Component.
| | 00:41 | Next, it's going to be asking for a scale.
| | 00:43 | The scale is kind of up to you, we can
always change it down, here, after the fact.
| | 00:47 | In this case, then I'm just going to change it
to be one inch equals a foot and click on OK.
| | 00:53 | Now something that I mentioned is that legends
take the information from families are already
| | 00:58 | loaded into the project.
| | 00:59 | In this case, it's going to be taking the
symbology from those families, which is already loaded
| | 01:04 | into the project and we're going to be
able to place it in this, blank drawing area.
| | 01:09 | When we do that it means that we can start
creating legends different sorts of schedules,
| | 01:14 | whatever the case may be,
based on the images that we see.
| | 01:18 | So we're going to come up here to
Annotate and click on the Annotate Tab.
| | 01:23 | And the kind of component we want to be
able to put in here is a legend component.
| | 01:27 | So don't just click on the word Component
right here, but click on the little down arrow
| | 01:31 | that shows there, and make sure
you select on Legend Component.
| | 01:36 | Once you've done that on the Options Bar
going across the top of the screen we can see that
| | 01:40 | we have Ceilings, Basic Ceiling, Generic.
| | 01:43 | Well, what this it saying is that this is
just the first of the different families that
| | 01:47 | we have available to us, that can be shown in
some sort of either plan or elevation view.
| | 01:53 | In this case, just click on that and let's
scroll down on here and see if we can find
| | 01:57 | anything else that maybe we would want to
create a legend component out of or be able
| | 02:01 | to say, this object, if it looks
this way, is this type of object.
| | 02:06 | Well, looking down here on the list one of
the things that I think that most people are
| | 02:10 | going to be able to spot and go, I
recognize that, is going to be our structural columns.
| | 02:16 | In this case, I see a W-Wide
flange Column which is a W14X43.
| | 02:22 | Let's go ahead and click on
that and see what it looks like.
| | 02:25 | Now what we're looking at is how this
column would look like in a Floor Plan view.
| | 02:30 | If we decided to click in order to be able to place
this, we can see there is the outline of the column.
| | 02:36 | If we change this from being Floor Plan view
to being front elevation (Elevation: Front)
| | 02:40 | view, we could change this to the Right or
anything else, in this case, just make sure it's front.
| | 02:43 | I'm just going to click and I'll replace it,
kind of zoom out, there we can see it from
| | 02:48 | the Front Elevation view; look at what it
looks like from the left-hand side you'll
| | 02:52 | even notice there's a blue dash line, that
shows up going across the top of the screen
| | 02:56 | and that's going to allow us to line these
different components up, and I'll go ahead
| | 02:59 | and just click to place them.
| | 03:02 | That being said we could choose from any of
these other things that happen to be on list.
| | 03:07 | If you want to see a picture of what the
floor look like in a section view we could select
| | 03:11 | on one of these different floors and move
it over here and we can see what that floor
| | 03:15 | is going to look like
inside of the section view.
| | 03:18 | Whenever you are dealing with these legends
we always have to remember the purpose of
| | 03:21 | legends and in particular, the legend
components, is to be able to show the way these parts
| | 03:25 | actually look like inside of our Plan view.
| | 03:29 | If they would happen to change for instance if
may this floor would get updated, the properties
| | 03:33 | the thickness of it might get updated, the
Legend component would update automatically
| | 03:38 | and it would display whatever the
latest changes would happen to be.
| | 03:41 | Legends communicate the way items are
represented within the project environment.
| | 03:45 | Our legend components allow us to be able
to place these things in our legends and know
| | 03:50 | that we're going to have good consistent quality
and if the symbology would change in the project
| | 03:55 | it will also change on our Legend.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a symbol legend from scratch| 00:00 | In this video we're going to show the
process of creating a Legend from scratch.
| | 00:04 | In order to first do this, of course we
need to be able to create our own Legend View.
| | 00:08 | So underneath View we're going to come up
here, and we're going to create a Legend View.
| | 00:13 | So select on Legends then pick
the word Legend off the list.
| | 00:17 | We now have the option to name our Legend
View; in this case let's call it a Symbol
| | 00:21 | Legend, because that's going to be the
type of Legend that we're going to try to do.
| | 00:26 | Next, for the scale, 1 inch equals a foot works
just fine, so if it's not already the default
| | 00:32 | for you come over here to the pull up list
and find the one inch equals a foot and select
| | 00:37 | on that and click on OK.
| | 00:41 | We're now inside of our
blank legend drawing environment.
| | 00:44 | Now, since we're going to be doing a Symbol
Legend, the kind of entities that we are going
| | 00:49 | to be placing in here are
going to be considered symbols.
| | 00:52 | These are two-dimensional line work kind of
entities that get placed here in our blank drawing sheet.
| | 00:57 | So to find those, and because they are two
dimensional, we're going to come up to the
| | 01:01 | Annotate tab and the Annotate Tab pretty much
holds almost all of the two-dimensional objects
| | 01:07 | that are really inside of Revit and from the
Annotate Tab we're going to come all the way
| | 01:11 | over to the right-hand side and
we're going to pick on the Symbol icon.
| | 01:17 | Once we've done that we can look over here on
the left and we can see underneath Properties
| | 01:21 | we have our type selector list and from our
type selector list we have a big wide range
| | 01:26 | of symbols that we can place in.
| | 01:28 | This range is everything from Section
Symbols to Weld Symbols to typical notes.
| | 01:34 | Most of that symbology is all
going to be considered a symbol.
| | 01:37 | Now for this we're just going to place in
six of our symbols, we're going to put some
| | 01:41 | text next to it and then we're going to put
a nice little title on the top of our Legend
| | 01:46 | in order to be able to finish it off.
| | 01:47 | To begin with let's go
ahead and find our symbols.
| | 01:50 | In this instance I want to drop in a
handful of Weld Symbols to begin with.
| | 01:55 | So this is alphabetical so we're going to
be looking for our Ws and we're going to drop
| | 01:59 | in a top Weld Symbol to begin with.
| | 02:02 | I'll zoom in just a little
bit so that we can see it.
| | 02:05 | I will point out to any place that there is
blue you can click on it and if you needed
| | 02:09 | to put in any kind of information in
those spots, you can just by typing in.
| | 02:13 | So if I would select on one, click and then
I could type a letter or a number if I wish.
| | 02:19 | In this case I'm just going
to leave it the way that it is.
| | 02:22 | Next we're going to drop in five more symbols.
The next one is going to be the Weld Symbol
| | 02:27 | Both, previous one was Top,
this one is going to be Both.
| | 02:32 | You can kind of see how they like to line
up with one another; you're going to get this
| | 02:35 | blue line here that says yes they are lined up.
| | 02:39 | The one after this is going
to be Weld Symbol Back Weld.
| | 02:42 | So Weld Symbol and now we're looking
for Back Weld, it shows up right here.
| | 02:48 | Now they don't have to be perfectly aligned but I
usually like to do that just to keep things clean.
| | 02:54 | There is Weld Symbol Melt Thru and that's
towards the very bottom of the list here, and
| | 03:01 | we can drop that on.
| | 03:02 | There's going to be another one and this
time I don't really want to us a Weld Symbol,
| | 03:06 | I'd like to sort of get away from doing that
and let's go ahead and put a View Title on here.
| | 03:12 | So we're going to look for the Vs.
| | 03:14 | Here we have a View Title, we'll drop this on,
you know it doesn't line up quite as nice
| | 03:20 | and neat because of the way it's
constructed, it's not the same kind of symbol.
| | 03:23 | But you can kind of eyeball it
and get it in the right spot.
| | 03:26 | And then we're going to also place in
a View Reference right underneath that.
| | 03:30 | Now, the next thing we're going to need to do is we
need to draw in the outside border for this Legend.
| | 03:37 | There aren't any tools in Revit that's going
to automate this process for us, but there
| | 03:40 | are a few different things that we can do
to may be help speed this up a little bit.
| | 03:43 | So, the first thing we can do is we are going
to come up here and we're going to use Detail
| | 03:47 | Lines in order to be able to draw
in the outside border of our Legend.
| | 03:51 | So select on Detail Line, you can select on
whatever line width that makes you comfortable.
| | 03:55 | In this case I'm just going
to stick with Medium Lines.
| | 03:59 | In order to make this a little bit quicker
we are going to come up here and we're going
| | 04:01 | to select on the Rectangle Tool, click once and
then just sort of move over in this direction.
| | 04:08 | Now what I'm going to be looking for is to
create a box that's about 8 foot by 7 foot.
| | 04:12 | That should be plenty big enough for all of
this symbology in fact it might be a little
| | 04:16 | bit too big for all of
this symbology to be honest.
| | 04:19 | But it's just a nice almost
standard looking shape about it.
| | 04:24 | Once we have an 8 foot by 7 foot box, the
next thing that we can do is we can use our
| | 04:29 | Line Work Tool to continue on and in this case
I'm going to select on Detail Line and I'm
| | 04:34 | just going to move straight down, here on the
side, one foot down I'm going to click once,
| | 04:38 | and then I'm going to move
straight over to the other side and click.
| | 04:42 | Now that I have that line there, I'm just
going to copy this line down multiple times
| | 04:46 | so that I have each of my different
spots that I can put my symbology.
| | 04:50 | So, select on the line, come up here to Copy;
we need to have a base point for our copy.
| | 04:55 | I'll also make sure that Multiple is check marked
and click here at the intersection of these two lines.
| | 05:02 | Now we're just going to do reduced into intersection
of, intersection of, intersection of or endpoint of,
| | 05:05 | all the way on down; until we
haven't evenly broke up Symbol Legend.
| | 05:12 | Now on one side we are going to have our symbols,
on the other side we're going to have text
| | 05:16 | associated with them.
| | 05:18 | In order to be able to break this up in two
we need to draw yet another line, we're going
| | 05:21 | to do it from the mid point of
this to this location right here.
| | 05:26 | Now it gets to be a little bit easy, we can
just select on all these, kind of move them
| | 05:30 | all in one big mask migration on over here.
| | 05:33 | I kind of tried to center this one up, so
I wouldn't have to adjust it too much.
| | 05:38 | Next select on one of these and just kind of
bring each one of these into their own cells.
| | 05:42 | You don't have to be perfect about this; we're
not actually putting together a set of working
| | 05:47 | drawings at the moment.
| | 05:48 | But the more that you get into the habit of
trying to be accurate and put everything in line,
| | 05:53 | the faster you'll be able to build those skills up
when it comes time to actually produce your own sets.
| | 05:58 | Now that we get this up here and they're all
basically lined up with one another, we now
| | 06:02 | need to put some text in each one of these
describing what each one of these different
| | 06:06 | items happen to be.
| | 06:08 | So we're going to have four pieces of text,
they're going to be talking about Welds and
| | 06:11 | two they are going to be talking about Views.
| | 06:14 | So we're going to come up here and we're
going to select Text off of the Annotate Ribbon
| | 06:18 | in order to be able to
begin to label these Legends.
| | 06:22 | Now this 3/32 Arial realistically might be
the right size by when it's just to be able
| | 06:26 | to read it very well on the screen so I'm
going to change this to be 1/8 inch Arial.
| | 06:31 | Move over here and then just click somewhere
around the area were I currently have my cursor.
| | 06:37 | We can always move this later if need be and
we're going to type in Weld Symbol Top here
| | 06:42 | and just sort of click somewhere out in space,
you kind of see it tries to readjust itself anyway.
| | 06:47 | The reason why I kind of did this in this
case is because right now in my Text command,
| | 06:51 | it was told to be aligned to the center.
| | 06:54 | If we didn't want it to be aligned to the
center we could say it Align Left instead
| | 06:58 | and it would have instead just placed it to
the left instead of doing it at the center
| | 07:02 | of the spot that we just picked.
| | 07:04 | Not a big deal though, we can just select on it
now and then move it to the right location
| | 07:08 | by clicking on where we see these little
four arrows here and just sort of moving it over
| | 07:12 | to wherever it is we like to be lined up at.
| | 07:16 | Now the next thing I like to do in order to
speed things along is to highlight on this
| | 07:20 | and just copy it on down,
because we can just change this text.
| | 07:24 | And the nice thing about this is it's going
to keep everything the same spacing away from
| | 07:28 | the top and the bottom, so it's going to
look uniform as we look at it here on our view.
| | 07:33 | Now we click on the individual pieces of text
like in this case it's going to be the Weld
| | 07:37 | Symbol and instead of being Top
this happens to be a Weld Symbol Both.
| | 07:42 | This next one is going to
be a Weld Symbol Back Weld.
| | 07:48 | The one after that is going
to be a Weld Symbol Melt Thru.
| | 07:52 | I pointed out that these can always be adjusted
after the fact just by clicking on the little
| | 07:59 | arrows there and just sort
of eyeballing them on over.
| | 08:02 | The bottom two are going to be View Title
and View Reference respectively, and I'll
| | 08:08 | just move View Title over just a little
bit so it's a little bit better lined up than
| | 08:12 | what it was before.
| | 08:14 | Now the last thing is if we want to be able
to add some sort of header going across the
| | 08:18 | top of this Legend so it looks nice and
bold and that everybody can notice it.
| | 08:22 | I'd like to do usually the same thing, I
just sort of copy the text up, place it here in
| | 08:27 | the middle, type in the middle here and
this is just going to be a Symbol Legend.
| | 08:30 | It's up to you if you want to make it all
caps; I kind of like to make it stand out.
| | 08:37 | And then once it's highlighted in blue, which
it should be because it was already selected on,
| | 08:40 | you can then change this to be a quarter
inch Arial and now we have the larger text.
| | 08:45 | I will point out that if we needed to be
able to just bump this just a little bit, we can
| | 08:48 | highlight on one of these and then use the
arrow keys on our keyboard, that's the nudge
| | 08:51 | Command in order to be able to nudge this
over and have these things be a little bit
| | 08:56 | better centered on our screen.
| | 08:57 | So by using our Symbols, Text and our Align
Tools, we can create Legends fairly easily
| | 09:03 | and quickly for our construction document sets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Sheets and CDsCreating standard sheets| 00:00 | Now that most of our documentation is done, we
need to place these drawings onto their sheets.
| | 00:05 | Well, obviously we're going to need to be able to
create some sheets in order to be able to do that.
| | 00:09 | So there's really two different places where we
can go about doing the sheet creation process.
| | 00:14 | One way is up here, underneath
the Ribbon, underneath View.
| | 00:18 | So if you would select on View, we can then
see that there is a big option over here for
| | 00:22 | Sheet Composition and it actually has several
different options available to us as far as
| | 00:27 | being able to create sheets, being able to
center stuff on sheets, and that kind of information.
| | 00:32 | As far as being able to create one from scratch,
we see that there is an option right here
| | 00:36 | that says Sheet, and we could just select on
that in order to be able to create our own sheet.
| | 00:40 | So we'll go ahead and do that first.
| | 00:43 | This will bring us to this New Sheet dialog
box, and it's real purpose is to be able to say,
| | 00:48 | do you want to have a titleblock, and if so
which titleblock do you want to be able to select?
| | 00:54 | Now, in this case we only have one titleblock
actually loaded in here, but if you're working
| | 00:59 | on your own template and you've decided to
go through the process, one of the things
| | 01:03 | that you can do is you can actually create
as many of these titleblocks as you want;
| | 01:07 | they could be for different parts of your
company, they could be for different size
| | 01:11 | sheets of paper, it all comes down to you
and which size sheets or which size titleblock
| | 01:15 | you want to be able to use and leverage,
and it all can show up here on the list.
| | 01:21 | In this case we're going to pick the only
one that we have available, which is this
| | 01:24 | size E1, and then click on OK.
| | 01:27 | Now that we've done that, here
we can see our default titleblock.
| | 01:31 | And if we zoom over here, we can see that
there are certain properties associated with
| | 01:37 | this particular titleblock.
| | 01:39 | One of the things it says
is that this is Sheet S.2.
| | 01:42 | It's possible depending on the condition of
your drawing, when you inserted this in,
| | 01:47 | it could have said S.1 or S.0.
| | 01:50 | It kind of depends on whatever the last
sheet it is that was created, the next sheet on
| | 01:54 | the list, that's the one it's going to display.
| | 01:57 | When I was first setting up these drawing
files, the last one that I did was S.1 and
| | 02:02 | that's the reason why this is S.2.
| | 02:04 | That being said, this is not the naming
scheme that I personally want to do, so instead of
| | 02:09 | this being S, as in Structure, .2,
I want to make this S.101.
| | 02:16 | So easy enough, select on the titleblock,
click on that blue piece of text that will
| | 02:21 | show up then, and we'll just make this S.101
and then just click somewhere out in space
| | 02:28 | in order to be able to finish that up.
| | 02:30 | Now, when we made that change, over here
underneath our Project Browser, and we'll scroll down
| | 02:36 | here to find our sheets, so we'll click on
the little plus (+) next to the word Sheets,
| | 02:40 | and what we're going to find
is S.101, and it says Unnamed.
| | 02:45 | Well, it got the 101 from what we just typed in.
| | 02:50 | You can see here where it says Unnamed, well,
if we decide to click here, click on it again,
| | 02:55 | we can now type in anything that we want to
call this, and in this particular case let's
| | 02:59 | go ahead and call this Plans.
| | 03:02 | This could be First Floor Plan, Second Floor
Plan, but in general I'm just calling this
| | 03:06 | Plans for right now.
| | 03:08 | And you can see that it automatically
updates underneath the Project Browser.
| | 03:11 | Now, another way that we could go about
creating a sheet, it's actually the same process,
| | 03:16 | it's just in a different location, is if we find
Sheets underneath the Project Browser over
| | 03:20 | here on the left hand-side.
| | 03:21 | If we do it this way, then we can just right-
click on the word Sheets, click on New Sheet, and
| | 03:27 | then select the appropriate titleblock, once
again off of the list, and we'll click on OK to that.
| | 03:33 | Now, one of the things you will remember that
I said just a moment ago is that, when I went
| | 03:37 | through the original creation process of
this particular exercise, most likely the last
| | 03:41 | sheet that I had created was S.1, and I knew
that because S.2 was the default one that popped up.
| | 03:48 | We can actually see that kind of occurred
here as well, because if we look here, we
| | 03:52 | can see that S.102 happens to be the new
number that it gave to this new sheet by default;
| | 03:59 | it did the next one in the sequence
after the 101 that we just typed in.
| | 04:03 | Now, I don't want this to be 102, I
want this to be called Structural or S.301.
| | 04:12 | Now technically I could do that over here,
but I also want to point out that the properties
| | 04:17 | related to the sheet that you're currently
working on also shows up, up here underneath Properties.
| | 04:22 | So if instead of renaming it down here, or
renaming it over here, one of the options
| | 04:27 | that I would have actually would be to
come up here and then rename it up here.
| | 04:32 | I'm going to just rename it from here, S.301.
| | 04:38 | So highlight it, type in the information
and you can just move your mouse out into the
| | 04:41 | screen and you'll see it automatically updates on
the titleblock, as well as in your Project Browser.
| | 04:47 | As far as the rest of the information over here is
concerned, it's kind of more the same quite frankly.
| | 04:52 | All you have to do is be able to select on
the titleblock, click in the appropriate area;
| | 04:57 | in this case this is the Owner information, and
I'm just going to type in lynda.com and click.
| | 05:04 | As far as Project Name, I'm just going to
call this Structure, because this is a Revit
| | 05:09 | Structure course, and then click off.
| | 05:13 | You can see this is currently Unnamed and
says Unnamed over here, and just like before
| | 05:18 | if we decide to change this information, before we
said Plans; this time I'm going to call this one Sections.
| | 05:23 | I'm going to click over here in space.
| | 05:25 | And finally, let's go ahead and fill in
some of this information down here as well, and
| | 05:30 | we can do that by just clicking down here
where it has such things as the Project Number,
| | 05:34 | if you want to put in today's Date or a Number
or whatever the case may be; I'm just putting
| | 05:39 | the 012012 in here.
| | 05:41 | As far as Date goes, you can put
whatever today's date happens to be.
| | 05:47 | In this case I'm just going to do
put this information in the titleblock.
| | 05:51 | Drawn By, feel free to put your
initials in; I'm going to put mine.
| | 05:56 | Checked By, once again, you can fill this
in with any information that you want;
| | 06:00 | I'm just going to type in
LYNDA here in the checkbox.
| | 06:03 | Now that we've gotten to this
point, I'll go ahead and zoom out.
| | 06:08 | All that information has been updated there.
| | 06:10 | Let's check S.101 and see what
information is showing up on it.
| | 06:16 | Now that we've done that, we can see that
such things as the Date and Project Number
| | 06:21 | are showing up over here.
| | 06:23 | We're also seeing that the client name, in
this case we're kind of calling this just
| | 06:26 | lynda.com, and then the project that this is,
which is Structure is now showing up over here.
| | 06:32 | Also, this still says Plans.
| | 06:34 | It didn't overwrite it with the information
such as Sections, because, well, that's not
| | 06:38 | what this sheet is about.
| | 06:40 | Now that we've gone through this process
really the only thing that's going to be left for
| | 06:44 | us will be to go through the process
of putting views onto our sheets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding drawings to sheets| 00:00 | We've been doing all this work in our views
in preparation for placing these views onto
| | 00:04 | our sheets, and right now we need to start considering
which view do we want to place on which sheet.
| | 00:10 | Right now we happen to have two different
sheets that are set up; one is a Plans sheet
| | 00:16 | and the other is Sections.
| | 00:18 | So let's go ahead and take a look at the
Plans sheet first, which is this S.101.
| | 00:23 | If you're not already in that view, go
ahead and double-click on that, and we're going
| | 00:29 | to put the First Floor onto this view.
| | 00:32 | So go ahead and click on First Floor.
| | 00:34 | Now, left-click on it and hold your mouse
button down and just drag over in this direction.
| | 00:40 | As soon as your mouse is just somewhere over
here in the space, go ahead and just let go
| | 00:44 | of your mouse button and you'll
see this rectangular shape show up.
| | 00:48 | Now, I do want to place this view just the way
that it is by default, at least as of this moment.
| | 00:54 | But one thing I want to point out before I
click is, if we needed to rotate this view
| | 00:58 | around, perhaps a 90° angle, we could
change that here on Rotation on Sheet.
| | 01:04 | We don't need to so we're
just going to leave this at None.
| | 01:06 | And where do we want to place it?
| | 01:09 | I usually like to place it a little bit
away from where the binding of the set is going
| | 01:13 | to be at, so I'm just going to move it
over a touch and click right about here.
| | 01:17 | Now, we can see it's up
here, kind of in the corner.
| | 01:21 | And if we zoom down, we can see that it's 1,
so detail #1, 1 - First Floor, and that
| | 01:27 | happens to match up with the name of
the plan underneath the Project Browser.
| | 01:31 | It also has a scale that's associated with this.
| | 01:34 | If for some reason we wanted to
give this a different name, we could.
| | 01:37 | We could either rename it over here underneath
the Project Browser, or I just want to point
| | 01:41 | out that if we select on this, it never
gives us the ability to double-click on it like
| | 01:46 | maybe our dimensions or some of the other
things, would have allowed us to click on
| | 01:50 | it to make a potential edit.
| | 01:52 | In order to be able to do it here, all we
have to do is to zoom out just a little bit,
| | 01:57 | move our mouse up, and as soon
as the view that we just placed.
| | 02:00 | So not the title, but the View highlights.
| | 02:03 | Then we can click on the View and you'll
notice that if we click down here, or here, then
| | 02:08 | we could end up changing the number or
the actual name of that particular view.
| | 02:15 | The scale itself, well, that's going to be controlled
through whatever the scale is associated with this view.
| | 02:21 | And when I say that of course I mean back in
the Project Browser, this says, 1/8" = 1'-0".
| | 02:26 | So on our Plan it shows
up as being 1/8" = 1'-0".
| | 02:29 | Now, if we go ahead and zoom out here, one
of the things that I'm noticing is that this
| | 02:34 | has a nice big, I'll call it
a border, showing up around it.
| | 02:38 | Maybe for some reason, and I don't know why,
but maybe for some reason we didn't want to
| | 02:43 | see our elevation tags.
| | 02:44 | Well, one of the things that we could do is we could
go ahead and modify this view while it's on the sheet.
| | 02:50 | So go ahead and just select on the view itself
then there is going to be an option up here
| | 02:54 | at the top of the screen called Activate View.
| | 02:57 | If you click on Activate View, now it's just
like drawing inside of the original drawing;
| | 03:02 | over here; it would be 1-First Floor.
| | 03:04 | So if we decided, all right, we want to be
able to make a modification so we don't see
| | 03:09 | any of these elevation tags, we could either
A, hide the elevation tags themselves; or
| | 03:14 | B, we could come down here next to the little
eyeglasses down at the bottom of the screen
| | 03:18 | and click on Show Crop Region.
| | 03:21 | When you do that, you'll see a
box that shows up around your view.
| | 03:25 | And then if you click on that box and then
hold down on the little grips that are around
| | 03:29 | the middle of them, you can pull this box
up and anything that is not inside of the
| | 03:35 | box is then going to get hidden.
| | 03:38 | It's going to get cropped out.
| | 03:40 | That's the reason why it happens
to be called a Crop Region.
| | 03:43 | Then if we have it the way that we like it,
we can move back down here again and we can
| | 03:47 | turn off or Hide the Crop Region, and now we
can no longer see those extra little elevation
| | 03:53 | tags in this case on the outside, but this would
have worked with other kinds of objects as well.
| | 03:58 | I'm looking at this and thinking, well, this
Floor Plan looks kind of small on this particular
| | 04:02 | sheet, maybe we need to be able to
adjust the scale of it, the size of it.
| | 04:05 | Well, we can do that, too,
now that we're in this view.
| | 04:08 | So we can click on where it has 1/8" and
let's go ahead and try to make this a little bit
| | 04:12 | bigger, and let's try to make it a 1/4" = 1'-0"
that will probably fill out the sheet pretty
| | 04:16 | nicely and make it very easy to read.
| | 04:19 | Now, something that I've seen people try
to do is try to move the view at this point,
| | 04:23 | and that's not a good thing, because you're
actually going to accidentally make a mistake
| | 04:26 | on your model and you
might rip your model apart.
| | 04:29 | What you need to do at this
point is go back to your Sheet View.
| | 04:33 | Now, I know it looks like we're on the sheet
but actually we have activated a, I'll use
| | 04:37 | the term Viewport, on the sheet, and
that's what we're currently working in.
| | 04:42 | To go back to the sheet itself, all we have
to do is right-click somewhere in the space
| | 04:46 | and go to Deactivate View.
| | 04:49 | As soon as we do that, we're
now back in our drawing area.
| | 04:52 | If we move over the view, we
can see the whole box again.
| | 04:55 | Now, if we select on the view, click and hold down,
we can then drag this to a more appropriate location.
| | 05:02 | And then I'm just going to click off of it,
and now we can see how this is now centered
| | 05:06 | much better onto our sheet.
| | 05:09 | Now, one bad thing that just happened to us
is that our view title just came off the sheet
| | 05:12 | because it was so separated
from the rest of the view.
| | 05:15 | That's not a very difficult thing to fix.
| | 05:17 | All we have to do is select on the title,
hold down our mouse button, and then just
| | 05:21 | drag it back up to wherever
it is we'd like it to be at.
| | 05:25 | One other thing, and it's just like if we
had to make a modification to the piece of text,
| | 05:29 | if we wanted to be able to adjust the length of
this line that's associated with the view, we can.
| | 05:34 | But we can't do it by just clicking on this
particular line, we have to once again click
| | 05:39 | on the view itself, and then hold down the
mouse button where you get that little grip
| | 05:43 | at the end, and either pull it back or pull it
forward in order to be able to make that adjustment.
| | 05:49 | Now, I realize in the case of the First Floor
we're always going to want to have a title,
| | 05:53 | but if this was some other kind of detail, or
maybe it was a piece of cover art or something
| | 05:57 | we were going to place on the sheet to make
it look pretty, something that didn't need
| | 06:01 | to have the title, it is possible to get rid of
these titles, but you can't do it using the Delete key.
| | 06:06 | What you have to do if you want to be able
to make a modification to the title that shows
| | 06:09 | up there is select on the view itself, and
then underneath the Properties of the view,
| | 06:15 | over here on the left-hand side, you can
change this so it says No Title, and by doing that
| | 06:21 | it will automatically remove the title.
| | 06:24 | If you come back up here again and tell it
to put the title in, the title will come back
| | 06:29 | and it will be in the same
relationship as it was before.
| | 06:31 | Now, I'll give you a real quick story as
to why you want to go about this method.
| | 06:36 | If you decide to select on the view and you
didn't change it up here and instead you went
| | 06:40 | into Edit Type and you told the Title not
to be on, change this from being Yes to No,
| | 06:47 | and I've seen many people do this over the years.
| | 06:49 | One of the things that will happen is, is
yes, the title will shut off, but it will
| | 06:53 | shut off everywhere,
throughout the entire set of drawings.
| | 06:56 | So anything that was even supposed
to have a title, it would shut off on.
| | 07:00 | And obviously you don't want to do that, so
it's always best to be able to select it off
| | 07:05 | of here and not come in to this dialog
box and changing this from being Yes to No.
| | 07:10 | Just leave it at being Yes and then you'll
have the title, and if you don't want to have
| | 07:14 | a title on your view, just change this to being No
and you won't have a title on your view anymore.
| | 07:20 | Now, let's go ahead and
go over to another sheet.
| | 07:23 | So let's go to our Section Sheet now, and
it's going to be down here at the bottom of
| | 07:28 | the list, but you can double-click here at
S.301, and let's go ahead and drag a couple
| | 07:33 | of our Section views onto the sheet.
| | 07:36 | So we're going to drag
Section 1 and Section 2 on over.
| | 07:41 | So grab Section 1, pull it over.
| | 07:43 | It's looking pretty small here; we
can always adjust the scale of it.
| | 07:47 | Do the same thing with Section 2, pull
it over, place it over here on your sheet.
| | 07:53 | This is looking pretty puny so I'm
just going to increase it up to a 1/4".
| | 07:58 | Now, one thing I'd said before is that we'd activated
the view and then changed the scale of it down here.
| | 08:03 | I also want to point out the fact that you
can also do that through the properties of
| | 08:07 | the view over here.
| | 08:09 | So once you have the view selected, you
can actually go to View Scale and change that
| | 08:13 | to be 1/4" from right here.
| | 08:16 | By doing that we can see how
everything just got quite a bit larger.
| | 08:20 | And we can click on this; we can drag the view to
wherever we would need it to be, as well as the title.
| | 08:25 | Now, if we want to be able to center these
a little bit better on a sheet, I do want
| | 08:29 | to point out there is a tool that's
associated with being able to do that as well.
| | 08:33 | And we can find that once again underneath
the view up here, and it's thing that looks
| | 08:38 | like a bunch of just sort of dash lines
crossing each other, and it's called the Guide Grid.
| | 08:42 | And if you click on Guide Grid, it's going
to ask you to create one, just click OK to that,
| | 08:47 | and this will automatically give you a nice
little grid that you can start to eyeball
| | 08:51 | your drawing set with.
| | 08:53 | And if you zoom in, select on your view, use
the Move Tool, you can then grab on the different
| | 09:00 | parts of your view and then be able to just sort of
move them up and then snap them to proper locations.
| | 09:06 | And you could do this with any
view throughout your particular sheet.
| | 09:10 | And as a result of that, and using your Guide
Grid, you can quickly grab on the stuff, use
| | 09:14 | the Move command, move stuff, and then place
them at the right intersections so that you
| | 09:19 | know that if you're flipping through your set,
everything is going to be lined up appropriately
| | 09:23 | to everything else.
| | 09:25 | And if for some reason you don't want to
see this Guide Grid, you can always select on
| | 09:29 | it again and then hit the Delete key on the
keyboard and it will get rid of it for you.
| | 09:34 | So to put sheets in our view all we need to
do is click and drag them to the appropriate
| | 09:38 | locations onto our sheet.
| | 09:40 | Also remember, if you ever need to be able
to make changes to such things as the title
| | 09:44 | and its locations, all you have to do is select on the
title, click, and drag it to its appropriate location.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding revisions| 00:00 | Once we have our views on our sheets, we need to
learn how to handle revisions in our Revit project.
| | 00:05 | In order to be able to set up our revisions,
and so they automatically populate over here
| | 00:09 | inside of a Title blocks,
| | 00:11 | we need to come up here on the ribbon underneath the
Manage Tab in order to be able set up our revisions.
| | 00:17 | Now if we come over here to Additional
Settings and select on that, then move down, go ahead
| | 00:23 | and select on Sheet Issues/Revision.
| | 00:26 | This brings up the Sheets Issues/Revisions
dialog box and the first thing, I want to
| | 00:30 | point is over on the right hand side where
it says, Numbering and it can be done in one
| | 00:35 | or two different ways.
| | 00:35 | It can either be the revisions can be
done Per Project or it can be done Per Sheet.
| | 00:41 | If it's set up to be done Per Project then
we are going to be able to see those revisions
| | 00:45 | pretty much through out
the entire set of documents.
| | 00:48 | If it's set up Per Sheet, then it's going to
be revision one and it's going to be affected
| | 00:52 | on that one individual sheet and I find that
most people probably do Per Sheet but I have
| | 00:58 | run into many different firms
that are doing it Per Project.
| | 01:01 | So which ever way is your office standard,
select that and that's just going to need
| | 01:06 | to be the way you do it from here on out.
| | 01:08 | There is no mixing and matching in Revit
between those two, so it's going to be one or the
| | 01:12 | other unless you just decide to put text in
your title block and not have Revit manage
| | 01:17 | the revision process.
| | 01:19 | So in this case, I am going to select on
Per Sheet, it's going to ask you; are you sure
| | 01:23 | do you want do this?
| | 01:24 | And in this case, I will say, sure, yes.
| | 01:27 | At this same area, it's going to be asking
us for a sequence and what it's really trying
| | 01:31 | to say is, right now we know you want to enable
revisions because you are here in this dialog
| | 01:36 | box and right, now we have
one already set up for you.
| | 01:40 | What number would you like this to be
or do you want this to be alphabetic?
| | 01:45 | So do you want us to start with number one or
would you like us to start with the letter A?
| | 01:50 | Usually it's going to be Numeric so we are
just going to leave it that way; there is
| | 01:53 | Date, this is where you can put in today's
date, whatever date you want to be able to
| | 01:58 | put in this information. I am just
going to type in this date for right now.
| | 02:02 | As far as Description goes, this is your
typical revision description; this is what it's going
| | 02:08 | to see in the box, in your title block.
| | 02:11 | For this I am going to put Revised Stair Section
and we will start to talk about some of these
| | 02:16 | other things such as Issued and Show
and it has Cloud and Tag in just a minute.
| | 02:23 | So come back down here when
this is done and click on OK.
| | 02:27 | Right now we haven't really seen any changes
and the reason is, is that we haven't really
| | 02:30 | told this that there is going to be
a revision anywhere on this sheet.
| | 02:34 | What we did is we set the revision up project
wide and then they could have been theoretically
| | 02:39 | anywhere, so now we need to say, that on
this sheet, there's going to be this revision,
| | 02:44 | it's going to be related to
that one that we just set up.
| | 02:47 | So to be able to do that, we are going to
come up here to the Annotate Tab and we are
| | 02:51 | going to select on Revision Cloud and Revision
Cloud have an interesting property associated with them.
| | 02:57 | They always do a big bubble,
little bubble when you draw them.
| | 03:01 | People are used to in doing AutoCAD where you can
start to customize some of those cloud symbologies.
| | 03:06 | Often times it'll ask me how do you go
about changing this so it doesn't look like big
| | 03:09 | bubble, little bubble and unfortunately there
is just no way to be able to go about changing
| | 03:14 | that symbology other than just even making
it really big or making it really small by
| | 03:19 | just selecting on these individual locations
as you window around and form your cloud.
| | 03:26 | It's not really a big deal you get used to it
and I think after a while, one of the things
| | 03:32 | that I really like about these revision
clouds is how they do in fact interface over here.
| | 03:38 | As a matter of fact, the second I started
drawing this cloud, if I zoom in here, we
| | 03:42 | can see it stared to add that
revision to our title block to this sheet.
| | 03:46 | I will go ahead and zoom back out again
and click on the big green checkmark to that.
| | 03:51 | Zoom in again, there it is and there
is the revision officially put in place.
| | 03:59 | Now if I decided to have some sort of tag
on here that indicated yes this is revision
| | 04:03 | one, Revit doesn't automatically
tag, it but it's easy enough to do.
| | 04:07 | Also, underneath Annotate, it's going to allow
us to do a Tag by Category and if you do that
| | 04:13 | and then move over to the revision cloud,
it will automatically place a tag on here
| | 04:18 | with the number and yes, this can be moved
around, adjusted, placed wherever it is you
| | 04:22 | need a tag to show up that.
| | 04:24 | Now I am going to zoom out just a little
bit and we are going to go back to that Manage
| | 04:28 | tab up here up on the ribbon.
| | 04:29 | Once again, we are going to go to
Additional Settings and Sheet Issues/Revisions.
| | 04:34 | From here, if we wanted to be able to add
more to the sequence, all we would have to
| | 04:38 | do is click the big button Add and
it would add more underneath here.
| | 04:42 | One another thing to know is that if we ever get
to a point, where the sheet is going to be issued.
| | 04:47 | Well we can just click right there where
it says, Issued, click on OK and as soon as,
| | 04:53 | you do that, it's not longer going to allow you to add
any more revisions to this particular set of revisions.
| | 05:01 | So in another words, if you have already had
this set of documents go out to the printer,
| | 05:04 | it's been distributed, you are not going to
add more to that revision set, because revisions
| | 05:09 | are already in everybody's hands.
| | 05:11 | So to keep people from being able to add
revision clouds at that point, you can put a little
| | 05:16 | check mark in that box and we'll
go ahead and illustrate that here.
| | 05:21 | If they try to come in here and place a revision
cloud, it'll give you an error message saying,
| | 05:25 | you can't because the latest
revision is now already been released.
| | 05:30 | And if you ever do need to be able to make
that modification it's simple enough, all
| | 05:34 | you have to do is come back up to Manage, once
again, go to your Settings, Sheet Issues/Revisions,
| | 05:41 | and just clear that little checkbox out and
what it will allow you to do is it will allow
| | 05:45 | you to go ahead and start to put in those
revision clouds again, so that you can put
| | 05:49 | this set of documents back out.
| | 05:53 | Revisions are handled on sheets but they
can also be handled on the individual views.
| | 05:57 | So if you decided to put those revision clouds
inside of view, instead of on the sheet themselves,
| | 06:02 | Revit is just happy with that and all you
have to do is just then put the view on to
| | 06:08 | the sheet and then, the title block will
automatically pick that information up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing a sheet| 00:00 | Once we have our drawing
set up it'll be time to print.
| | 00:03 | So let's go ahead and look the process
by which Revit allows us to print.
| | 00:07 | And we can find that underneath the big
R up here in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 00:11 | So go ahead and click on the R, come down
and there's going to be an option here for print,
| | 00:15 | and we'll move over here and just
select on Print off of the menu.
| | 00:19 | Once we do that, we're going to see our standard
Print menu pop up here and you'll have whichever
| | 00:24 | printers that you're usually
using show up here on the list.
| | 00:27 | In this case I have Adobe PDF printer
and I'll just use this as an example.
| | 00:32 | The first button that we'll see over
here is going to be the Properties button.
| | 00:35 | Now I'm not going to select on this and the reason is
that everyone's properties is going to look different.
| | 00:40 | If you select on that Properties, this is
going to give you the properties related to
| | 00:44 | your specific printer
that's sitting at your desk.
| | 00:48 | Alright, so if you would select on that you'll
see any properties that might be related to it.
| | 00:53 | Now the Properties that really directly
affect Revit are going to be in the Settings button
| | 00:58 | down here and there's going to be
an option here to select on Setup.
| | 01:02 | So go ahead and click on Setup.
| | 01:05 | Once you do that, it's going to tell you that
these settings are related to whichever printer
| | 01:09 | it is that you're currently working with.
| | 01:11 | We'll also see that there's
options related to different paper sizes.
| | 01:15 | Now once again these paper sizes are going
to be related to the specific printer that
| | 01:19 | you're printing to.
| | 01:21 | In this case I just have a lot of the
standard everyday sizes related to an Adobe PDF.
| | 01:26 | If you have a big plotter setup with 24x36,
30x42 kinds of sheets than those settings
| | 01:33 | will be shown up here on the paper sizes.
| | 01:35 | I think we're all familiar with Orientation
as far as Portrait and Landscape; this is
| | 01:40 | your standard everyday
Windows functionality over here.
| | 01:43 | There's paper placement.
| | 01:45 | Now everybody sort of has a different way
to go about doing this and really I find that
| | 01:48 | this is usually a
printer specific sort of thing.
| | 01:51 | In the case of my Adobe
PDF I usually just center it.
| | 01:54 | On the other hand if I'm printing to a
normal plotter or if I know that I'm going to be
| | 01:59 | placing this sheet of paper into my plotter
in a certain spot, than usually I'll do an
| | 02:03 | offset from corner and say that I want my
drawing to print a certain margin away from
| | 02:08 | the outside edge of the
piece of paper. There is Zoom.
| | 02:12 | Zoom is probably the one area where
people make their biggest mistakes.
| | 02:16 | They'll tend to forget that the page is at
the default usually unless this happens to
| | 02:21 | be saved and they'll leave fit the page.
| | 02:24 | Then after their entire set has been printed
they'll come in and they'll look at it and
| | 02:28 | then they'll put a little scale down next to
it, they'll do their measurement and wonder
| | 02:31 | why this is about 98%, 99%
of the size that it should be.
| | 02:35 | The reason is that they forgot the
changes from Fit to page down to Zoom.
| | 02:40 | And usually if I'm going to be doing a print,
I usually come down here and set my Zoom to
| | 02:45 | 100% of the size, which means it's going
to print it a full size, full scale and it's
| | 02:49 | not going to try to fit it to a sheet of paper.
| | 02:52 | Pretty much the only time that I ever use
Fit to page is if I just want to do a little
| | 02:55 | check set, I don't really care what the scale is,
then I'll say Fit to page and it'll automatically
| | 02:59 | fit to whatever the paper size shows up,
up here at the top of the screen.
| | 03:03 | Usually, I tend to leave over here where it has
hidden line views and it says Vector Processing.
| | 03:09 | I usually leave Vector Processing the way that
it is, particularly if I have newer hardware.
| | 03:15 | It just usually works a
little bit better for us.
| | 03:17 | The one exception of that though is if you
start noticing inconsistencies in your printing.
| | 03:23 | The next area down here is going to be Appearance and
we can see there is a variety of different options here.
| | 03:28 | Personally I almost always just print to High.
| | 03:30 | I haven't found a massive
difference in print time speeds.
| | 03:34 | You could print to Medium, I
probably wouldn't recommend Low.
| | 03:36 | I usually don't use Presentation
work unless I'm trying to print images.
| | 03:40 | So for the most part I just
leave it on either Medium or on High.
| | 03:43 | Personally, I usually leave it on High.
| | 03:46 | Not everybody realizes, at least if you first
start using Revit, then in fact Revit will print color.
| | 03:50 | If you what to be available to print
color, just leave it as being Color here.
| | 03:54 | Usually though I find most people either do
Black Lines or Grayscale and I usually start
| | 03:59 | by trying Black Lines and see how it prints,
it'll still print different shades of gray,
| | 04:03 | so I'm not too concerned about that,
your line work will still look okay.
| | 04:07 | But I know other companies that use Grayscale
and it really comes down to your printer and
| | 04:11 | whatever you are going to get
the best results from your printer.
| | 04:14 | So start off by trying Black Lines, if it
doesn't look the way that you like, try Grayscale
| | 04:19 | and just sort of maybe print the same
page and see which one looks better for you.
| | 04:24 | Last thing before I click on OK to this is
there are some options that show up down here.
| | 04:28 | Usually just leave these alone, these are pretty
much the default settings that everybody else uses.
| | 04:32 | But I will say that if you start having certain
things suddenly show up on your prints, certain
| | 04:36 | things are suddenly vanished on your prints
and you are thinking to yourself why is this
| | 04:40 | suddenly showing up, take a look down here
at Options and make sure that these checkboxes
| | 04:44 | pretty much show up the same way
that they show up here on this screen.
| | 04:47 | If they do, then more than likely you'll
get the kind of prints that you expect.
| | 04:51 | If you start losing stuff, gaining stuff it's
probably because one of these checkboxes have
| | 04:55 | either been unchecked or they've been checked.
| | 04:57 | Okay, right before I click on OK there is
one more button I want to show and that's
| | 05:01 | this Save As button.
| | 05:02 | Once you have all of your settings the way
that you like it, you can click on Save As
| | 05:07 | and then you can give this a name and this
name can be anything that makes sense for
| | 05:11 | the kind of print that
you're getting ready to do.
| | 05:13 | In this case I'll just go ahead and just leave it as
being Adobe PDF and I'm just going to call it Example.
| | 05:20 | You can call yours anything that would make
sense for the kind of print that you want to do.
| | 05:23 | I'm going to click OK to this and now we can
see that the name of this setup, these settings
| | 05:29 | is Adobe PDF_Example.
| | 05:31 | And if I ever come back and choose this off
of the list again, any changes I would have
| | 05:35 | made will now just suddenly show up as soon
as I pick it off of pull-down list right here.
| | 05:41 | Now I'll go ahead and click on OK and we can see
that those are the settings that are going to be used.
| | 05:46 | Truthfully the way I usually do my naming
convention here is I usually do this for printer
| | 05:50 | name as well as the size sheet of paper
as getting ready to get printed so it could
| | 05:55 | be A size, B size, C size, you get the idea and
it will have all of those settings appropriately
| | 06:01 | for that kind of plot.
| | 06:03 | Now the last area to talk about it's
going to be over here in the Print Range.
| | 06:07 | Now Current Window does exactly what it sounds like,
it's going to print whatever window is currently open.
| | 06:12 | Then it though it's going to print everything
even if you can't see it on the screen if
| | 06:16 | there's something way up here that's been
drawn, it'll print everything from this window.
| | 06:21 | Visible portion of current window will
print only those items that are on the screen.
| | 06:25 | So if there's something drawn up here and you can't
see it on the screen, it won't print.
| | 06:29 | There is also Selected views/sheets; this
is the one that I tend to use the most often.
| | 06:34 | And by selecting on the Select
button, we can see the View/Sheet Sets.
| | 06:39 | And what this allows us to do is we can put checkmarks
next to any view that we want to be able to print.
| | 06:44 | If we want to be able to print just the views,
then we can clear out the sheets, and we'll
| | 06:49 | only see the different views.
| | 06:50 | If we want to be able to just see the sheets,
we can just put a check mark next to Sheets
| | 06:55 | and then we'll just see the
sheets up here on the list.
| | 06:58 | Then you put checkmarks next to those sheets
or those views that you want to be able to print,
| | 07:01 | and then you can do a Save As, you
can give it a name and then the next time
| | 07:06 | you want to be able to print those same sheets,
all you have to do is select it off of the
| | 07:10 | list up here and you'll get that same listing
with all the proper sheets and views checkmarked.
| | 07:16 | So when it comes time to print, they'll
all print as a batch and you can send them to
| | 07:20 | the printer just one right after another.
| | 07:23 | The only limitation this has is that they
does need to be all the same size sheet of paper.
| | 07:28 | So the reasoning behind that is and I'm
going to hit Cancel, because I don't really want
| | 07:32 | to save this, I'm going to hit Cancel again.
| | 07:36 | The reasoning behind that though is that
here underneath Settings you've specified which
| | 07:40 | size sheet of paper you are going to be
printing to and by printing a range, is going to always
| | 07:45 | try to print to that same size sheet of
paper is what showed up underneath your Settings.
| | 07:51 | It's important to remember that when printing,
you verify such things as scale and which
| | 07:55 | sheets you actually want to print.
| | 07:57 | Once you do that, you should have a lot
of success in printing whatever you need.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. Architectural Underlay: CAD FilesImporting CAD files| 00:00 | There will be times where we'll be working
with outside consultants or working on older
| | 00:04 | projects, when we'll need to leverage
information from CAD drawing files.
| | 00:07 | In order to be able to best do this in Revit,
I usually like to create a drafting view to
| | 00:12 | insert in that CAD information into.
| | 00:15 | Now technically we can insert this CAD information
into our First Floor, Second Floor, floor
| | 00:20 | plans if you want to be able
to draw over the top of it.
| | 00:23 | But by inserting this into a drafting view
we can re-utilize this information again,
| | 00:28 | and again, and again in future projects.
| | 00:31 | So let's go ahead and create a drafting
view to put our CAD information inside of.
| | 00:36 | So come up here to View and we're
going to create a new Drafting View.
| | 00:42 | Now the name we're going to give this drafting
view is going to be linked or actually let's
| | 00:46 | not call it linked detail, even though we
are kind of bringing the detail in,
| | 00:50 | let's just call this Inserted
Detail and then click on OK.
| | 00:59 | Right now to the scale of one and a half inches
equals a foot we can always adjust that after the fact.
| | 01:03 | So that's not a big deal for us and let's
go ahead and import in or in this case,
| | 01:08 | come up here to Insert, and Import CAD file
to bring that CAD detail into our view.
| | 01:14 | So move over here to Truss, select on Truss.dwg.
| | 01:17 | Now, we have a couple of
different options that we can do.
| | 01:21 | The first is, we can preserve the
colors or we can make this black and white.
| | 01:25 | I haven't found anybody yet that would want to
revert the color, so that blue was no longer blue,
| | 01:29 | but that is an option as well.
| | 01:32 | Sometimes if I'm going to be doing the work
I'll make it be black-and-white but the majority
| | 01:36 | of the time, I just like to leave it as the
original CAD colors by clicking on Preserve.
| | 01:41 | As far as position is concerned oftentimes
I'll just do Center to Center if I'm working
| | 01:45 | on a detail, because the exact location where
it gets inserted in at, inside of a drafting
| | 01:50 | view it just doesn't matter.
| | 01:52 | But if the exact location of this drawing
file does matter, perhaps you want to be able
| | 01:56 | to draw on top of someone's existing floor
plan and then we want to be able to export
| | 01:59 | it out back in the CAD, so that they can easily
put our work over the top of theirs,
| | 02:05 | or Origin to Origin would be a better
option to choose at that time.
| | 02:08 | But in this case we're just going to go
ahead and do Auto - Center to Center, and click
| | 02:13 | on Open to this, and we can see it just automatically
placed the Truss detail into our drawing area.
| | 02:21 | So let's go ahead and zoom down into this,
we can select on it and if we select on it
| | 02:26 | we'll see that the entire
thing highlights in a blue color.
| | 02:29 | Now what this means, is this is very much
like inserting a block from AutoCAD into an
| | 02:34 | AutoCAD environment, except in this case,
we've inserted the CAD file directly into
| | 02:39 | the Revit environment and
it's all still one piece.
| | 02:43 | Now the good thing about this being all one
piece is it means that we can move it around
| | 02:46 | and do whatever we need to with it.
| | 02:48 | Also, by the fact that we imported this CAD
file in, it's now native inside of Revit which
| | 02:53 | means that if anything changed would happen
to the CAD file if it got moved, if any details
| | 02:59 | changed to the CAD file that information
won't change inside of the Revit environment.
| | 03:04 | So that's an advantage because it's
going to be very project-specific.
| | 03:08 | Another advantage being able to bring this
information into a drafting view, is the fact
| | 03:12 | that if we decide to select on it, we'll
notice that there is a couple of different options
| | 03:17 | up here, and by having this line work
inside of the drafting view, if we decide to come
| | 03:23 | up here and choose this option of Explode
we wouldn't have a line work just all over
| | 03:28 | our model in different locations, because
that's what the Explode button does, it would
| | 03:31 | convert this into individual pieces in line work.
| | 03:35 | By having it inside of a drafting view if
we explod it, all the line work is just going
| | 03:39 | to be contained here two-dimensionally and
it'll be very easy to select and modify and
| | 03:44 | make changes to it.
| | 03:45 | Now, we keep talking about Explode, so I'm
going to go ahead and move up here and click
| | 03:49 | on the Explode button, and there is an option
here for either Partial Explode or Full Explode.
| | 03:54 | I highly recommend to never do a Full Explode.
| | 03:57 | If you do a Full Explode it will explode everything
inside of that view that you just brought in,
| | 04:02 | including if there is any AutoCAD blocks or
hatch patterns, any of that kind of information
| | 04:08 | will now be individual pieces and lines.
| | 04:11 | It's very much if you're used to AutoCAD and
you decide to use the Explode command 14 times
| | 04:16 | on an object, so that thing is like concrete
patterns, every little line that makes up the
| | 04:20 | concrete symbology was individual lines, that's
exactly what would happen with the Full Explode
| | 04:25 | command here inside of Revit.
| | 04:28 | So I always use the Partial Explode command
and by using Partial Explode, if we had any
| | 04:33 | hatch patterns in here for the most part
they would stay one entity making it much easier
| | 04:37 | to be able to make modifications to.
| | 04:40 | Also things like the text that we have here,
it's going to stay as one entity, it's not
| | 04:46 | going to sort of explode into maybe
symbols or whatever the case maybe.
| | 04:50 | But the bad thing is though is that if we
select on this text after doing an explode,
| | 04:55 | at one point this was multi-line text
inside of AutoCAD which means this was all typed
| | 05:00 | at the same time, and if you would click
on one letter everything would move at once.
| | 05:05 | After exploding inside of Revit,
it's now individual pieces and lines.
| | 05:10 | If we look here such thing as the arrowheads,
this is just a filled region now, it's not
| | 05:16 | even an AutoCAD arrowhead anymore.
| | 05:19 | Point being is that even though we only did
a partial explode, this is now a lot of just
| | 05:24 | individual pieces and parts, and it might be a
little bit difficult to go through and clean this up.
| | 05:29 | So as a result of that oftentimes I don't
recommend doing explodes, even though it might
| | 05:34 | save you a little bit of work early on because
you'll have your line work right there, because
| | 05:38 | if you decide to do an explode you get a
lot of little pieces and parts, and it's going
| | 05:41 | to take you awhile to select
all the appropriate objects.
| | 05:44 | The other thing that's going to be bad
about this, and if you're do an explode, is that
| | 05:47 | it automatically doubles the size of the
original detail that you brought in the Rivet.
| | 05:52 | So if this has been a half a meg detail
and you explode it, it suddenly becomes a one
| | 05:55 | meg detail inside of Revit.
| | 05:57 | If you only have one, it's not a big deal,
but if you have fifty of them or hundred of
| | 06:01 | them and you bring them all into Revit at
the same time, suddenly instead of having
| | 06:05 | fifty megs worth of information you might
have a hundred megs worth of information inside
| | 06:09 | of your Revit file.
| | 06:10 | And if you do that, it's going to make
your drawing file less stable, it's also going
| | 06:15 | to make it a little bit slower for Revit
to process the model as you are spinning and
| | 06:19 | doing different things.
| | 06:20 | So as a result of that I usually don't recommend
just coming in and just using the pure imports
| | 06:25 | and then explode on these entities to
be able to make modifications to them.
| | 06:29 | Instead, I usually recommend doing linking
which we'll be talking in another video in
| | 06:34 | this section about, because by linking them
in instead of exploding we can make drawings
| | 06:40 | and changes a little bit quicker and
cleaner than by using the import CAD method.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Linking CAD files| 00:00 | My favorite way to be able to bring in CAD
drawing information into the Revit environment
| | 00:05 | is to link that information into Revit.
| | 00:08 | In order to do this, let's go ahead and
create a drafting view and then we will drop that
| | 00:12 | linked information in to Revit.
| | 00:15 | So we'll come over here and we're going to
go to the View Tab and we're going to create
| | 00:20 | a new Drafting View.
| | 00:23 | For the name of this view we're
going to call this Linked Detail.
| | 00:27 | The scale doesn't really matter, we could
always change it after the fact if need be,
| | 00:31 | so we'll just click on OK to that.
| | 00:34 | Now this creates a new blank drafting view
that we're going to link our CAD information into.
| | 00:40 | So underneath the Insert tab on the Ribbon,
we're going to move down and we're going to
| | 00:45 | select on Link CAD.
| | 00:48 | For those of you that are already familiar
with AutoCAD, this is the same concept as
| | 00:51 | being able to bring an xref into AutoCAD,
except in this case we're linking this Truss
| | 00:58 | drawing into our Revit environment.
| | 01:00 | Highlight on Truss we're going to move down
here and we have a choice between Black and
| | 01:06 | White, Invert or Preserve our colors.
| | 01:11 | Whenever I'm linking in my CAD
stuff, usually I choose on Preserve.
| | 01:15 | I can always change the colors later if I wish.
| | 01:18 | And by clicking on Preserve I can
tell what is the native CAD information.
| | 01:23 | Over here underneath Positioning there is
an option here for Auto-Center to Center or
| | 01:26 | Auto-Origin to Origin.
| | 01:28 | We'll just leave it at Center to Center since we're
dropping this into a drafting view, and click on Open.
| | 01:34 | When you do that we can zoom in here,
we can see our CAD content.
| | 01:39 | And if we select on this particular thing
that just got inserted in, one of the things
| | 01:44 | we'll notice is up here on the Ribbon,
there is an option here for Delete Layers.
| | 01:49 | So for some reason we didn't want to see things
like the text, we could select on Delete Layers.
| | 01:55 | Click on this check box right here for text
hit OK and then suddenly none of the text
| | 02:01 | would be there anymore.
| | 02:03 | The advantage to being able to do this is
the fact that if we had been able to bring
| | 02:07 | this in and then hit this button right here
that says Explode which is currently grayed out,
| | 02:11 | then everything would have been an individual
piece inside of this particular view and it
| | 02:17 | would have been very difficult for us to be
able to come in here, clean it up and make
| | 02:21 | changes to everything that we
needed to be able make changes to.
| | 02:24 | So as a result of that by just deleting the
layers we can kind of get this CAD drawing
| | 02:29 | to such a state that maybe we can note it, draw over
the top of it without having individual pieces or lines.
| | 02:36 | That being said, if you link in a CAD drawing file
as opposed to importing in a CAD drawing file,
| | 02:42 | you're never going to have the actual
ability to hit the Explode command and it's
| | 02:47 | just always going to be grayed out for you.
| | 02:49 | But the reason why I bring that up is if we
happen to have inserted this in, then it would've
| | 02:55 | automatically increased the
size of our Revit drawing file.
| | 02:59 | At it's surface when you think about how big
a AutoCAD file is and you inserted in that
| | 03:03 | doesn't seem like such a big deal, but if
you insert it in 50 or 60 of them you can
| | 03:07 | guess how much tremendously bigger
your Revit drawing file size could become.
| | 03:13 | By linking this in, it doesn't actually add
any size any megabytes to the Revit file size.
| | 03:20 | So as a result of that, your drawling and
your model performance isn't going to really
| | 03:24 | be affected by linking these things in.
| | 03:27 | Now another thing that I like about being
able to link these in as opposed to importing
| | 03:32 | these in, is the fact that even though I can't
select on an individual line and be able make
| | 03:37 | modifications directly to it, I can draft
directly over the top of this kind of environment.
| | 03:43 | So when I say that what it means is that if
I come in here to my Annotate tools and then
| | 03:48 | I move over here towards the middle and
select on Detail Line, I then have all my typical
| | 03:54 | Line Tools which technically would snap to
endpoints, midpoints just like they would
| | 03:59 | if this had been a Revit
Line Work and Revit entities.
| | 04:04 | But also there's this option here for Pick
Lines and if we check on Pick Lines we can
| | 04:09 | come over here to where it has Line Styles
and pick a different Line Style off of the list.
| | 04:14 | In this case I'm going to pick on Wide Lines
just so we can see it; I know this is going
| | 04:18 | to be over bearing when we look at it.
| | 04:21 | And then I'm going to select on
one of these individual lines.
| | 04:24 | By doing this you can see that we can kind
of just play a tracing game around everything
| | 04:29 | inside of this model.
| | 04:31 | Obviously these lines are a little bit too
heavy, so I'm going to change this from being
| | 04:34 | Wide Lines to perhaps a
Medium Line and then click here.
| | 04:40 | And the advantage is, is what we're using
here is that this is not AutoCAD lines that
| | 04:45 | we're using that we're drawing in; we're
drawing Revit lines right over the top of this.
| | 04:50 | And what that means is after we've actually
come in here selected each of these individual
| | 04:54 | lines, retraced everything that we see here
in the view, it means we can finally select
| | 05:00 | on this and then delete it, and when we do,
all we would have left would be our AutoCAD
| | 05:06 | line work or AutoCAD detail information.
| | 05:09 | The advantage of that being is if we decided
to make changes to the AutoCAD information,
| | 05:13 | it wouldn't update inside of Revit.
| | 05:15 | If we decided to move the AutoCAD information
to a different directory or any of the save
| | 05:20 | and move this Revit information to another
location, then we wouldn't have to worry about
| | 05:26 | it losing its link with the CAD information because
we've redrawn it inside of this particular Revit detail.
| | 05:32 | One other nice thing about going through this
process and placing this inside of a drafting
| | 05:37 | view inside of Revit is the fact
that drafting views can be saved out.
| | 05:41 | So as a result of that if we wanted to be able
to save this drafting view out as a drawing file,
| | 05:47 | we absolutely could.
| | 05:49 | So in order to be able to do that I'm going
to come down here to the Drafting Views,
| | 05:53 | I'm going to right-click and then I'm just
going to right-click right here on the name
| | 05:58 | and you can see that by clicking on Save to New
File, if I click on that, it's going to ask
| | 06:03 | what name do you want to be able to give this
and at this point you could give it any name
| | 06:08 | that you wanted to, save it in your library
of different details and then you could reuse
| | 06:13 | this Revit detail again and again and
again in your future projects without having to
| | 06:18 | leverage that CAD information anymore.
| | 06:20 | So it's important to remember that by linking in
your CAD data you can quickly re-create
| | 06:25 | your details in Revit without permanently introducing
that AutoCAD information into your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Best practices for cleaning up CAD files| 00:00 | Sometimes due to project deadlines or some
other constraints it might be decided that
| | 00:04 | we need to bring our CAD details
directly into our Revit project.
| | 00:08 | Now in order to be able to do that I usually
don't like to load these directly into our
| | 00:12 | project first thing; I usually like to load
our CAD drawings into a blank project,
| | 00:19 | clean them up inside of the blank project to get
rid of such things as the AutoCAD text and
| | 00:24 | line weights and that sort of information.
| | 00:26 | And then after it's all cleaned up in the
blank project I like to load those CAD details.
| | 00:30 | which are now essentially
Revit details, into our Revit project.
| | 00:36 | So in order to be able to experiment and do
that we're going to create a new project and
| | 00:40 | then bring a CAD drawing file into it.
| | 00:43 | So underneath Projects we're going to
click on New, and we're going to select in this
| | 00:49 | case just the Structural Template.
| | 00:51 | If you have your own office template you'd
like to use, feel free to go ahead and use
| | 00:54 | that you can just click on Browse here, and
then find that Structural Template wherever
| | 00:59 | it's located on your network, and then,
click on OK to bring that up.
| | 01:07 | Once your project is open then the next
thing we are going to want to do is create some
| | 01:10 | drafting views to place these details into.
| | 01:14 | In this case, we are only going to need to
have one drafting view because we are only
| | 01:17 | going to be cleaning up one detail.
| | 01:20 | But if you have multiple different drafting
details you want to be able bring in from CAD,
| | 01:24 | go ahead and create a new drafting view
for each scale of AutoCAD drawing that you
| | 01:31 | are going to be bringing in.
| | 01:33 | So if you have an eighth inch drawing,
create an eighth inch drafting view.
| | 01:37 | If you have a three-quarter inch drawing,
create a three-quarter inch drafting view,
| | 01:42 | and then insert in each detail into
the appropriate scale of drafting view.
| | 01:47 | In this case, we're going to create a
one-inch equals one foot drafting view.
| | 01:52 | So to do that we're going to come up here to
View and we're going to create a New Drafting View.
| | 01:58 | In this case we could call it anything that
we would really want to, since we have been
| | 02:02 | talking about drafting views, I'm
just going to call this Drafting View.
| | 02:07 | Next thing we're going to do is that we're
going to set the scale, it would be appropriate
| | 02:10 | for the detail that we're
going to be bringing in.
| | 02:12 | And in this case, it's going
to be one inch equals a foot.
| | 02:15 | And like I mentioned before, if you're going to
be working with your own, create new individual
| | 02:19 | drafting views each with the appropriate scale for
that view that's getting ready to be brought into it.
| | 02:24 | Go ahead and click on OK.
| | 02:27 | This opens up the blank drawing environment,
and now, we can insert in our CAD files into
| | 02:32 | this blank drawing environment.
| | 02:33 | So we move up here to the Insert tab and then
we're going to import in that CAD information.
| | 02:41 | We want to be able to go to the directory
that has that particular CAD file in it,
| | 02:50 | in this case I'm going to go to
my Exercise Files directory.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to find that, and it's going to
be underneath Chapter 15 (Ch 15) and we're
| | 02:57 | going to bring in this Truss.dwg file.
| | 03:00 | Now we have some options as far as colors
go as far as positioning goes, just go ahead
| | 03:05 | and leave it as Preserve and
then Auto - Center to Center.
| | 03:08 | This is going to bring our drawing in, on
the screen we'll be able to see it, and it's
| | 03:13 | going to keep the colors, we're going to be able to
preserve and see the original colors from the CAD file.
| | 03:19 | One other thing that we are going to need
to do is usually by default is going to say,
| | 03:23 | Auto-Detect for import the units and sometimes
this works really well, other times not so much.
| | 03:29 | In the case of this particular detail we're
going to choose feet as the method we're going
| | 03:33 | to be importing it in, if you choose
inches it might be a twelfth of the size that it
| | 03:38 | needs to be or 12 times
bigger than what it needs to be.
| | 03:41 | In this case, we're going to do feet because
that's appropriate for the DWG file that we're
| | 03:44 | bringing in, and click on Open.
| | 03:49 | Now we can see that we have this file in our drawing,
it's at this one inch equals one foot scale,
| | 03:54 | I will point out that if we would ever
decide to change that that the information
| | 03:59 | theoretically can change once it
becomes an actual Revit drawing file.
| | 04:03 | Let me go ahead and change this
back to one inch equals a foot.
| | 04:09 | The next thing that we're going to do is
we're going to come up here, we're going to select
| | 04:13 | on the detail, and if you have a variety
of different details you just want to window
| | 04:16 | around all of them in order to be able to
select them all at the same time, and then
| | 04:20 | we're going to do an Explode and
we're going to do a Full Explode.
| | 04:24 | Now usually I don't recommend doing full explodes
but in this case I'd like to do a Full Explode
| | 04:28 | because we're going to pick every single
tiny piece of line work that's inside here and
| | 04:33 | convert it to something which is Revit line work as
opposed to AutoCAD information and AutoCAD line work.
| | 04:41 | The next step of the conversion process to
be able to clean our drawings up will be to
| | 04:46 | come in here, we'll window around all that
information, and then next come up here to
| | 04:50 | the Filter and select on Filter.
| | 04:55 | Now here we are going to be able to see each
and every line, we're seeing lines and beams,
| | 05:00 | connection, joist, reinforcement, text, title.
| | 05:04 | Each one of these actually in this
case happens to be an AutoCAD layer.
| | 05:08 | If you're used to seeing A- or S- in the
layer name that's what's going to be showing up
| | 05:13 | for you if you brought in your own detail,
so it'll be the actual name of the AutoCAD
| | 05:18 | layer showing up here.
| | 05:20 | And what we're going to want to do is we're
going to want to start off by just selecting
| | 05:24 | such things and maybe lines and
beam here, and then click on OK.
| | 05:29 | Next since that's been highlighted and we
can see that there's 18 of them, we can come
| | 05:34 | over here to the Line Styles and because this
was originally AutoCAD information, such things
| | 05:41 | as it's Beam, Joist, these
were all the AutoCAD layer names.
| | 05:46 | Well we don't want to have those and
import those into our Revit project.
| | 05:50 | So what we're going to do is we're going to instead
select one of our Revit line styles off of the list.
| | 05:55 | In this case, just so you can see it, I'm
going to select Wide Lines, but I will change it
| | 06:00 | back to Thin Lines so it
doesn't look overbearing.
| | 06:03 | I'll go ahead and click on Wide Lines here, we
can see how it's putting in some nice dark lines.
| | 06:09 | If I change this to be Thin Lines we can
see how it's nice and thin lines, and of course
| | 06:17 | if we decided to do medium lines, it'll give
us something somewhere in the middle as far
| | 06:20 | as our thicknesses go.
| | 06:23 | Now that being said, we can also see
it's now changed us to be black, why?
| | 06:28 | Because the original AutoCAD lines were blue
but our Revit lines are set up as being black.
| | 06:34 | Now we need to continue to do this for each and
every line that happens to be inside of our project.
| | 06:40 | So once again, you would highlight everything,
go to Filter, usually I use Check None to get
| | 06:46 | rid of everything being checked and then I
pick the next thing on the list, click OK,
| | 06:51 | and then choose the appropriate
line weight off of the list.
| | 06:55 | In this case I'm going to choose Medium Lines
and we can now see that everything that was
| | 06:59 | blue over here, now has the appropriate
line weight associated with it.
| | 07:03 | If you are going to do text, exact same
process; window around the text that you know that
| | 07:08 | you are going to want to change, in this case
I'm just doing it for the detail, but you
| | 07:12 | can window all of your details
at one time that you inserted in.
| | 07:18 | Come up here to the Filter, pick the text
notes off of the list or we could have done
| | 07:22 | the Check None instead of clicking each individual
one, click OK, and then swap that out with
| | 07:29 | actual Revit text on the fly.
| | 07:32 | Now something to know here is if this Truss-Calibri,
the Romans, each of these are the AutoCAD
| | 07:38 | fonts that got brought in.
| | 07:40 | This is the kind of information we are trying
to purge out of this drawing, so when we bring
| | 07:44 | it into our actual project file, it's not
cluttering up our actual project file with
| | 07:48 | AutoCAD information that we don't want in there
that no longer really conforms to our Revit standards.
| | 07:54 | So if we change this to be 3/32nd Arial, we can
see everything adjust to that 3/32nd Arial scale.
| | 08:03 | And you could do the same thing with these
individual things, as far as the titles go
| | 08:07 | change this to be eighth inch or
whatever seems to work out best for you.
| | 08:13 | And you can continue to do that for such things
as the heads on the leaders and in other sorts
| | 08:19 | of pieces of information.
| | 08:23 | In this case, we can see these are the detail
items and we could either delete them or change
| | 08:28 | them to something that, once again, happens
to be a representation of Revit geometry or
| | 08:32 | Revit colors and Revit properties.
| | 08:34 | Once when you finally get through that
entire process, the next thing you want to do is
| | 08:38 | purge out all the AutoCAD information
that got brought into your drawing file.
| | 08:43 | In order to do that we can find purge underneath
the Manage Tab, and then there is this option
| | 08:47 | here that says Purge Unused.
| | 08:49 | Now purging, what that's going to allow us
to do is it's going to take out all the extra
| | 08:53 | information, CAD information, Revit information
that is not directly related to the stuff
| | 08:58 | that we just drew, and if you click on OK to
that it'll get rid of all the extra content,
| | 09:04 | and as a result of that will get rid of a
lot of that extra AutoCAD information that
| | 09:08 | we didn't need to have
brought into our drawing files.
| | 09:12 | Finally, once you've done this to all your
different things, you've cleaned up all of your
| | 09:15 | drawings we've gotten rid
of our AutoCAD information.
| | 09:17 | The next thing that we'll want to do is
just save this project, or actually if you have
| | 09:23 | multiple different ones, you might even want
to start duplicating your different drafting
| | 09:28 | views or creating new drafting views, and
then copying and pasting each one of these out,
| | 09:32 | and then pasting them into their own
individual drafting view, so that each one
| | 09:37 | has their own detail in drafting view, and
you could have a list of 20, 30, 100 different
| | 09:43 | drafting views each with their own details in them.
| | 09:45 | And when you finally get to that point then
you can come in here, we can save this project
| | 09:50 | as being whatever makes sense for us.
| | 09:53 | In this case I am just going to call this CAD
for right now, save it into my Chapter 15 (Ch 15)
| | 09:58 | and I'm going to hit Save to that.
| | 10:05 | The next thing we would want to do is actually
load this into one of our projects and so
| | 10:09 | that we can see that I'm just going to create
a new project and you can do this as well,
| | 10:13 | just come up to the big R and do a new project,
create one just off of your base template again,
| | 10:20 | and remember that you could just be
inserting this into an active project that
| | 10:24 | you want to bring this into.
| | 10:26 | And the next thing we'll do is come up to
Insert and we'll want to insert from a file
| | 10:32 | those drafting views, we'll come in,
we'll try to find that off of our list.
| | 10:37 | So once again go to your Exercise Files directory,
come down here, we are going to search for
| | 10:44 | Chapter 15 (Ch 15) and then we are going to
look for that CAD file that we just created.
| | 10:50 | And now each and every one of the drafting
views that you just would have created are
| | 10:54 | going to show up here on the list and you
can put a checkmark next to each and every
| | 10:58 | one that you'd want to be
able to load into your project.
| | 11:01 | At that point you can click on OK and it'll
automatically load that into your existing
| | 11:08 | project as a nice cleaned up
drafting view and project.
| | 11:12 | And any of those would now show up with
the same name underneath your drafting views.
| | 11:16 | So it's a fair amount of cleanup work and
time involved but often doing this conversion
| | 11:22 | will be the fastest way to bring your existing CAD
work into Revit, while minimizing your project impact.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling CAD file visibility| 00:00 | Once you decide to use a CAD file inside of
Revit, we can still control the way it displays
| | 00:04 | on screen and in print by going in to the
Visibility/Graphics of the View and adjusting it there.
| | 00:10 | The follow we're looking at here on the screen,
CAD Visibility, what it is, is it's the exact
| | 00:15 | same CAD file that we were using to link in earlier
on by coming in and actually not linking it in,
| | 00:22 | but by importing that CAD information,
directly into the Revit environment.
| | 00:28 | Now that we are inside of this view and it
happens to be a Drafting view that it's located in,
| | 00:32 | we're going to just click inside of here
and I always like to just type V, on the keyboard
| | 00:37 | for Visibility-Visibility twice in order to
bring up the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.
| | 00:43 | With that being said, we can see the Visibility/
Graphics and the big Edit button is over here as well,
| | 00:47 | if you decide to click on that,
that'll bring it up to.
| | 00:51 | This brings up the Visibility/Graphics and we can see
that there is an Imported Categories option here;
| | 00:56 | now this is going to show anything
that we use for Import CAD and brought into
| | 01:01 | any kind of view and this is each and every
layer associated with that AutoCAD drawing
| | 01:07 | that got imported in to the view.
| | 01:10 | If we had multiple AutoCAD drawings in a
project we'd see each and every one of those listed
| | 01:14 | here with a little plus (+) sign next to them
and if you would expand it out you'd see all
| | 01:19 | those native AutoCAD Layers
showing up inside of Revit.
| | 01:22 | That being said, this is very much like
the Layer Properties dialog box inside of AutoCAD.
| | 01:29 | The reason is, is if we would select here where it
has lines and it just has this white space right here,
| | 01:34 | next to Joist for instance, if I select here and
click on Override we can see Weight, and Color, and Pattern.
| | 01:43 | Pattern being such things as center lines,
dash lines, dotted lines, that sort of thing.
| | 01:48 | These are all the same properties we would
have in our Layer Properties dialog box inside
| | 01:51 | of the AutoCAD environment where this
detail would have been originally drawn.
| | 01:55 | So all these properties since they're located
here, can also be changed inside of Revit.
| | 02:00 | So if we would decide to change this Joist
for instance instead of being the way that
| | 02:04 | it looked, to being perhaps a purple color or
a pink color and then change the Line Weight
| | 02:11 | of it to be very thick to maybe like a
number 12 and click on OK to that, and then,
| | 02:20 | I am going to move this over so that we can see
it on the screen and I am going to click on
| | 02:23 | the Apply button right here.
| | 02:24 | You see how we have these great big thick
lines now and this sort of pink purple color
| | 02:29 | is showing up here on the screen.
| | 02:31 | And if we decide to change that again, to
something it would make a little bit more
| | 02:34 | sense for us, maybe drop this down to a
number 4 or number 5 and click on OK and apply,
| | 02:40 | we can see how this automatically changes
on the screen and this is going to apply to
| | 02:45 | any of this information that shows
up underneath the Visibility Graphics.
| | 02:49 | So we can change Colors, Line Weights and
Essentially the way things print and display
| | 02:54 | on the screen all through the Visibility/Graphics
of any kind of detail that we import in from CAD.
| | 03:00 | There's nothing wrong with using CAD
information sparingly inside of Revit structure.
| | 03:05 | You don't want to add too many of these
details then or else it'll eventually start to bog
| | 03:09 | down your model and make things
slower and more difficult to use.
| | 03:14 | But if you do use these sparingly and also
use your Visibility/Graphics overrides as
| | 03:18 | controls, you can create details dynamically
on-the-fly just based on your linked in CAD Models.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. Architectural Underlay: Revit ProjectsLinking in a Revit model| 00:00 | When you're working with others that are
also using Revit, at some point you'll need to
| | 00:04 | link their model in your projects, so that
you can coordinate your work with theirs.
| | 00:08 | Let's practice this by loading in an
architectural model into this Revit project.
| | 00:14 | So in order to be able to start, we're
going to come in here to the Insert tab,
| | 00:19 | select on Insert, and then come over to Link Revit
and this is going to allow us to link in a
| | 00:25 | Revit file into our project.
| | 00:27 | Now the model we're going to link in is going
to be called architect, so go ahead and select
| | 00:31 | on that and now probably the most important part
about this process is this that says positioning.
| | 00:37 | Right now it's set to Auto - Center to Center
and what we really wanted to be is to
| | 00:41 | Auto - Origin to Origin.
| | 00:43 | In fact, there's really two different ones
that ideally if you're going to be linking
| | 00:46 | in an architectural model that you'll want to
use it's either going to be Origin to Origin
| | 00:50 | or By Shared Coordinates.
| | 00:52 | For the most part you're probably going to
be using Origin to Origin unless you and your
| | 00:58 | architect both agree to use the shared coordinates,
but to make a long story short on this,
| | 01:03 | the Origin to Origin, what it's going to allow
you to do, is that you both be sharing the
| | 01:06 | same point on your screen, so you'll be able
to bring their model in and not really have
| | 01:11 | to worry about it moving around should they
make changes and vice versa it's true as well.
| | 01:17 | So if you end up making changes to your model
and they link your model into their project
| | 01:21 | they won't have to worry about it moving around,
you'll know that it'll always update at the
| | 01:25 | same point and you'll always be working at
the same location and space, so go ahead set
| | 01:31 | that to Origin to Origin and click on Open.
| | 01:36 | After a couple of seconds we can see
that it started to bring something in.
| | 01:39 | Now we can't see all of our building just
yet and in part of that is visibility graphics
| | 01:44 | and the other part of that is the fact that
currently we're working inside of a structural
| | 01:48 | discipline and a big part of this building
that we just brought in is architectural.
| | 01:53 | So if we want to be able to change that part
of it, we can look underneath properties they
| | 01:57 | are on the left-hand side scroll down a
little bit on the list until you see discipline.
| | 02:03 | And right now it says Structural if we would
change it to Architectural we would probably
| | 02:07 | be able to see just about the entire
building or at least anything that wasn't shut off
| | 02:10 | in the visibility graphics.
| | 02:12 | But the key thing here is going to be to
move this down until we see this word right here
| | 02:16 | that says Coordination.
| | 02:18 | If we turn on Coordination and then either
move your mouse over here or just click on Apply,
| | 02:22 | we'll start to see more of
this building that we just linked in.
| | 02:28 | The next thing we should do is just go ahead
and take a look at this in a 3D view,
| | 02:32 | so we have a better idea of what
it is that we brought in.
| | 02:35 | So far we can kind of see
the outline of our building.
| | 02:38 | Once again I'll point out that it's probably
a deal with the structural being on as supposed
| | 02:43 | to the coordination view which
shows both architectural and structural.
| | 02:48 | So go ahead and change that to be Coordination,
we'll see a little bit more to get added to
| | 02:53 | it, so this is what we just got linked in.
| | 02:55 | Now there is going to be two more things
we're going to need to change after we've linked
| | 02:59 | this model into our project.
| | 03:01 | And the first thing is going to be,
| | 03:03 | if we go back to our First Floor plan or
to our Second Floor plan either one is going
| | 03:06 | to be just fine, we're going to
look for these elevation tags.
| | 03:12 | Now the elevation tags, as long as they are
sitting right there, aren't going to allow
| | 03:15 | us to be able to see the entire building if
we went to the East Elevation or the South Elevation.
| | 03:19 | And the logic behind that is the fact it
is currently sort inside of the building,
| | 03:24 | so let's just move this out so that we can see in this
direction to be able to see everything in our elevation.
| | 03:31 | And we'll need to do the same thing with our
North Elevation tag by just windowing around
| | 03:35 | it clicking and then dragging it to the outside
and doing the same thing here with this elevation
| | 03:40 | tag and just clicking and dragging it to the outside.
| | 03:44 | So now we'll be able to see from essentially
right about here over in this direction
| | 03:49 | be able see the whole building if
we would go to an Elevation view.
| | 03:52 | So, since we went ahead and moved our elevation tags,
let's go ahead and come into an Elevation view,
| | 03:58 | in this case a South Elevation view,
and take a look at our building.
| | 04:04 | This is what the architectural looks like so
far and one thing that they do have different
| | 04:09 | than what we have is the fact that they've
already put in their floor to floor heights here.
| | 04:15 | Right now their entry level is at 0 and I
believe that our floor plan is as well,
| | 04:20 | but I don't believe that ours happens to
be at the same elevation as theirs.
| | 04:25 | For its worth, theirs happens to be in metric ours
is in architectural or also known as imperial units.
| | 04:31 | So right now there is a saying is that 3800
which is the metric dimension and if we move
| | 04:37 | over here toward the middle and zoom in we
can see these are our levels which are currently
| | 04:43 | embedded in the project.
| | 04:45 | Our Level 1 happens to be at the same elevation,
but we need to go ahead and move our Level 2 up
| | 04:50 | to match what their Level 2 is going to be at.
| | 04:53 | So if you select on the Level 2, or actually
on our Level 2, and then click and just sort
| | 04:58 | of drag it up, it'll kind of snap in the place
of the next floor level and we can see that
| | 05:03 | we now have our level in at the 12 foot 6
mark which happens to be the same dimension
| | 05:08 | as what they have theirs set at.
| | 05:10 | And from here on now we would need to come in
and start to create our own levels by coming
| | 05:15 | in underneath our different structure tabs
and then selecting on Level over here right
| | 05:20 | above Datum and then just draw in
each and every level for our view.
| | 05:25 | And by doing that we would then be able to
start to place our structural components in
| | 05:28 | and start to do our work.
| | 05:31 | So as you can see linking in the architectural
Background/Revit model is really an easy process,
| | 05:37 | but we may need to make a few adjustments to
our work as well as the visibility properties
| | 05:41 | in order to be able to make it useful.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling linked objects in model visibility| 00:00 | One of the most common challenges for first-time
Revit users is understanding how to see the
| | 00:04 | appropriate items in the linked in Revit model.
| | 00:08 | The answer really lies in two separate areas, one is
the discipline and the other is visibility graphics.
| | 00:14 | As we can see on our screen, right now
we've linked in an architectural model and we're
| | 00:19 | really missing a lot of things, such as some
of the interior walls and really any of the
| | 00:24 | sort of structural information that maybe the
architect would have placed into this model.
| | 00:29 | The reasoning behind this is twofold, and
the first one is, the structural information
| | 00:33 | is being told to be shut off because the
discipline is currently showing up as being structural
| | 00:38 | as opposed to architectural, and since this is an
architectural model lot of that information is off.
| | 00:45 | Now if we look over here on the left-hand
side underneath Properties here, come about,
| | 00:49 | I don't know, about a-third of the way down,
there is an option here for Structural right
| | 00:53 | next to Discipline.
| | 00:56 | If instead of doing Structural, we say alright,
we want this to be Architectural and let's kind of
| | 01:00 | move our mouse over in here,
| | 01:02 | we can start to see a lot of the architectural
objects start to jump out on the screen.
| | 01:06 | The only bad part about this is, is if we
leave it as being architectural, some of
| | 01:10 | our structural information that we want to add into
this might not show up when it comes time to draw it.
| | 01:15 | So in order to be able to work in this kind
of environment where one thing wants to be
| | 01:19 | on versus another thing wanting to be on,
they've incorporated in here underneath Discipline,
| | 01:25 | the option for Coordination.
| | 01:26 | And if Coordination is turned on it means the
mechanical, the structural, the architectural
| | 01:31 | will have the ability to see all of
them on, theoretically, simultaneously.
| | 01:35 | So, if we would come down here to Coordination
and then sort of move the mouse over a few
| | 01:40 | more of our objects have now showed up here on
the screen, some of the stuff that we'd added in.
| | 01:45 | Now we're still missing a few things such
as some of these interior walls, but quite
| | 01:50 | a few of these objects are now
available to us inside of our view.
| | 01:54 | The reason why we can't see some of the interior
walls lies, and really the thing is probably
| | 01:59 | the most challenging part for people that
are first learning Revit, and that's going
| | 02:02 | to be the Visibility/Graphics.
| | 02:04 | But we can greatly simplify this process
by just doing these few simple steps.
| | 02:08 | First off, let's get to the Visibility/Graphics
and you can do that by either typing in VV
| | 02:13 | twice in the keyboard for Visibility,
Visibility or just select on the Edit button.
| | 02:18 | Next, one of the things beginners have the
tendency to make mistakes on, is to look down
| | 02:24 | on the list here and assume that the reason
why they can't see their objects is because
| | 02:28 | it isn't turned on in this location.
| | 02:31 | Well usually that is the case, but that only
applies to the stuff that you've done in your
| | 02:36 | model personally, it does not have necessarily
affect the stuff that you've brought in and
| | 02:41 | linked in to your Revit project.
| | 02:43 | The stuff that you've linked in to your Revit
project is going to show up on another tab
| | 02:47 | and that's going to be the Revit Links tab
up here underneath the Visibility/Graphics.
| | 02:52 | The next thing you'll need to do in order
to be able to make any sort of changes to
| | 02:55 | this is going to click By Host View right here.
| | 02:58 | That will point out as well, but there is
an option here for Halftone, so if you wanted
| | 03:03 | all of this project to look sort of like a
grayscale, look lighter, so that your work
| | 03:08 | stands out and their work looks grayed, you
could check halftone right here, it would
| | 03:12 | automatically apply a halftone to all this
line, so that it was much lighter and we're
| | 03:18 | just sort of fade into the background.
| | 03:20 | Go ahead and click on the By Host View though.
| | 03:23 | Right now there isn't much that we can do.
| | 03:24 | If we click on these other tabs they are all
going to show up as beam basically grayed out,
| | 03:28 | and the reasoning behind that is,
is that By host view right here is currently
| | 03:32 | has this little dot in its box.
| | 03:35 | But By Host View means is that it's going
to take on the properties that this view just
| | 03:40 | had by default, so your settings.
| | 03:43 | Another thing that we could do is we could
do it by the Linked view which will take on
| | 03:48 | the settings and properties visibility
settings of the project that you linked in.
| | 03:53 | So whatever that was the current settings
inside of the architect's drawing those would
| | 03:58 | be the visibility settings that
would show up inside of this view.
| | 04:02 | Now the one that you'll probably want to
use most often isn't either one of these.
| | 04:06 | It's going to actually be Custom, right here.
| | 04:09 | Whenever you click on Custom you can make
changes to any of these things that happened
| | 04:14 | to be just the default settings right now.
| | 04:17 | I know that I've come in here and I've changed
such things as view range, which tells Revit
| | 04:22 | how deep you want to be able to look into
the view, do you want to look a 100 feet down
| | 04:26 | or do you want to look just 2 feet down,
view filters in a variety of other things,
| | 04:30 | but the thing that you'll probably want to be
able to change most is going to be able to
| | 04:34 | turn on those architectural walls
that we brought into the project.
| | 04:38 | And we can't really do that from this menu,
we need to come up to the Model Categories
| | 04:42 | Button right here or the Tab right there.
| | 04:45 | Once you select on that tab the next thing
that we can do is we can come down here to
| | 04:48 | where it says Filter list and we can choose
which items we want to be able to see on the list.
| | 04:53 | So if we didn't want to see their
structural information we could clear that out,
| | 04:57 | if we didn't want to see their architectural
information we could clear the architectural information
| | 05:01 | button out right there.
| | 05:03 | In this particular case I want to go ahead
and come over here and make sure the both
| | 05:06 | Structural and Architectural is on at the
same time and the reason why we want to be
| | 05:09 | able to do that and so I can kind of compare
them and see what their information is.
| | 05:13 | Next, instead of By Host View we're going
to change this to say custom and the moment
| | 05:18 | that we click Custom we now have the ability to go
in and then put little checks next to each of these.
| | 05:25 | And I'm going to look down on the list,
decide which items I want to be able to turn on,
| | 05:30 | and that could be anything from topography
which happens to be the site related to this
| | 05:34 | building, or including those things which are
walls and we can see that the walls are currently
| | 05:40 | turned on so that we'll be able to see some of
those interior walls suddenly show up for us.
| | 05:45 | But now that this custom has been checked
and we know that walls is on, let's go ahead
| | 05:49 | and click on OK, and OK, and we can start
to see some of these objects are starting
| | 05:54 | to appear back in our scene again.
| | 05:57 | Let's once again go in the Visibility/Graphics
one more time and let's try to turn on just
| | 06:00 | a few more things and make sure that
everything is going to be on we want to have on.
| | 06:04 | So to do that you can just go the VV, go to
Revit Links, select on Custom, come back in
| | 06:11 | again to your Model Categories.
| | 06:13 | And in this case I just want to make sure
that everything is on, we want to be able to see,
| | 06:16 | and I'm thinking that maybe some curtain walls
are on which is the reason why we didn't
| | 06:19 | see everything immediately turn on.
| | 06:21 | And we're just going to come down here to
the word All and we're going to select all
| | 06:26 | and put a checkmark in just one of these blank boxes.
| | 06:29 | Now everything that's architectural should
be on for us, and we can click on OK, and
| | 06:36 | click on OK, and now we can see all those
interior walls, we can see the site, we can
| | 06:41 | see everything inside of our view.
| | 06:43 | And the key to this being is that whenever
we go in our Visibility/Graphics this is all
| | 06:48 | view-specific, so it's only turn it on inside
of this view, if we wanted it to be able to
| | 06:53 | see it in every view we'd have to go in
each view and turn on our settings and be able
| | 06:56 | to see this specific thing that we want to
be able to see from that architectural model.
| | 07:01 | So the key to adjusting the visibility of a
linked in model is remembering two things.
| | 07:06 | First is, what is the discipline of the
model that you're linking in, and second,
| | 07:11 | did you turn on and off the proper
elements in the visibility graphics.
| | 07:15 | Once you have a solid understanding of those
areas you'll have a fairly easy time of getting
| | 07:19 | these models to display appropriately.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Options for copying and monitoring important building elements in a structure| 00:00 | The Copy Monitor Tool is used to setup projects and
monitor important building elements in a structure.
| | 00:06 | In this exercise let's use Copy/Monitor
on the linked in projects column grid here.
| | 00:12 | This happens to be the linked in architectural
model, and right now the only thing that we
| | 00:16 | have actually in here are our own
levels as well as our own elevation symbols.
| | 00:21 | We haven't drawn anything physically
inside of this model just yet.
| | 00:25 | What we'll want to do is we want to do what's
called a Copy and Monitor on each one of these
| | 00:31 | little circular shapes which are our
column grids throughout the building.
| | 00:35 | By doing a Copy/Monitor on these, it means
that if the architect would try to move his
| | 00:39 | columns from one location to another, us as
being the ones that are doing the structural
| | 00:44 | design will automatically get notified that
the fact he moved that and then we all have
| | 00:48 | the opportunity of A,
| | 00:50 | either accepting that or B,
| | 00:52 | not accepting that change
inside of the Revit model.
| | 00:56 | So, in order to do this since we're going
to be collaborating with this other person,
| | 01:02 | we need to come up here to the
Collaborate tab up on the Ribbon.
| | 01:05 | Next, there's an option here that says Copy/Monitor,
so we'll go ahead and select on Copy/Monitor
| | 01:11 | and it's going to ask us what is it that
we want to be able to Copy and Monitor.
| | 01:16 | Is it going to be something in our current
project or is it going to be a file that's
| | 01:19 | currently linked in to our project.
| | 01:21 | In this case this is a model that's linked in
to our project so we're going to select Linked.
| | 01:26 | Next, move your mouse down until you're right on
top of that linked file and then just click it once.
| | 01:33 | This way it knows which thing it is that
we're getting ready to execute this command for.
| | 01:38 | The reason why this is called Copy/Monitor
is that we're going to be copying in to our project
| | 01:43 | a copy of their structural grid and
it's going to be located in the exact same
| | 01:49 | location as where their
structural grid happens to be at.
| | 01:53 | Then it's going to be monitoring that
structural grid for changes, so should their file change
| | 01:59 | then we'll have the option to automatically
update our file to be able to match their changes.
| | 02:05 | Now during this copy process there is the
option for us to include our own symbology
| | 02:10 | as opposed to the other individual symbols.
| | 02:13 | What that means is, is oftentimes an architect,
an engineer, will have their own custom symbols
| | 02:17 | that they use in the office to indicate such
things as walls or column grids or objects like that.
| | 02:22 | We might not necessarily want to use their
standards; instead we might want to use our
| | 02:26 | time-proven standards instead.
| | 02:28 | In order to be able to do that we can come
underneath Options here, click on Options
| | 02:34 | and then we can select on the thing that we want to
be able to monitor, we will be able to make a copy of.
| | 02:38 | In this case we're going to do the Grids.
| | 02:41 | Here we can see that they're using these original
families of theirs which are called 6.5mm Bubble.
| | 02:48 | Ours happens to be called, in
this case, quarter inch Bubble (1/4).
| | 02:51 | If we wanted to be able to click in here and
then swap out another one of our structural
| | 02:56 | grid bubbles we could.
| | 02:58 | But in this case we'll just go ahead and use
the quarter inch Bubble (1/4) and so instead
| | 03:01 | of actually copying in their family in our
project that has their look; we get to use
| | 03:06 | our family with our look in our design.
| | 03:10 | Once you have that set and then have all
these families lined up, you can come here to OK
| | 03:15 | and now we want to go through
the process of doing the copy.
| | 03:18 | So move up here, select on Copy.
| | 03:20 | We want to do more than one, so make sure
here on the Options Bar that you put a check
| | 03:24 | next to Multiple and then we're just
going to window around this entire thing.
| | 03:31 | Once the entire thing is highlighted, everything
that potentially could be copied inside of
| | 03:35 | the project is now highlighted blue.
| | 03:38 | We don't want to copy everything, we don't
want to monitor everything, so we're going
| | 03:42 | to move to this little thing right here which
is our Filter symbol and select on the Filter.
| | 03:47 | Here we can see all the different things
that it is thinking about trying to monitor,
| | 03:50 | it is trying to monitor Floors
and Walls and Structural Columns.
| | 03:54 | I really have no problem necessarily in monitoring Structural
Columns, if they have columns that are not on a grid.
| | 04:00 | But since all of their columns are on a
grid I don't really want to monitor those.
| | 04:04 | It's a good rule of thumb; usually
monitoring Floors and Walls usually isn't needed.
| | 04:10 | So I pretty much always
just clear that out as well.
| | 04:13 | The thing is really going to be important
to us right now; it's going to be monitoring
| | 04:16 | these structural grids, so make
sure there's a checkmark next to Grids.
| | 04:21 | One other thing I'll say is if we executed
this command inside of an Elevation View another
| | 04:24 | thing that we could copy and monitor are
the Levels and every once in a while if it's a
| | 04:29 | very complex project I will copy their Levels
into my project and then monitor those as well,
| | 04:35 | so should the floor to floor heights
change, I can get automatic alerts associated
| | 04:40 | to that telling me that their
floor to floor height had changed.
| | 04:42 | But we're not doing that in this project,
which is only a two story building I believe and
| | 04:47 | we're just going to select on
Grids right here and we'll click on OK.
| | 04:53 | Next thing, it's very tempting to hit the
big green checkmark but don't do it right now.
| | 04:58 | The reason is, is it will just
kind of cancel you out of the Command.
| | 05:01 | What you really need to be able to do is
click on the Finish button right here on Options.
| | 05:06 | This could take a few seconds, in this
case it will only take maybe two seconds.
| | 05:10 | I've seen this take 10, 15 seconds on slower
computers, but once this is finally done we
| | 05:16 | can see that each and every one in these
grids hasn't now not just been copied, but it's
| | 05:21 | now also being monitored and that's what
this symbol us indicating, is that each of these
| | 05:25 | is being monitored by Revit.
| | 05:28 | As a result of that if we go ahead and just
of sort of zoom in here, we can sort of see
| | 05:34 | these double lines and the reason why that is
is that we're seeing their original bubble
| | 05:39 | as well as our new bubble
which just got copied in.
| | 05:43 | And if their bubble should happen to move,
then we'll get an alert saying something has
| | 05:48 | changed and do we want to update our structural grid
bubble to be inline with their structural grid bubble.
| | 05:54 | Let's go ahead and click on Finish to this.
| | 05:58 | Now the next thing I'm going to have you
do is I'm going to have you come up here and
| | 06:01 | I'm going to have you hit on Save.
| | 06:03 | So go ahead and let's just save this
project and we're going to have you actually close
| | 06:09 | out of this model in order to do the next step.
| | 06:11 | What we're going to do is we're going to go
ahead and open up the architect's model,
| | 06:14 | we're going to move this bubble just a little
bit and then we're going to open up our model
| | 06:19 | again and see what the messages is.
| | 06:21 | So go ahead and close out of this,
we're going to open up the architect's work.
| | 06:27 | So underneath Ch 16, find
architect and click on Open.
| | 06:35 | Give it a couple of seconds, then the next
thing we're going to do is we're going to
| | 06:38 | go to the 01 - Entry Level, we're going to
move down here to, oh let's just do bubble #8,
| | 06:44 | it's kind of not in the way of anything.
| | 06:47 | We're going to select on it, these are his
columns that are showing up right there and
| | 06:52 | if we decide to click and just sort of drag
and hold this down and move this over just
| | 06:55 | a little bit, we can now see that his
columns have moved, his grid bubble has moved
| | 07:01 | and what this is going to mean is that this is
going to update inside of our project as well.
| | 07:06 | So let's go ahead and
come up here and save this.
| | 07:09 | We're going to close this
view down, close his model down.
| | 07:16 | And then we want to come back in and we can
either go to Open and then open up our project
| | 07:20 | or you can just click on Copy/Monitor
here to open our project backup.
| | 07:25 | You'll get this big warning message saying
that his drawing has been updated and it's
| | 07:30 | going to need what's called Coordination Review.
| | 07:33 | So that's okay, just click on OK.
| | 07:35 | If we zoom out and just kind of zoom back
in here, we can now see where his moved to
| | 07:39 | and we can see where ours currently is at.
| | 07:44 | Next thing underneath the Collaborate Tab,
remember it said it needed a Coordination Review.
| | 07:50 | Well we can click on the Coordination
Review button up here; we're going to select the
| | 07:54 | linked file which is the same way that
we went about setting this to begin with.
| | 08:00 | And now any changes that would have
happened will now show up here on this list.
| | 08:04 | In this case it's
telling us that the grid moved.
| | 08:08 | If we would highlight where here it says
architect, we can see his highlight in blue.
| | 08:12 | If we do Grids here we can see ours highlight.
| | 08:15 | If there's not a current view open that's
going to show this information, we could always
| | 08:19 | click on the big button here that says Show
and it automatically open up a view inside
| | 08:23 | of our project that would show this condition.
| | 08:26 | Now we have a couple of different options.
| | 08:29 | The first option up here is called Postpone,
which means we'll put off making a decision
| | 08:34 | on this until later.
| | 08:36 | We could Reject it, if we'll reject it we
will lose this error message that we're seeing
| | 08:41 | right here, but we will essentially be
saying no, we're not going to update our model.
| | 08:46 | We could do Accept difference.
| | 08:48 | If we decide to do Accept difference we'll
just say, yeah we know that there is a difference
| | 08:54 | but that's okay with us.
| | 08:56 | You'll continue to copy and monitor it but
it will accept the fact that those two things
| | 09:00 | happen to be apart from each other.
| | 09:02 | And then the final thing that we can do here,
really and this is what I want to do, is I'm
| | 09:05 | going to go ahead and modify the grid.
| | 09:08 | Essentially update my structural grid, the
match what he has or perhaps in the real world
| | 09:13 | it'd actually be the other way around if
we modified our structural grid he'd have to
| | 09:16 | update his in order to be able to match
our changes and then if we click on Apply,
| | 09:23 | we can now see that ours just
updated to match his conditions.
| | 09:27 | So as you can see if you modify the monitor
elements then Revit will warn you that a change
| | 09:32 | has been made and ask you
if you want to accept it.
| | 09:35 | It's this kind of monitoring system that's
made people want to learn Revit to begin with.
| | 09:39 | It's the ability to monitor information and
provide feedback on project changes, that's
| | 09:44 | the type of feature that saves project teams money
by eliminating these kinds of costly mistakes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionNext steps| 00:00 | Thanks for watching the Revit Structure
Essentials Training course here on lynda.com.
| | 00:05 | Before you leave I wanted to give you a few
resources that you might be able to take advantage of.
| | 00:10 | The first, of course, is lynda.com and their
Revit Tutorials and Architectural Training courses.
| | 00:15 | Here you'll see things including Revit
Architecture 2013 Essential Training.
| | 00:20 | One of my own courses, Designing a House in
Revit Architecture, as well as Revit Architecture:
| | 00:26 | Rendering, and several others.
| | 00:28 | Also, there's another site called
Autodesk Seek which is seek.autodesk.com.
| | 00:34 | You can type in different content you might
be interested in such as furniture or walls
| | 00:39 | or any kind of family.
| | 00:42 | Type in here on the list, click search and
you'll get a list of all these different families
| | 00:46 | that you can download directly
from manufacturer's websites.
| | 00:50 | Also we have the Revit Users
LinkedIn group, my own group on LinkedIn.
| | 00:54 | Currently we have over 15,000 members and
perhaps close to 20,000 members by the end of the year.
| | 01:01 | At this site you can ask questions and
there's a good chance that I'll read it and I can
| | 01:04 | even respond to you if
you have further questions.
| | 01:07 | That being said once again, thank you
for watching this course on lynda.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
